妙法蓮華經文句 白話全本 · 冊3

方便品釋·略廣與權實—方便品 · 偈頌(頌釋迦章) · 7 單元 · 第 36 冊 · 冊目次

方便品釋·略廣與權實Skillful Means · Brief and Extensive Exposition; Provisional and Real

全文五層 →Full five layers →
白話Vernacular

一、略釋方便三義

解釋〈方便品〉,有略釋與廣釋兩部分。略釋又分兩項:先作簡略解釋,再加以料簡。

第一種解釋,『方』是法,『便』是用。法有方、有圓,運用也有差別與會合。三種權法如矩,是方;一種實法如規,是圓。智慧若通達矩,便善於運用偏法來契合眾生;智慧若通達規,便善於運用圓法來契合眾生。

譬如偏舉一指來指示偏處,這是舉偏法來標示相應的智慧:應當以法解釋方,以運用解釋便。若總舉手指來指示圓處,便應以祕解釋方,以妙解釋便。用偏法解釋方便,大抵是隨順眾生的欲求,不是佛的本懷;例如經中使眾生離開種種執著、脫離三界苦,所以如來殷勤稱歎方便。這層意思可以解釋其他經典,卻不是本品的正意。

第二種解釋,方便就是門。門能使人通過,並通向所要到達之處。權宜而簡略的方便都是逗引,為真實作門。真實之義得以顯明,功勞來自方便;方便由能夠顯實而得名。因此以門解釋方便,正如經中所說:『開啟方便之門,顯示真實之相。』這層意思也可以解釋其他經典,仍不是本品的正意。

第三種解釋,『方』是祕,『便』是妙。能妙達於方,便是真正的祕。有人點示衣服裡本有的無價寶珠,這顆珠與國王頭頂唯一的寶珠沒有兩樣;有人指出作客傭工的人原是長者之子,傭工與長者子也不是兩個不同的人。這類說法既是祕,也是妙。經中說:『只有我知道這個實相,十方諸佛也是如此。』『止住,止住,不必再說;我的法微妙,難以思量。』所以,用祕解釋方,用妙解釋便,才正是本品之意,因此題名為〈方便品〉。

二、料簡三釋與方便、權四句

現在料簡前三種解釋。第一種方法之釋,是在本體之外另說方便,是教化眾生時所用的權宜,屬於隨他意而說。第二種門之釋,同樣是在本體之外另說方便,兼有自行與化他的權宜,屬於隨自意與隨他意而說。第三種祕妙之釋,是與真實同體的方便,就是自行之權,屬於隨自意而說。

第一種方便既不是能入之門,也不是所入之理;第二種方便是能入之門,不是所入之理;第三種方便是所入之理,不是能入之門。由此可知,名稱雖然相同,意義卻大不一樣。世人多半看不見這一點,便任意解釋〈方便品〉。〔以下從略〕

有人問:『方便與權有什麼關係?』

回答說,可以用四句分別:第一,方便破權;第二,權破方便;第三,方便修權、權也修方便;第四,方便就是權、權也就是方便。

所謂方便破權,是說四種教法都是祕妙的方便;這種方便能破除隨他意而說的權。所謂權破方便,是說這裡的權是同體之權,能破除在本體之外另立的方便。相修的意思也可以依此理解,相即的意思也可以依此理解。〔以下從略〕前三句可以用來解釋其他經典,第四句才是本品之意。所以《正法華經》題作〈善權品〉:權與方便沒有兩樣,甚至低頭、舉手都能成就佛道,方便與善權都是真實。

三、廣釋先破舊解

廣釋先列舊人對五時權實的解釋。

第一,十二年前,以照見無常事相為權,以照見無常之理為實,所指的是阿毘曇。智者說,《大智度論》已把觀無常判作對治法,屬於前三種悉檀,怎能把它直接判為實?所以不是本品所用。

第二,十二年後的《般若》,以照見假有為權,以照見假有即空為實。可是《大智度論》也破除這種理解:念想之觀已經除去,言語之法也都寂滅。若還在觀察假有即空,仍舊只是觀想,所以不是本品所用。

第三,《淨名經》《思益經》以內在照鑒空、有二境為實智,以向外變動、應用為權智。智者說,內鑒與外用仍然分成兩邊,沒有進入不二之門,所以不是本品所用。

第四,《法華經》以三三為權、四一為實。智者說,若三種權法一向不與實相會,一種實法又完全不關聯三權,仍不是本品所用。

第五,《涅槃經》以金剛道以前的無常為權,以金剛道以後的常為實。智者說,道以前的真如也是常,道以後的如量智也仍有權用。因此,這五種依時分判的權實都不是本品所用;乃至半字、滿字與四宗所說的權實二智,也不是本品所用。

又有人把方便解作暫且權置,把實解作審定真實;有人把方便解作權巧,把實解作智慧;有人把方便解作權假,譬如在門外暫設三車;有人把方便解作權宜,因為隨宜宣說三乘;又有人以秤錘譬權,移到秤桿前端就重,移到後端就輕,放在中間便平,以此配合佛智的照察稱量。

這些解釋都只取一條義路。權爾、權假只就處所說,權宜只就法門說,權巧與秤錘只就智能說;各自不能包攝其他層面,義理也沒有融通微妙,所以不能用它們解釋本品。

又有人建立四種二慧。第一種是一慧為權、一慧為實;第二種是空、有二智,觀空而不取證,便能離開二乘,涉入有而不受染,便能超出凡夫;第三種以內在寂靜照空、有為實,以向外起用為權;第四種以金剛道前後的常、無常分判權實。

第一對二慧使人生信,第二對使人生解,第三對用來化他,最後一對是果。這些二慧又有三番轉折:第一番以有為俗、空為真;第二番以空與有都為俗,以非空非有為真;第三番以空、有為二,以非空非有為不二,再把二與不二都判作俗,以非二非不二為真。教與智也依此而分。

為什麼有這些不同?因為要隨順人的根機。有人聽到前一種說法不能領悟,聽到後一種才領悟,所以二諦有不同說法;如來又常依二諦說法,所以二諦有三門;佛教雖然很多,也不出這三門。又因為要漸次引導眾生:凡夫執著心與形色是真實,其實並不真實,法性空才是真。凡夫因此捨有取空,所以再說空、有都屬於俗,非空非有才是真。有人捨離兩邊以後又滯著中道,所以第三番還要遠離兩邊,也不執著中道,這才是真。

這套說法用來接引五乘人:先引凡夫生信而出離有,次引二乘進入中道,再引菩薩把中與偏一併捨離。又對學習中道的人說,三假是世間,三假空是真;這只得到第一層意思。第二層則說,非三假之處,空、有都屬於俗,非空非有才是真。〔以下從略〕

四、總破漸次,正立一切法四句

智者詳細考察上述解釋,認為它們只是旁依五時來顯示自己的意思,想要排除漸次階梯的過失;它們可以解釋其他經典,卻不是本品之意。

經中說:『使一切眾生都能看見。』既然如此,怎能把開悟分成不同的先後時節?又說:『直截捨棄方便。』怎麼還要用漸次階梯去會入圓妙?又把最初判作生信,其次判作生解,再次判作化他,最後判作果,這與本經使眾生悟入的意思有什麼關係?

天親列出本經十七種名稱,第十三名為大巧方便;《大乘方便經》又說方便有十種,第九名為善巧,能移轉二乘,使其進入大乘方便波羅蜜。由此可知,本品所說是如來方便攝受一切法,如虛空包容萬色,如大海容納眾流,怎能只用諸師的一枝一派,解釋法界整體的大都會?

現在正面說明權實,先作四句:一切法都是權,一切法都是真實,一切法也權也實,一切法既非權也非實。

第一,一切法都是權。經文說:『諸法有這樣的性、相、體、力、本、末等。』只要稍有言說施設,都屬於權。

第二,一切法都是真實。經文說:『如來善巧宣說諸法,使眾生的心歡悅。』眾生以進入真實為歡悅。經又說:『諸法本來常自寂滅。』又說:『如來所說的一切,都到達一切智地。』又說:『全都真實,並不虛妄。』《大般涅槃經》也說四句全都不可言說。

第三,一切法也權也實。經文所說『諸法的如實之相』,是同時說明一切法既權又實;譬如不淨觀,也有真實的一面,也有虛設的一面。〔以下從略〕

第四,一切法既非權也非實。經文說:『不如,也不異。』又說:『也不行上、中、下法,有為、無為法,實、不實法;非虛、非實,才是如實之相。』

如果一切法都是權,還有什麼不能破除?即使有百千位老師,每位又作百千種說法,也沒有一種不是權。如來有所言說尚且屬於權,何況人師的言說,怎會一定不是權?前面列出的說法全都可以這樣破除。

如果一切法都是真實,又有什麼不能破除?經說:『只有這一件事是真實,其餘兩種都不是真。』究竟之道只有一條,怎能另有許多究竟之道?前面列出的諸師都應破除執著而進入真實,怎能仍守住自己的巢窟?

如果一切法也權也實,又有什麼不能破除?一切法都有權、有實,怎能只肯定自己這一途,而把他人的不同解釋全都否定?每一法中都有權實,不能一向判權,也不能一向判實。

如果一切法既非權也非實,又有什麼不能破除?為什麼還要紛紛擾擾,強行建立?只是直列四句名稱,破執之力已經如此;遠觀其玄旨,便已如此曠蕩、高明,何況進一步討論它的旨趣?

五、由十法的生起到逐雙解釋

現在就有權有實這一句,再開成十法,並用八番解釋:第一,列十種名稱;第二,說明生起次第;第三,逐一解釋;第四,引經作證;第五,把十法結成三種權實;第六,分別三種權實照三種二諦;第七,依諸經判權實;第八,依本迹判權實。

第一,列名。十種是:事與理、理與教、教與行、縛與脫、因與果、體與用、漸與頓、開與合、通與別、悉檀。

第二,生起。從無住之本建立一切法。無住是理,一切法是事。因有理、事,所以有教;因有教,所以有行;因有行,所以有縛、有脫;因有解脫,所以成因、成果;因有果,所以本體顯發而能起用;因而有漸、頓的教化。由於開出漸、頓,所以有開、有合;因有開、合,所以有通、別兩種利益;分別兩種利益,所以有四悉檀。這就是十章的次第。〔以下從略〕

第三,逐一解釋。

事與理:理是真如。真如本來清淨,無論有佛出世或沒有佛出世,都恆常不變,所以理名為實。事是心、意、識等,能造清淨與不清淨的業,變動而不決定,所以事名為權。沒有理,事情便無從建立;沒有事,理也不能顯出。事有顯理之功,所以如來殷勤稱歎方便。

理與教:把前面的理、事合起來,都相對稱為理,譬如真諦、俗諦都稱為諦。諸佛體證此理而成聖,聖者正是真實。佛要把自己所證之法向下施與眾生,便依理施設言教,所以教是權。沒有教,理便無從顯示;理之所以能顯,依靠教法,所以如來稱歎方便。〔以下從略〕

教與行:依教求理,便生正行。行有進趣深淺的差別,所以行名為權;教本身沒有進趣深淺的差別,所以教名為實。沒有教,行便無從建立;沒有行,也無從會入教旨。會教依靠行,所以如來稱歎方便。〔以下從略〕

縛與脫:行若違背理,便形成繫縛;縛是虛妄,所以稱權。行若順理,便生解脫;這一解脫冥合於理,所以稱實。沒有繫縛,便無從發起求脫之心;得到解脫,又正由繫縛為緣。譬如依靠死屍渡海,死屍也有幫助人到達彼岸的力量,所以稱歎方便。

因與果:因有向前進趣、暫時施用的作用,所以名為權;果能使修行到達終點、永久證得,所以名為實。沒有果,因便沒有可期望的歸處;沒有因,果也不能自己顯現。因此,以二觀為方便道,斷惑成因,進入中道解脫之果。若沒有二觀,怎能契入中道?果由因而至,所以稱歎方便。

體與用:前面的方便是因,正觀而入住是果;住與出又分成體、用。體就是實相,沒有分別;用則建立一切差別法,如大地能生起種種萌芽。沒有大地,萌芽無從生起;沒有萌芽,大地的生發力也不能顯出。沿流可以得源,推用可以識體;用有顯體之功,所以稱歎方便。

漸與頓:修因證果以後,從體起用;起用時同時有漸、有頓。現在只說起用:用漸為權,用頓為實。若沒有漸次接引,便無從進入頓法;從漸而得實,所以稱歎方便。

開與合:從頓法開出漸法。漸法自己不能自行合回,也不能與頓法相合,所以名為權;漸法到達究竟,便還歸、會合於頓,所以名為實。由開而後能合,開具有成合之力,便由此受方便之名,所以稱歎方便。

通與別的利益:通是半字無常之益,別是滿字常住之益。可是常住之益道路遙長,眾生容易中途退失,因此先用化城接引,使人產生安穩之想,然後息滅化城,再引向寶所。若沒有半字之益,便無從會入常住;半字有顯示滿字的功用,所以稱歎方便。

四悉檀:前三悉檀屬於世間,所以是權;第一義悉檀超出世間,所以是實。若不經世間,便不能出世;由前三悉檀,才能得到第一義,所以如來稱歎方便。應當用前面四句解釋這十番權實,其中前三句是其他經典的意思,第四句才是本品之意。〔以下從略〕

六、第四番:先通引全經,再別引本品

第四,引經作證。這十種義理通於大、小教,遍及一切法;現在先取《法華經》作證。

經說:『看見三界,卻不同於三界之見。』三界是事,不同於三界之見是理。經說:『諸法寂滅,不可用言語宣說。』這是理;又說佛『以方便力為五比丘說法』,這是教。

經說:『若能聽聞這部經,便是善行菩薩道。』以此證教與行。又說:『你們所行的是菩薩道;佛子行道完畢,來世便能成佛。』

經說眾生以『種種因緣尋求佛道』,又說『只離虛妄,便名解脫』,以此證縛與脫。又說眾生『其實還沒有得到一切解脫』,又要『盡行諸佛所有道法』,最後『在道場成就佛果』,以此證縛脫與因果。〔以下從略〕

經說:『我以佛眼觀見六道眾生。這些眾生起初看見我身,聽到我所說的法,便全都信受,進入如來智慧;只有先前修習、學習小乘的人除外。』前半證體與用,後半證漸與頓。〔以下從略〕

窮子先逃走,中間受雇除糞,後來得到家財,顯示開與合;先使行人止息於化城,後來引到寶所,顯示通與別;種種欲、種種性相、種種憶念等,顯示四悉檀。以上是通引全經作證。

現在再別引〈方便品〉。所引次序雖不依十雙排列,十種經文仍全都具足。

『諸佛智慧極深、無量,祂們的智慧之門難解、難入。』一切事理、所緣之境與能觀之智等,都名為實;用來施設、詮辨的言教則是智慧之門,名為權。這證明理與教的權實。經又說此門難解難入,一切聲聞、辟支佛不能了知,這證明縛與脫的權實。

為什麼如此?從『佛曾親近無數諸佛』到『名稱普遍傳聞』,證明教與行的權實;從『成就極深、未曾有之法』到『隨宜所說,意趣難解』,證明體與用的權實;『我從成佛以來』,成佛就是果,果必定有因,證明因果的權實。

從『以種種因緣、譬喻』直到『使眾生離開一切執著』,證明漸與頓的權實。為什麼?因為『如來的方便與知見都已具足』,又證明開與合的權實。

『諸佛為大事因緣而出現在世間,要使眾生開、示、悟、入佛的知見』,說的是利益的權實。『總括要點來說,佛全都成就』,顯示前三悉檀的成就;『止住,止住,不必再說』,顯示第一義悉檀,這便是四悉檀的權實。

為什麼如此?從『佛成就第一希有之法』到『諸法實相』,是理;『所謂諸法有這樣的相』,是事,這證明理與事的權實。

這一段長行說明五佛的權實,每一尊佛都是如此。《法華論》解釋諸佛智慧甚深,稱為證甚深。證甚深有五種:義甚深、實體甚深、內證甚深、依止甚深、無上甚深。無上甚深是證得大菩提。論又把智慧門解作所說教法之義甚深,這與理、教權實相同。

《法華論》把佛親近百千諸佛解作修行甚深,把勇猛精進、名稱普聞解作增長功德甚深,與教、行權實相同。它把成就甚深未曾有法解作微妙事甚深,把意趣難解等解作無上甚深、入甚深,與體、用權實相同。

論把『我從成佛以來』解作宣說如來功德成就之法,與因、果權實相同;把無數方便解作教化成就、說法成就,與漸、頓權實相同;把如來方便知見乃至深入無際等解作自身成就不可思議之境,勝過其他一切菩薩,這是在說利。

論又把能種種分別、悅可眾心等解作言語成就,這是在說益,與利益權實相同;把總括要點、止住不說等解作可教化眾生成就,與四悉檀分別可化、不可化之意相同。

論把只有佛與佛才能究盡,解作無量福德成就,唯有諸佛能知;如來法身之體不變,所以能覺、能自證成就,也能隨順眾生宣說一切諸法相等,與理、事權實相同。這部論解釋佛經,現在本疏所立與經、論兩位聖者的意思暗合,可以說與修多羅、優波提舍都相合。

七、第五番:結成三種權實與三番釋品

第五,結成權實。這十種法通於四教,合成四十種權實。以三藏為例,在自身證得的十法名為自行權實,把自己所證十法宣說給眾生、使其得益,名為化他權實。化他的十法合起來都名為權,自行的十法合起來都名為實,這又名為自他權實。其餘三教的十法也各自束成三種權實。

再就每一教內分別:事理、教行、縛脫、因果四雙屬於自行權實;理教、開合兩雙屬於化他權實;體用、漸頓、通別、悉檀四雙屬於自他權實。名稱雖然相同,各教中的意義並不相同。

若再作總結,前三教無論通說、別說,當分都屬化他權實,因為是隨他意而說;圓教無論通說、別說,當分都屬自行權實,因為是隨自意而說。前三教的化他全都名為權,圓教的自行全都名為實。

接著結成四句:隨他意而說,就是一切法都是權;隨自意而說,就是一切法都是真實;雙取自、他,就是一切法也權也實;自、他雙非,就是一切法既非權也非實。

接著,以三番方式解釋品名。

第一番從方法說。自行、自意所說,就是佛在道場證得之法;《大般涅槃經》說這是由修道而得,《攝大乘論》稱為如理、如量智,都是圓教自行權實、隨自意而說。佛雖能以方便宣說這不可說之法,眾生卻不能承受;如果一開始只用這一法攝取眾生,便不能使眾生得益,所以說不可說、不可說。

再暫置此事。若把自行權實與別教權實合用來攝取眾生,大乘根機銳利者可以直接得到,遲鈍者可以間接得到;小乘根機無論利、鈍都不能得到,這大致是《華嚴》的意思。

再暫置此事。若單用三藏權實攝取眾生,大乘根機無論利、鈍都能暗中得到,卻不能明白顯得;小乘根機無論利、鈍,只守住所證,也不能取得大法,這大致是三藏教的意思。

再暫置此事。若合用四種權實攝取眾生,大乘根機利、鈍都能或曲、或直地得到;小乘根機利、鈍仍守住所證,不能得到,這大致是《方等》的意思。

再暫置此事。若捨去三藏權實,使用其餘三種權實共同攝取眾生,大乘根機利、鈍都能得到;小乘根機利、鈍仍守住所證,不能得到,這大致是《般若》的意思。

再暫置此事。若捨去前三種權實,只用圓教自行權實攝取眾生,大、小根機無論利、鈍全都能得到,這大致是《法華》的意思。

如來智慧沒有不能通達之處,明照時機,知道何種方法可用、何種不可用。所以解釋品名說:方,就是各種方法;便,就是善巧運用。善巧運用種種方法攝取眾生,使其得益,因此殷勤稱歎方便。

第二番從門說。如來自己證得的權實都不可言說。佛憐愍眾生,先把自己所證之權說作入實之門,但它對眾生不合時宜,眾生不能由此進入,所以自證之法仍不可說。

若把別教權實說作門,利根能入,鈍根不能入,對眾生仍不完全合宜,所以也不可說。若把三藏權實說作門,利根可以暗中進入,鈍根仍不能進入,對眾生仍不合宜,所以也不可說。

若把三種化他權實說作門,利根能入,鈍根不能入,仍不合時宜,所以不可說。若把兩種化他權實說作門,利根能入,鈍根仍不能入,也不合時宜,所以不可說。

最後捨去三種化他權實,只說自行之權,利根、鈍根全都能夠進入。從開始到終結,都以方便作入實之門,所以如來稱歎方便。解釋品名說,方便是進入真實之門,正是這一層意思。前一番說如來能知方便、能用方便;這一番說修行人能隨順方便。〔以下從略〕

第三番從祕妙說。如來自己證得的修道所得中,一切方便就是真實,可是真實本身不可言說;即使佛能宣說,眾生也不能立即契入真實。

於是,佛以方便力,在說一即的同時帶著不即:利根能即,鈍根不能即。又單說一而不說即:利根能暗中相即,鈍根仍不能即。又帶著三種不即而說一即:利根能即,鈍根不能即。又帶著兩種不即而說一即:利根能即,鈍根不能即。最後廢除三種不即,純粹宣說一切都即,利根、鈍根便全都能即,從方便中看見真實。

前兩番都是運用方便、依從方便;這一番則說方便就是真實。真實就是圓因,圓因就是自行方便;這種自行方便,到如今才真正證入。前面解釋品名時說,方便就是真實,從自行方便而得名,所以稱為〈方便品〉。

八、第六番:分別三種權實照三種二諦

第六,分別照諦。前面已依通、別與各教當分結束權實;現在再依這些智慧所照之義來說,關係便容易看見。

如果通用十法說明自行二智,就是照隨智二諦;如果通用十法逗引眾生根機,就是照隨情二諦;如果把四項權實束為兩類,就是照隨情智二諦。

若在每一教當分中說,事理、教行、縛脫、因果四雙全是自證,照隨智二諦;理教、開合兩雙屬於化他,照隨情二諦;體用、漸頓、通別、悉檀四雙兼通自行、化他,照隨情智二諦。前三教照諦,也依此理解。

三藏的三十種二智屬於化他二智,全都照隨情二諦。通教、別教合有六十種,是自他二智,照隨情智二諦;通教有時又與前述三藏教合在一起,照隨情二諦。圓教三十種權實則是自行二智,照隨智二諦。

再總括說,前三教無論通說、別說,都是逗引眾生之緣,全屬化他二智,照隨情二諦;圓教無論通說、別說,全屬自行二智,照隨智二諦。若把前三教之實束為權,把圓教之權束為實,便是自他二智照隨情智二諦。

九、第七番:依諸經判權實

第七,依諸經而說。

《華嚴經》若論教,只是滿字;若論時,只是乳;若論法,有一種自行、一種化他;若對人,只對菩薩,二乘如聾如啞,生身菩薩也還不能發起自行之權、隨智之實。若依本經所說,佛以前不曾向人宣說這件事。

三藏若論教,只是半字;若論法,只有一種化他;若論時,是酪。若依本經所說,二乘人站立門外,穿著弊垢之衣,手執除糞器具。

方等若論教,是對著半字而說滿字;若論時,兼有酪而明生酥;若論法,有三種化他、一種自行。若依本經所說,二乘人心中已能彼此信任,出入大乘法財沒有障礙。

《般若》若論教,是帶著半字而說滿字;若論時,是兼著生酥而成為熟酥;若論法,有兩種化他、一種自行。若依本經所說,出納取與都使二乘知道。

《法華》若論教,是廢除半字而只論滿字;若論時,是純粹醍醐;若論法,只有自行。若依本經所說,是開顯權宜而彰明真實:『這確實是我的兒子,是我所生;我確實是父親。』於是把家業交付給他,為他授記成佛。以前教法沒有說出的,現在全都顯發;直截捨棄方便,只說無上佛道,所以是自行之權,因而稱為〈方便品〉。其餘有的是自他二智,有的是化他二智。

再換一個對機角度說。《華嚴》面對兩類菩薩,宣說一種自行、一種化他,不打算使二乘聽聞、理解。三藏面對二乘,宣說一種化他,不以菩薩為主要對象,所以沒有自行。方等同時面對大、小根機:對二乘說兩種化他,對菩薩說一種自行、一種化他。《般若》也面對三類根機,說一種自行、兩種化他;對二乘說一種化他,對菩薩說一種自行、一種化他。

《法華》普遍面對根機已成熟的人,只明一種自行,不再論化他。經說:『菩薩聽到這個法,疑網全都消除;一千二百位阿羅漢,也都將會成佛。』一切眾生全都進入自行方便,所以稱為〈方便品〉。〔以下從略〕

十、第八番:依本迹判權實

第八,依本迹而說。

如來在本地久已證得一切權實,名為自行;中間垂下示現,也曾作兼說、帶說等教化。今日垂迹,先在寂滅道場帶著別教化他而說自行,接著說一種化他,再說三種,再說兩種,最後說廢三等,這些都名為化他權實。

若把本地之權束起來,名為實;把迹中之實束起來,名為權,便成為自他權實。由此可以結成四句:一切都是實,一切都是權,一切也權也實,一切既非權也非實。〔以下從略〕

舍利弗在本地已證一切權實,這是自行;垂迹在鹿苑時只接受化他,在方等會上接受一法而被三法折伏,在《般若》會上帶著兩種化他而轉入一種自行,到《法華》會上廢三而悟一,這些都是化他權實。

若把舍利弗本地之權束起來,名為實;把他迹中之實束起來,名為權,便成為自他權實,也具足四句。〔以下從略〕

若從佛的垂迹而說,也是化他權實,所以稱為〈方便品〉;若從引導眾生進入圓因自行而說,也是〈方便品〉;若從舍利弗迹中的權而說,也是〈方便品〉;若從舍利弗由迹權進入真實而說,也是〈方便品〉。由於具有這些義理,所以稱為〈方便品〉。

I. Brief Explanation of Three Meanings of Skillful Means

The explanation of the Skillful Means chapter has a brief and an extensive part. The brief explanation is itself divided into two: first an abbreviated explanation, and then an analysis.

In the first explanation, “method” is Dharma and “skillful” is use. Dharmas may be square or round, and their use may differ or converge. Three provisional Dharmas resemble a carpenter's square and are square; one real Dharma resembles a compass and is round. When wisdom penetrates the square, it can skillfully employ partial Dharmas to meet living beings. When wisdom penetrates the circle, it can skillfully employ the perfect Dharma to meet them.

To raise one finger partially and point toward a partial place, for example, is to raise a partial Dharma to indicate the wisdom corresponding to it: “method” should be explained through Dharma and “skillful” through use. To raise the whole hand and point toward the perfect place, however, means that “method” should be explained as secret and “skillful” as wondrous. Explaining skillful means through partial Dharmas chiefly accords with the desires of living beings and is not the Buddha's original intent. The scripture, for example, enables beings to leave every kind of attachment and escape the suffering of the three realms; the Tathāgata therefore earnestly praises skillful means. This meaning can explain other scriptures, but it is not the direct purport of this chapter.

The second explanation takes skillful means as a gateway. A gateway enables someone to pass through and leads toward the place to be reached. Provisional and abbreviated skillful means serve as inducements and form a gateway to the real. The meaning of the real can become clear through the work of skillful means, and skillful means receive their name from their ability to disclose the real. Explaining them as a gateway is therefore like the scripture's statement: “Open the gateway of skillful means and display the mark of reality.” This meaning can likewise explain other scriptures, but it is still not the direct purport of the present chapter.

In the third explanation, “method” is secret and “skillful” wondrous. Wondrous penetration of the method is the genuine secret. Someone points out the priceless jewel originally sewn inside another person's robe; that jewel is no different from the one bright jewel on a king's crown. Someone points out that the hired laborer is actually the elder's son; the laborer and the son are not two different people. Such an explanation is both secret and wondrous. The scripture says: “I alone know this true mark, and the buddhas of the ten directions do likewise.” It also says: “Stop, stop; it need not be said again. My Dharma is subtle, wondrous, and difficult to conceive.” Explaining “method” as secret and “skillful” as wondrous is therefore precisely the purport of the present chapter, which is accordingly titled “Skillful Means.”

II. Analysis of the Three Explanations and Four Propositions concerning Skillful Means and the Provisional

The three preceding explanations will now be analyzed. The first explanation, as method, separately establishes skillful means outside the substance. These are the expedients used when transforming living beings and are teachings in accord with others' intentions. The second explanation, as gateway, likewise separately establishes skillful means outside the substance. It includes provisionality in both one's own practice and the transformation of others and is taught in accord with the intentions of oneself and others. The third explanation, as secret and wondrous, concerns skillful means identical in substance with the real. It is the provisional belonging to one's own practice and is taught in accord with one's own intention.

The first kind of skillful means is neither a gateway that enables entry nor the principle entered. The second is a gateway that enables entry but is not the principle entered. The third is the principle entered but not a gateway enabling entry. Although the name is the same, the meanings therefore differ greatly. Most people fail to see this and interpret the Skillful Means chapter however they please. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

Someone asks: “What is the relation between skillful means and the provisional?”

The answer can be distinguished through four propositions. First, skillful means break the provisional. Second, the provisional breaks skillful means. Third, skillful means cultivate the provisional and the provisional also cultivates skillful means. Fourth, skillful means are the provisional and the provisional is skillful means.

“Skillful means break the provisional” means that the four kinds of teaching are all secretly wondrous skillful means, and these skillful means can break the provisional taught in accord with others' intentions. “The provisional breaks skillful means” means that the provisional here is identical with the substance and can break skillful means separately established outside it. Mutual cultivation and mutual identity can be understood in the same way. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕 The first three propositions can explain other scriptures, while only the fourth expresses the purport of this chapter. The Correct Dharma Lotus therefore titles it the chapter “Skillful Provisionality”: provisional and skillful means are no different, and even bowing one's head or raising a hand can accomplish the Buddha path. Both skillful means and skillful provisionality are real.

III. The Extensive Explanation First Refutes Earlier Interpretations

The extensive explanation begins by listing earlier interpretations of provisional and real through the five periods.

First, before the twelfth year, seeing impermanent events was called provisional and seeing the principle of impermanence real, referring to the Abhidharma. Master Zhiyi says that the Treatise on the Great Perfection of Wisdom already classifies contemplation of impermanence as a counteractive Dharma belonging to the first three siddhāntas. How could it be classified directly as real? It is therefore not the meaning used in this chapter.

Second, in the Prajñā teaching after the twelfth year, seeing provisional existence was called provisional and seeing provisional existence as immediately empty real. Yet the Treatise on the Great Perfection of Wisdom also refutes this understanding: contemplative ideation has already been removed and verbal dharmas are all quiescent. If one is still observing provisional existence as immediately empty, this remains conceptual contemplation. It is therefore not the meaning used in this chapter.

Third, the Vimalakīrti Sutra and Questions of Brahmā Sutra call inward illumination of the two objects, emptiness and existence, real wisdom and outward transformation and responsive activity provisional wisdom. Master Zhiyi says that inward illumination and outward function are still divided into two sides and have not entered the gateway of nonduality. This is therefore not the meaning used in this chapter.

Fourth, one interpretation of the Lotus Sutra calls the three threes provisional and the four ones real. Master Zhiyi says that if the three provisional Dharmas never meet the real, while the one real Dharma has no relation at all to the three provisional Dharmas, this is still not the meaning used in the chapter.

Fifth, an interpretation of the Nirvāṇa Sutra calls impermanence before the vajra-like path provisional and permanence after it real. Master Zhiyi says that suchness before the path is also permanent, while cognition measuring in accord with things after the path still has provisional function. None of these five period-based distinctions of provisional and real is therefore used in this chapter. The two wisdoms of provisional and real described through the half-word, full-word, and four tenets likewise are not used here.

Another interpretation explains skillful means as temporary establishment and the real as truthful determination. Another explains skillful means as provisional skill and the real as wisdom. Another explains skillful means as provisional borrowing, like temporarily setting up three carts outside a gate. Another explains them as adaptation to what is appropriate, because three vehicles are taught in accord with what is fitting. Still another uses a balance weight as a metaphor for the provisional: moved toward the front of the beam it becomes heavy, toward the back it becomes light, and placed in the middle it balances, corresponding to buddha-wisdom's examination and measurement.

Each of these interpretations takes only one line of meaning. Temporary establishment and provisional borrowing concern only location; adaptation to what is appropriate concerns only a Dharma gate; and provisional skill and the balance weight concern only cognitive capacity. None can include the other levels, and their meanings neither interpenetrate nor become wondrous. They therefore cannot explain this chapter.

Another interpretation establishes four kinds of paired wisdom. The first pair takes one wisdom as provisional and one as real. The second pair consists of cognitions of emptiness and existence: observing emptiness without realizing it as a final attainment enables one to leave the two vehicles, while engaging existence without being defiled enables one to transcend ordinary beings. The third pair takes inward quiescent illumination of emptiness and existence as real and outward activation of function as provisional. The fourth distinguishes provisional and real through permanence and impermanence before and after the vajra-like path.

The first pair of wisdoms gives rise to faith, the second to understanding, the third is used to transform others, and the last belongs to fruition. These paired wisdoms also undergo three turnings. The first takes existence as conventional and emptiness as true. The second takes emptiness and existence together as conventional and neither-empty-nor-existent as true. The third takes emptiness and existence as dual and neither-empty-nor-existent as nondual, then classifies both dual and nondual as conventional and neither-dual-nor-nondual as true. Teaching and cognition are likewise divided.

Why are there these differences? They accord with people's capacities. Some do not understand the earlier statement but understand a later one, so the two truths are spoken differently. The Tathāgata constantly teaches through the two truths, and the two truths therefore have three gateways. Although the Buddha's teachings are numerous, they do not fall outside these three gateways. The differences also guide living beings gradually. Ordinary beings grasp mind and form as real, though they are not; the emptiness of Dharma-nature alone is true. Ordinary beings therefore abandon existence and choose emptiness. It is next said that emptiness and existence are both conventional and neither-empty-nor-existent is true. Some, after leaving the two extremes, become stuck in the middle path, so the third turning requires them to leave both extremes without attaching even to the middle. Only this is true.

This system draws in people of the five vehicles. It first leads ordinary beings to generate faith and leave existence, next leads those of the two vehicles into the middle path, and then leads bodhisattvas to relinquish the middle together with the partial. Those studying the middle path are also told that the three provisional designations belong to the world and the emptiness of the three designations is true; this obtains only the first level of meaning. At the second level, where the three provisional designations are not, emptiness and existence are both conventional and neither-empty-nor-existent is true. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

IV. General Refutation of Gradual Progression and the Direct Establishment of Four Propositions for All Dharmas

Master Zhiyi examines the preceding explanations in detail and judges that they rely incidentally upon the five periods to display their own purport and seek to avoid the fault of gradual steps. They may explain other scriptures, but they do not express the purport of this chapter.

The scripture says: “Enable all living beings alike to see.” How, then, can awakening be divided into different earlier and later times? It also says: “Directly relinquish skillful means.” How could one still use gradual steps to enter the perfect and wondrous? To classify the first as giving rise to faith, the second as giving rise to understanding, the third as transforming others, and the last as fruition—what does this have to do with the present scripture's enabling living beings to awaken and enter?

Vasubandhu lists seventeen names for the present scripture, the thirteenth being Greatly Skillful Means. The Mahāyāna Skillful Means Sutra further says that skillful means are tenfold, the ninth being skillful ingenuity, which can turn those of the two vehicles and enable them to enter the pāramitā of great-vehicle skillful means. From this we know that the present chapter speaks of the Tathāgata's skillful means embracing all dharmas, like open space containing the myriad forms or the ocean receiving every stream. How could one explain the great capital of the whole Dharma realm through only one branch or school belonging to various masters?

The direct explanation of provisional and real now begins with four propositions: all dharmas are provisional; all dharmas are real; all dharmas are both provisional and real; and all dharmas are neither provisional nor real.

First, all dharmas are provisional. The scripture says: “Dharmas possess such nature, mark, substance, power, beginning, end, and so forth.” Once even the slightest verbal establishment occurs, it belongs to the provisional.

Second, all dharmas are real. The scripture says: “The Tathāgata skillfully teaches the dharmas and delights the minds of living beings.” Living beings delight in entering the real. It also says: “Dharmas have always been quiescent and extinct.” It says again: “Everything the Tathāgata teaches reaches the ground of all-wisdom,” and “All is real and not false.” The Mahāparinirvāṇa Sutra also says that none of the four propositions can be expressed.

Third, all dharmas are both provisional and real. The scriptural expression “the real-as-it-is mark of all dharmas” simultaneously says that all dharmas are both provisional and real. Even the contemplation of impurity, for example, has one side that is real and one that is provisionally established. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

Fourth, all dharmas are neither provisional nor real. The scripture says: “Neither as such nor different.” It also says: “Nor does one practice higher, middle, or lower dharmas, conditioned or unconditioned dharmas, real or unreal dharmas. Neither false nor real is the real-as-it-is mark.”

If all dharmas are provisional, what could not be broken? Even if there were hundreds of thousands of teachers and each presented hundreds of thousands of explanations, not one would fail to be provisional. If even the Tathāgata's verbal expression belongs to the provisional, how could the speech of human teachers necessarily be otherwise? Every preceding interpretation can be broken in this way.

If all dharmas are real, what could not be broken? The scripture says: “This one matter alone is real; the other two are not true.” There is only one ultimate path. How could there be many separate ultimate paths? All the preceding masters should break their attachments and enter the real. How could they continue to defend their own enclosures?

If all dharmas are both provisional and real, what could not be broken? Every dharma has both provisional and real aspects. How could one affirm only one's own path while denying all other interpretations? Each dharma contains provisional and real; it cannot be classified exclusively as either.

If all dharmas are neither provisional nor real, what could not be broken? Why continue the clamor and forcibly establish distinctions? Merely listing the names of the four propositions already has such power to break attachment. Even viewed from afar, their profound purport is this open and lofty; how much more so when their intent is examined further?

V. From the Derivation of Ten Dharmas to the Explanation of Each Pair

From the proposition that dharmas are both provisional and real, ten dharmas are now opened and explained in eight rounds. First their ten names are listed. Second their order of derivation is explained. Third each is explained separately. Fourth scriptures are cited as evidence. Fifth the ten are concluded as three kinds of provisional and real. Sixth the three kinds of provisional and real are distinguished as illuminating three kinds of two truths. Seventh provisional and real are judged according to the various scriptures. Eighth they are judged according to Origin and Trace.

First, the names. The ten are event and principle, principle and teaching, teaching and practice, bondage and liberation, cause and effect, substance and function, gradual and sudden, opening and gathering, shared and distinct, and siddhānta.

Second, their derivation. All dharmas are established from the foundation of nonabiding. Nonabiding is principle; all dharmas are events. Because there are principle and events, there is teaching. Because there is teaching, there is practice. Because there is practice, there are bondage and liberation. Because there is liberation, cause and effect are formed. Because there is effect, substance becomes manifest and can activate function. There are therefore gradual and sudden forms of transformation. Because gradual and sudden are opened, there are opening and gathering. Because there are opening and gathering, there are the two benefits, shared and distinct. Because the two benefits are distinguished, there are the four siddhāntas. This is the sequence of the ten divisions. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

Third, each is explained separately.

Event and principle. Principle is suchness. Suchness is originally pure and always remains unchanged whether a buddha appears in the world or not; principle is therefore called real. Events are mind, mentation, consciousness, and the like, which can produce pure and impure karma and which change without fixity; events are therefore called provisional. Without principle, events could not be established; without events, principle could not become manifest. Events possess the work of disclosing principle, and the Tathāgata therefore earnestly praises skillful means.

Principle and teaching. The preceding principle and events are combined and, relative to what follows, both are called principle, just as ultimate and conventional truths are both called truths. Buddhas embody and realize this principle and become sages, and sages are precisely real. When the Buddha wishes to bestow downward upon beings the Dharma he has realized, he establishes verbal teaching in reliance upon principle; teaching is therefore provisional. Without teaching, principle could not be displayed. Principle becomes manifest through reliance upon the teaching, and the Tathāgata therefore praises skillful means. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

Teaching and practice. Seeking principle in reliance upon teaching gives rise to correct practice. Practice has differences in the depth of its advance and is therefore called provisional; teaching itself does not advance more or less deeply and is therefore called real. Without teaching, practice could not be established; without practice, one could not realize the purport of the teaching. Realization of teaching depends upon practice, and the Tathāgata therefore praises skillful means. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

Bondage and liberation. When practice opposes principle, it produces bondage. Bondage is deluded and therefore called provisional. When practice accords with principle, liberation arises. This liberation darkly accords with principle and is therefore called real. Without bondage, the mind seeking liberation would never arise; the attainment of liberation takes bondage itself as a condition. It is like relying upon a corpse to cross the sea: the corpse too has the power to help one reach the other shore, and skillful means are therefore praised.

Cause and effect. Cause has the function of advancing forward and being temporarily employed and is therefore called provisional. Effect brings cultivation to its endpoint and is permanently realized and is therefore called real. Without effect, cause would have no destination toward which to aspire; without cause, effect could not manifest itself. The two contemplations are therefore taken as the path of skillful means, severing delusion and forming the cause that enters the liberating effect of the middle path. Without the two contemplations, how could one accord with the middle? Effect is reached through cause, and skillful means are therefore praised.

Substance and function. The preceding skillful means are cause, while correct contemplation and entry into an abode are effect. Abiding and emerging are again distinguished as substance and function. Substance is the true mark and has no discrimination. Function establishes every differentiated dharma, like the earth giving rise to many kinds of sprout. Without earth, sprouts could not arise; without sprouts, the earth's generative power could not become manifest. Following the current one can reach the source, and inferring from function one can recognize substance. Function has the work of disclosing substance, and skillful means are therefore praised.

Gradual and sudden. After cultivating cause and realizing effect, function arises from substance. When function arises, it has both gradual and sudden modes; the present discussion concerns only this activation of function. Gradual function is provisional and sudden function real. Without gradual guidance, there is no way to enter the sudden Dharma. The real is attained through the gradual, and skillful means are therefore praised.

Opening and gathering. The gradual Dharma is opened from the sudden. The gradual cannot gather itself back by itself and cannot by itself unite with the sudden, so it is called provisional. When the gradual reaches its ultimate point, it returns and gathers into the sudden and is called real. Gathering can occur only after opening. Because opening has the power to accomplish gathering, it receives the name skillful means and is therefore praised.

Shared and distinct benefit. Shared benefit is that of the impermanent half-word; distinct benefit is that of the permanently abiding full-word. Yet the road to the benefit of permanence is distant and living beings can readily retreat along the way. A conjured city is therefore first used to guide them and give them a sense of peace. The conjured city is then dissolved, and they are led toward the treasure place. Without the benefit of the half-word, there would be no way to enter permanent abiding. The half-word has the function of displaying the full-word, and skillful means are therefore praised.

The four siddhāntas. The first three belong to the world and are therefore provisional; the siddhānta of ultimate meaning transcends the world and is therefore real. Without passing through the world one cannot transcend it. Only through the first three siddhāntas can ultimate meaning be attained, and the Tathāgata therefore praises skillful means. The preceding four propositions should be used to explain these ten rounds of provisional and real. Of them, the first three propositions express the meanings of other scriptures, while only the fourth is the purport of the present chapter. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

VI. The Fourth Round: First Citing the Whole Scripture Generally, Then the Present Chapter Particularly

Fourth, scriptures are cited as evidence. These ten meanings traverse both great and lesser teachings and extend throughout all dharmas. The Lotus Sutra is now taken first as evidence.

The scripture says: “He sees the three realms, yet his vision is unlike that of the three realms.” The three realms are events; vision unlike that of the three realms is principle. It also says: “Dharmas are quiescent and extinct and cannot be expressed in words.” This is principle. It says that the Buddha “taught the five bhikṣus through the power of skillful means.” This is teaching.

The scripture says: “Those able to hear this scripture have practiced the bodhisattva path well.” This witnesses teaching and practice. It also says: “What you practice is the bodhisattva path. When children of the Buddha complete their practice of the path, they will become buddhas in a future age.”

The scripture says that beings “seek the Buddha path through manifold causes and conditions” and also that “merely leaving the false is called liberation.” These witness bondage and liberation. It further says that beings “have not actually attained complete liberation,” that they must “fully practice all the Dharmas belonging to the path of the buddhas,” and finally “accomplish buddha-fruition at the place of awakening.” These witness bondage and liberation and cause and effect. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

The scripture says: “With the buddha eye I see living beings in the six paths. When these beings first see my body and hear the Dharma I teach, they all trust, accept, and enter tathāgata-wisdom, except those who previously cultivated and studied the lesser vehicle.” The first part witnesses substance and function, and the latter part gradual and sudden. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

The poor son first runs away, is later employed to remove filth, and finally obtains the family wealth, displaying opening and gathering. Travelers are first given rest in the conjured city and later led to the treasure place, displaying shared and distinct benefit. Manifold desires, natures and marks, recollections, and so forth display the four siddhāntas. This completes the general citation of the whole scripture.

The Skillful Means chapter will now be cited particularly. Although its quotations do not follow the order of the ten pairs, all ten kinds of scriptural wording are present.

“The wisdom of the buddhas is extremely profound and immeasurable; the gateway of their wisdom is difficult to understand and difficult to enter.” All events and principles, objects known and wisdom able to observe, and related matters are called real. The verbal teachings established to explain and distinguish them form the gateway of wisdom and are called provisional. This witnesses the provisional and real of principle and teaching. The scripture further says that this gateway is difficult to understand and enter and cannot be known by any śrāvaka or pratyekabuddha. This witnesses the provisional and real of bondage and liberation.

Why is this so? The passage from “The Buddha formerly drew near to innumerable buddhas” through “his name was universally heard” witnesses the provisional and real of teaching and practice. The passage from “he accomplished extremely profound and unprecedented Dharmas” through “what he teaches according to what is appropriate is difficult to understand in intent” witnesses the provisional and real of substance and function. “Since I became a buddha”—becoming a buddha is effect, and effect necessarily has a cause—witnesses the provisional and real of cause and effect.

The passage from “through manifold causes, conditions, and analogies” through “enable living beings to leave every attachment” witnesses the provisional and real of gradual and sudden. Why? Because “the Tathāgata's skillful means and knowledge and vision are all complete” further witnesses the provisional and real of opening and gathering.

“The buddhas appear in the world through the cause and condition of the one great matter in order to enable living beings to open, reveal, awaken to, and enter the Buddha's knowledge and vision” concerns provisional and real benefit. “To state the essential, the Buddha has accomplished all” displays accomplishment in the first three siddhāntas. “Stop, stop; it need not be said again” displays the siddhānta of ultimate meaning. Together these are the provisional and real of the four siddhāntas.

Why is this so? The passage from “The Buddha accomplished the foremost rare Dharma” through “the true mark of all dharmas” is principle. “That is, dharmas have such a mark” is event. This witnesses the provisional and real of principle and event.

This prose passage explains provisional and real for the five buddhas; the same is true for each. The Treatise on the Lotus Sutra interprets the profound wisdom of the buddhas as profound realization. Profound realization has five kinds: profound meaning, profound real substance, profound inward realization, profound basis, and unsurpassed profundity. Unsurpassed profundity is the realization of great awakening. The treatise further interprets the gateway of wisdom as the profound meaning of the teaching spoken. This corresponds to provisional and real in principle and teaching.

The Treatise on the Lotus Sutra interprets the Buddha's drawing near to hundreds of thousands of buddhas as profundity of cultivation, and courageous advance and a universally heard name as profundity in increasing qualities. These correspond to provisional and real in teaching and practice. It interprets accomplishment of profound and unprecedented Dharmas as profundity in wondrous events, and difficult intent and related statements as unsurpassed profundity and profundity of entry. These correspond to provisional and real in substance and function.

The treatise interprets “Since I became a buddha” as proclaiming the Dharma that accomplishes the Tathāgata's qualities. This corresponds to provisional and real in cause and effect. It interprets innumerable skillful means as accomplishment of teaching and transformation and accomplishment of teaching the Dharma. These correspond to provisional and real in gradual and sudden. It interprets the Tathāgata's completeness in skillful means and knowledge and vision through his profound and boundless entry as the accomplishment of an inconceivable object in his own person, surpassing all other bodhisattvas. This concerns benefit received.

The treatise further interprets being able to distinguish in many ways, delighting the minds of beings, and related statements as accomplishment in language. This concerns the giving of benefit and corresponds to provisional and real in benefit. It interprets stating the essential, stopping without teaching, and related statements as accomplishment concerning living beings capable of transformation. This corresponds to the four siddhāntas' distinction between those who can and cannot be transformed.

The treatise interprets “Only a buddha together with a buddha can exhaustively know” as accomplishment in immeasurable qualities, which only buddhas can know. The substance of the Tathāgata's Dharma body is unchanging, and therefore he can awaken and accomplish self-realization and can also teach the marks of all dharmas in accord with living beings. This corresponds to provisional and real in principle and events. This treatise explains the Buddha's scripture, and the present commentary's establishment darkly agrees with the intent of the two sages represented by scripture and treatise. It may be said to correspond both to sūtra and upadeśa.

VII. The Fifth Round: Concluding as Three Kinds of Provisional and Real and Three Explanations of the Chapter

Fifth, provisional and real are concluded. The ten dharmas traverse the four teachings and therefore form forty kinds of provisional and real. Take the Tripiṭaka Teaching as an example. The ten dharmas realized in one's own person are called provisional and real in one's own practice. Teaching the ten dharmas one has realized to living beings so that they receive benefit is called provisional and real in transforming others. The ten used to transform others are collectively called provisional, while the ten of one's own practice are collectively called real; this is also called provisional and real concerning oneself and others. The ten dharmas of each of the other three teachings are likewise gathered into three kinds of provisional and real.

Within each teaching, they are further distinguished as follows. The four pairs of event and principle, teaching and practice, bondage and liberation, and cause and effect belong to provisional and real in one's own practice. The two pairs of principle and teaching and opening and gathering belong to provisional and real in transforming others. The four pairs of substance and function, gradual and sudden, shared and distinct, and siddhānta belong to provisional and real concerning oneself and others. Although the names are the same, their meanings differ within each teaching.

To summarize further, whether spoken generally or particularly, the first three teachings belong within their own divisions to provisional and real in transforming others because they are taught in accord with others' intentions. Whether spoken generally or particularly, the Perfect Teaching belongs within its own division to provisional and real in one's own practice because it is taught in accord with one's own intention. Transformation of others in the first three teachings is wholly called provisional; one's own practice in the Perfect Teaching is wholly called real.

The four propositions are then concluded. Teaching in accord with others' intentions means that all dharmas are provisional. Teaching in accord with one's own intention means that all dharmas are real. Taking both self and others means that all dharmas are both provisional and real. Negating both self and others means that all dharmas are neither provisional nor real.

The chapter title is next explained in three rounds.

The first round concerns method. What is taught in accord with one's own practice and intention is the Dharma realized by the Buddha at the place of awakening. The Mahāparinirvāṇa Sutra calls this attained through cultivation of the path, while the Summary of the Great Vehicle calls it cognition in accord with principle and cognition in accord with measure. These are the provisional and real of the Perfect Teaching in one's own practice, taught in accord with the Buddha's own intention. Although the Buddha can use skillful means to teach this inexpressible Dharma, living beings cannot receive it. If he initially used this Dharma alone to gather beings in, he could not benefit them. It is therefore said to be inexpressible, inexpressible.

Set this aside for the moment. If provisional and real in the Buddha's own practice are combined with those of the Distinct Teaching to gather in living beings, sharp greater-vehicle capacities can attain directly and dull ones indirectly; neither sharp nor dull lesser-vehicle capacities can attain. This broadly expresses the meaning of the Avataṃsaka.

Set this aside for the moment. If only the provisional and real of the Tripiṭaka Teaching are used to gather in living beings, both sharp and dull greater-vehicle capacities attain covertly but cannot attain in a clear and manifest way. Sharp and dull lesser-vehicle capacities only defend what they have realized and cannot obtain the great Dharma. This broadly expresses the meaning of the Tripiṭaka Teaching.

Set this aside for the moment. If the four kinds of provisional and real are used together to gather in living beings, sharp and dull greater-vehicle capacities can attain by crooked or direct routes; sharp and dull lesser-vehicle capacities still defend what they have realized and cannot attain. This broadly expresses the meaning of the Vaipulya teaching.

Set this aside for the moment. If the provisional and real of the Tripiṭaka are set aside and the remaining three kinds are used together to gather in living beings, sharp and dull greater-vehicle capacities can all attain; sharp and dull lesser-vehicle capacities still defend what they have realized and cannot attain. This broadly expresses the meaning of the Prajñā.

Set this aside for the moment. If the first three forms of provisional and real are set aside and only those of the Perfect Teaching in one's own practice are used to gather beings in, greater and lesser capacities, whether sharp or dull, can all attain. This broadly expresses the meaning of the Lotus.

There is nowhere the Tathāgata's wisdom does not penetrate. It clearly illumines the occasion and knows which methods can and cannot be used. The chapter title is therefore explained by taking “method” as the many methods and “skillful” as their apt employment. He aptly employs many methods to gather living beings in and benefit them and therefore earnestly praises skillful means.

The second round concerns gateway. All the provisional and real Dharmas realized by the Tathāgata himself are inexpressible. Out of compassion for living beings, the Buddha first teaches the provisional he himself realized as a gateway into the real. Yet it does not accord with the time for living beings, and they cannot enter through it. The personally realized Dharma therefore remains inexpressible.

If the provisional and real of the Distinct Teaching are taught as a gateway, sharp faculties can enter while dull cannot. It still does not fully accord with living beings and therefore cannot be taught. If the provisional and real of the Tripiṭaka Teaching are taught as a gateway, sharp faculties can enter covertly while dull still cannot. It remains inappropriate for living beings and therefore cannot be taught.

If three kinds of provisional and real used in transforming others are taught as gateways, sharp faculties can enter while dull cannot. The time is still not appropriate, so they cannot be taught. If two kinds used in transforming others are taught as gateways, sharp faculties can enter while dull still cannot. They too remain inappropriate and cannot be taught.

Finally, the three kinds of provisional and real used in transforming others are relinquished and only the provisional of the Buddha's own practice is taught. Both sharp and dull faculties can enter. From beginning to end, skillful means serve as a gateway into the real, and the Tathāgata therefore praises them. The chapter title means that skillful means are a gateway into reality, precisely in this sense. The first round says that the Tathāgata can know and employ skillful means; this round says that practitioners can follow them. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

The third round concerns secret wonder. Within what the Tathāgata himself realizes through cultivation of the path, every skillful means is itself real, but the real itself is inexpressible. Even if the Buddha can teach it, living beings cannot immediately accord with it.

The Buddha therefore uses the power of skillful means and, while teaching one identity, carries nonidentity with it: sharp faculties realize identity, while dull ones do not. He then teaches the one without teaching identity: sharp faculties can covertly become identical, while dull ones still cannot. He then teaches one identity while carrying three kinds of nonidentity: sharp faculties can realize identity, while dull ones cannot. He next teaches one identity while carrying two kinds of nonidentity: sharp faculties can realize identity, while dull ones cannot. Finally, he abolishes the three kinds of nonidentity and purely teaches that everything is identical. Sharp and dull faculties can then all realize identity and see the real within skillful means.

The first two rounds concern employing and following skillful means. This round says that skillful means are themselves the real. The real is the perfect cause, and the perfect cause is skillful means in one's own practice. Only now are these skillful means of one's own practice truly entered and realized. The preceding explanation of the chapter title said that skillful means are themselves the real. Because the name derives from skillful means in one's own practice, the chapter is called “Skillful Means.”

VIII. The Sixth Round: Distinguishing How Three Kinds of Provisional and Real Illuminate Three Kinds of Two Truths

Sixth, the truths illuminated are distinguished. The preceding discussion has concluded provisional and real generally, particularly, and within each teaching. The relation becomes easier to see when it is now explained in terms of what these wisdoms illuminate.

If the ten dharmas are used generally to explain the two wisdoms of one's own practice, they illuminate the two truths in accord with wisdom. If the ten are used generally to meet living beings' capacities, they illuminate the two truths in accord with beings' dispositions. If the four groups of provisional and real are gathered into two categories, they illuminate the two truths in accord with both dispositions and wisdom.

Within the individual divisions of each teaching, the four pairs of event and principle, teaching and practice, bondage and liberation, and cause and effect all concern personal realization and illuminate the two truths in accord with wisdom. The pairs of principle and teaching and opening and gathering belong to transforming others and illuminate the two truths in accord with beings' dispositions. The pairs of substance and function, gradual and sudden, shared and distinct, and siddhānta apply to both one's own practice and transforming others and illuminate the two truths in accord with both dispositions and wisdom. Illumination of the truths by the first three teachings is understood in the same way.

The thirty forms of twofold wisdom in the Tripiṭaka Teaching belong to the two wisdoms used to transform others and all illuminate the two truths in accord with beings' dispositions. The Shared and Distinct Teachings together have sixty kinds; these are the two wisdoms concerning oneself and others and illuminate the two truths in accord with both dispositions and wisdom. The Shared Teaching is also sometimes combined with the Tripiṭaka Teaching described above to illuminate the two truths in accord with dispositions. The thirty forms of provisional and real in the Perfect Teaching are the two wisdoms of one's own practice and illuminate the two truths in accord with wisdom.

To summarize again, whether explained generally or particularly, the first three teachings are conditions for attracting living beings and belong entirely to the two wisdoms used to transform others, illuminating the two truths in accord with dispositions. Whether explained generally or particularly, the Perfect Teaching belongs entirely to the two wisdoms of one's own practice, illuminating the two truths in accord with wisdom. If the real of the first three teachings is gathered as provisional and the provisional of the Perfect Teaching gathered as real, these are the two wisdoms concerning oneself and others illuminating the two truths in accord with both dispositions and wisdom.

IX. The Seventh Round: Judging Provisional and Real according to the Various Scriptures

Seventh, the various scriptures are considered.

In terms of teaching, the Avataṃsaka Sutra has only the full-word; in terms of time, only milk; in terms of Dharma, one kind belonging to one's own practice and one to transforming others; in terms of persons, it addresses only bodhisattvas. Those of the two vehicles are as though deaf and mute, and bodhisattvas with physical bodies are still unable to activate the provisional of one's own practice and the real in accord with wisdom. According to the present scripture, the Buddha had never before taught this matter to anyone.

In terms of teaching, the Tripiṭaka has only the half-word; in terms of Dharma, only one kind for transforming others; in terms of time, curds. According to the present scripture, people of the two vehicles stand outside the gate, dressed in filthy and tattered clothing and holding implements for removing excrement.

In terms of teaching, the Vaipulya speaks the full-word in contrast with the half-word; in terms of time, it includes curds while disclosing raw ghee; in terms of Dharma, it has three kinds for transforming others and one for one's own practice. According to the present scripture, the people of the two vehicles can already trust one another in their minds and enter and leave the Dharma wealth of the great vehicle without obstruction.

In terms of teaching, the Prajñā speaks the full-word while carrying the half-word; in terms of time, it includes raw ghee and becomes refined ghee; in terms of Dharma, it has two kinds for transforming others and one for one's own practice. According to the present scripture, those of the two vehicles are informed of everything taken in or paid out.

In terms of teaching, the Lotus abolishes the half-word and speaks only the full-word; in terms of time, it is pure clarified essence; in terms of Dharma, it has only one's own practice. According to the present scripture, it opens the provisional and reveals the real: “This truly is my son, born from me; I truly am the father.” He then entrusts the family estate to him and bestows a prediction of buddhahood. Everything left unspoken in the former teachings is now disclosed. Skillful means are directly relinquished and only the unsurpassed Buddha path taught. This is therefore the provisional of one's own practice, and the chapter is called “Skillful Means.” Other scriptures have either the two wisdoms concerning oneself and others or the two wisdoms used to transform others.

The matter may also be explained from another perspective on the capacities addressed. The Avataṃsaka addresses two kinds of bodhisattva and teaches one kind belonging to one's own practice and one used to transform others; it does not intend those of the two vehicles to hear or understand. The Tripiṭaka addresses the two vehicles and teaches one kind used to transform others. It does not principally address bodhisattvas and therefore does not have one's own practice. The Vaipulya addresses greater and lesser capacities together: for those of the two vehicles it teaches two kinds used to transform others, and for bodhisattvas one kind belonging to one's own practice and one used to transform others. The Prajñā likewise addresses three kinds of capacity and teaches one kind belonging to one's own practice and two used to transform others. It teaches one kind used to transform others for the two vehicles, and one kind belonging to one's own practice and one used to transform others for bodhisattvas.

The Lotus universally addresses those whose capacities have matured and clarifies only one kind belonging to one's own practice, no longer discussing transformation of others. The scripture says: “When bodhisattvas hear this Dharma, their net of doubt is entirely removed; the twelve hundred arhats will likewise all become buddhas.” All living beings enter skillful means in the Buddha's own practice, and the chapter is therefore called “Skillful Means.” 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

X. The Eighth Round: Judging Provisional and Real according to Origin and Trace

Eighth, Origin and Trace are considered.

In his original ground, the Tathāgata realized all provisional and real Dharmas long ago; this is called his own practice. In the intermediate period he extended manifestations and taught transformations that combined or carried different teachings. Extending a trace today, at the place of quiescent extinction he first teaches his own practice while carrying the Distinct Teaching used to transform others. He next teaches one kind for transforming others, then three kinds, then two, and finally the abolition of the three and related teachings. All these are called provisional and real in transforming others.

If the provisional in the Origin is gathered together and called real, while the real in the Trace is gathered together and called provisional, provisional and real concerning oneself and others are formed. The four propositions can then be concluded: all is real; all is provisional; all is both provisional and real; all is neither provisional nor real. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

Śāriputra realized every provisional and real Dharma in his original ground; this is his own practice. When extending a trace at Deer Park, he received only what was used to transform others. At the Vaipulya assembly he received one Dharma and was humbled by three. At the Prajñā assembly he carried two kinds used to transform others and turned into one belonging to his own practice. At the Lotus assembly he abolishes the three and awakens to the one. All these are provisional and real in transforming others.

If the provisional in Śāriputra's original ground is gathered and called real, while the real in his trace is gathered and called provisional, provisional and real concerning oneself and others are formed, complete with the four propositions. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

Explained through the Buddha's extension of traces, the title is “Skillful Means” because these are provisional and real in transforming others. Explained through guiding living beings into the perfect cause of their own practice, it is likewise “Skillful Means.” Explained through the provisional in Śāriputra's trace, it is “Skillful Means.” Explained through Śāriputra's entry from the provisional in his trace into reality, it is also “Skillful Means.” Because it possesses all these meanings, the chapter is called “Skillful Means.”

方便品釋·略開三顯一Skillful Means · Briefly Opening the Three to Reveal the One

全文五層 →Full five layers →
白話Vernacular

一、迹門正說先略後廣

從〈方便品〉這裡開始,到〈分別功德品〉十九行偈為止;或者把界線延至偈後說現在四信弟子的文字完畢,都可以稱為正說分。如果另作兩段正說,從這裡到〈授學無學人記品〉,便是迹門正說。現在先依較近的界線,把迹門正說再分成兩段:第一,從這裡開始,是略開三顯一;第二,從佛對舍利弗說祂已殷勤請法的地方以下,是廣開三顯一。

略開又分兩段:第一,從經文『爾時世尊』以下,是略開三顯一;第二,從『爾時大眾』以下,是既有執著被動搖、疑問隨之生起。略開三顯一有長行與偈頌。長行又分兩段:第一,藉著言語稱歎權、實二智;第二,以停止言說來稱歎二智。若完全不用言語,眾生便無從知道;可是即使用言語稱揚,也不能說盡。諸佛二智已如前文所說。〔云云〕

藉言稱歎又分兩章:第一,說諸佛的權智與實智;第二,說釋迦的權智與實智。諸佛所行之道相同,所以一併稱歎。前面佛光照見他方國土,彌勒橫向發問,文殊引述古佛,大眾豎向聽聞,正是在表明諸佛道同。因此,經文一開始便寫佛從定中安詳而起,顯明諸佛所行之道相同。

稱歎諸佛的文字分為三段:第一,雙歎;第二,雙釋;第三,雙結。雙歎之中,先由結集經典的人提起,然後正式稱歎。

二、佛為何從定中安詳而起

『爾時』就是正當那個時候。佛常常在定,為什麼特別說祂從定而起?這裡有所顯示。

往古諸佛宣說這部經時,必先進入《無量義經》所說之定,隨即轉入《法華》。今日佛也是如此。古今諸佛說經的儀則相同,這是依世界悉檀說佛憫念眾生而從定起。

佛對自己所經歷的法門和眾生受法的機緣,都已審察真切;將要宣說的話必定不錯,使眾生增長信心。這是依為人悉檀說佛憫念眾生而從定起。

佛寂靜而又恆常照了,尚且先入定才說法,何況心念散亂的人,怎能妄自有所宣說?這是依對治悉檀說佛憫念眾生而從定起。

入定時,佛緣於真理,使自己的心安住實相;出定以後,祂使眾生的心也安住實相。這是依第一義悉檀說佛憫念眾生而從定起。安住這四種法,所以經文說佛安詳而起。

佛告訴舍利弗,是因舍利弗在小乘聲聞中智慧第一。佛將要借祂破除小智、顯明大智;其中廢、會、開、覆共有十種,詳如《玄義》所說。這仍是經家提起的文字。

《法華論》說,佛進入甚深三昧,正念不動,以如實智觀察;從三昧出起,是為顯現如來已得自在力,也因如來入定時沒有人能驚動、觸犯。論義與這裡的解釋相應:第〔一義〕悉檀超出世間,所以無人能驚動;四悉檀運用無礙,所以佛得自在。〔云云〕

再解釋結加趺坐。往昔數量如微塵、恒沙般的諸佛和弟子,都曾行這種坐法。即使結加趺坐的人生起惡念,這一姿態尚能使他人生敬,何況真正進入甚深境界,怎會不使天、人喜悅?它又不是世間日常受用之法,不與外道共通,能破除魔軍與煩惱,也能生起三種菩提之道。依我的看法,這仍含有四悉檀之意。

有人問:其他經中說把心念繫在前方,這是什麼意思?

回答:色想、生死與煩惱境界被放在身後,寂滅、涅槃的所緣則被正觀在前,所以應當依四種方式解釋。〔云云〕

又問:為什麼說把所緣繫在面部?

回答有四層。凡夫從面容生起欲念,先感到身體倚樂,然後遍及全身;身體九處流出不淨,臉上便有七孔,因此以不淨觀對治欲念,把所緣繫在面部。〔其一〕

六識的作用聚在面部,心又多向上攀緣;這用來表示一切賢聖崇尚空、與空相應,所以把所緣繫在面部。〔其二〕

若觀察面部,便能分辨六識;為了分別六識,所以把所緣繫在面部。〔其三〕

身體可以分作六分,頭面最為殊勝;這表示一切法中實相第一,因它是第一法,所以把所緣繫在面部。〔其四〕

三、諸佛二智:先歎實智,後歎權門

雙歎二智時,先稱歎實智,後稱歎權智。實智就是諸佛的智慧。這裡所說的不是三種化他權實,所以特別說諸佛;它要顯示諸佛自行之實,所以稱作智慧。這智慧的體就是一心三智。

『甚深無量』是稱歎之辭。佛的實智豎向透徹如理的底,所以說甚深;橫向窮盡法界之邊,所以說無量。無量與甚深,就是深、高、橫、廣。譬如根扎得深,枝條便繁茂;水源流得遠,水流便綿長。實智如此,權智也可依例明白。〔云云〕

『智慧門』是在稱歎權智。它是自行道以前的方便,具有進趣的力量,所以名為門;從門進入道中,道中稱實,道前稱權。

『難解難入』也是稱歎權智。不必預先謀度便能了知,運用又沒有固定方所;七種方便不能測量。十住才開始理解,十地才算進入。只舉初、後兩端,中間位次難以一一顯示,難悟的意思也可由此知道。經文又特別說聲聞、緣覺不能知道,是因二乘的執著較重,所以另加破斥。

法身的本意原以自行權實面向眾生,眾生卻因根機未發而逃離,所以說不知。《華嚴》頓時照耀,他們如聾、啞、盲、聵,所以說不知;《方等》加以彈斥,他們仍守著草庵,所以說不知;《般若》使其轉而教化,卻沒有一念想取得一餐之意,所以說不知。如今大乘根機啟發,佛放光、動地,彼此、今古諸佛所行之道相同;眾生仍懷疑,所以說不知。利根菩薩能在每一節理解,鈍根菩薩則與二乘相同,也不能知道。

光宅把二乘方便取作今經的智慧門。對這一說,須從承認與奪去兩面看。若它真已是門,便應已經得門,為什麼如來又破斥他們不知?既然不知,便不能說已經得到門。若暫且承認,這只是最淺的能通之門,他們卻永遠不認識所要進入的地方。〔云云〕

現在的解釋更加開闊。第一,自有方便智慧作門,得以進入佛智慧;如《瓔珞》所說,二觀是方便道,由此進入中道第一義諦。三種教中也各有四門,作為方便而進入中道。光宅的解釋,在二觀中只取一觀,在十二門中只取一門。〔云云〕

第二,自有方便智慧作門,得以進入方便智,也就是三種教各自以四門隨教入證。第三,自有佛智作門,得以進入佛智慧;如前文說圓因稱〈方便品〉,自行觀智便是門,也就是今經所歎的智慧門,圓教四門正是其中一門。第四,自有實智作門,進入方便智而雙照二諦。如此解釋豐富開闊,怎會像光宅只守一種那樣狹窄?若依論書以阿含言教為門,便須把各種教義開展出來;準此觀察即可知道。〔云云〕

四、諸佛二智的雙釋與雙結

從經文『所以者何』以下,光宅判為稱歎釋迦章。現在推究經文的意思,這其實是在雙重解釋諸佛二智。

從佛曾親近無數諸佛,到盡行諸佛道法,是解釋諸佛實智。由於外在所遇到的佛很多,所承受的都是至要之法,所以實智甚深;由於內在修行純厚,盡行諸佛無量道法,所以實智無量。無量解釋橫廣,甚深解釋豎高。

勇猛精進、名稱普聞,是解釋諸佛權智。智慧門之所以難解難入,是因勇猛精進才能進入那難入之門;既已入門,利益所及沒有邊界,眾生敬仰殊勝功德,所以名聲普遍傳聞。也可以把兩句分開:勇猛精進能入法門,是解釋權智之深;名稱普聞,是解釋權智之廣。權智的經文沒有直接說深、廣二字,但依實智的例子,這層意義仍可成立。〔云云〕

從成就甚深以下,是雙結諸佛二智。與真理相應而達到究竟,所以稱作成就;到達彼岸底部,所以稱作甚深,這是結成實智。所說之法與眾生根機相稱、適時相會,所以稱作隨宜;七種方便不能知道,所以稱作難解,這是結成權智。

若只隨順眾生情執,真理便被遮蔽,所以難解;若是了義,意旨便顯明,所以容易知道。《攝大乘》說,了義經依文字判義,不了義經則依義理判文,正是這層意思。

另有一次解釋,把成就甚深未曾有法判為結自行權實,把隨宜所說意趣難解判為結化他權實。〔云云〕

五、釋迦二智:先錄舊說,再依文次第

從『吾從成佛已來』以下,是稱歎釋迦的權智、實智。舊說認為釋迦的權、實各自分開稱歎:從成佛以來以下是歎權,所以者何是釋權;如來知見廣大以下是歎實,無量無礙以下是釋實;如來能種種分別以下,是總結實智之歎。

舊說為前後次第提出三個理由。第一,諸佛二智合在一起稱歎,是要顯示二智之體相同;釋迦二智分開稱歎,是要顯示二智功用不同。第二,要顯示垂下示現之本,所以諸佛先歎實;要顯示根本的作用,所以釋迦先歎權。第三,諸佛說自行,必先得到實;釋迦說化他,先用權智引導初學。文字彼此互相顯現、或隱或現,是為說明體本圓滿,不能偏取一邊;偏存一邊便失去宗旨。

現在認為不是如此。只依經文次第,義理便容易理解,不必曲折分辨。既然舊說又說諸佛道同,為什麼到這裡反而用不同方式解釋?這就像有人善於稱讚孝順,自己卻毆打父母一樣。〔云云〕

依現在的分法,釋迦章也分三段:第一,雙歎;第二,雙釋;第三,雙結。

『吾從成佛已來』是歎實智。若實智沒有圓滿,佛道便不能成就;既然已說成佛,一旦成就,一切也隨之成就,所以是稱歎實智。

從種種因緣以下,是歎權智。佛在四十多年中,以三種化他權實逗應眾生,所以說種種因緣。譬喻方面,小乘以芭蕉、水沫為喻,大乘以乾城、鏡中幻像等為喻。依諸論說,小乘譬作乳,大乘譬作醍醐。

『廣演』是能從一法演出無量義。『無數方便』就是七種方便。『引導眾生令離諸著』又有五層:宣說散十善,使眾生離開三惡道之著;宣說淨十善,使眾生離開欲界之著;宣說三藏,使眾生離開見惑、思惑之著;宣說菩薩法,使眾生離開涅槃之著;宣說佛法,使眾生離開順道法愛之著。

從『所以者何』以下,是雙釋二智。『如來』半句解釋實智:從真如實相中來而成就佛道,所以名為如來,也就是解釋實智已成。『方便』解釋權智:由於善巧方便,所以能用種種因緣教化。

『知見波羅蜜』雙舉權、實知見。一切種智名為實知,佛眼名為實見;道種智名為權知,法眼名為權見。它們都已到達事、理的彼岸,所以都稱波羅蜜。

『皆已具足』是說權、實兩邊都已究竟。若不是作雙釋,為什麼忽然說『皆已』?這個皆字正把雙釋的意思顯明出來。

從如來知見廣大深遠以下,是雙結釋迦二智。如來知見如前所說。廣大表示橫,深遠表示豎。實智本非橫、非豎,現在寄託言語稱歎,才從橫豎說它的照見沒有邊際,如函既大、覆蓋它的蓋也大。

從無量無礙以下,是結權智。自行之權是道前方便,約無量法門而說,所以明知是在結權智;實智本沒有許多差別。光宅卻以這段解釋實智,不只光宅不認識實智,梁代諸師也不知實智沒有種種差別。〔云云〕

『無量』是佛地四無量,『無礙』是佛地四無礙辯。佛能從一辭、一義旋轉演出無量樂說,沒有窮盡;別教、通教菩薩與之相比,如同指甲上的泥土與大地之別。『力』是十力,『無所畏』是四無所畏,『禪』窮盡禪的實相,『定』是首楞嚴定,『三昧』是王三昧。深入無際結成豎深,成就一切未曾有法結成橫廣。

六、由寄言轉入絕言

從如來能種種分別以下,舊說把它結成前面的權、實;現在則用它生起後文。佛將要停止言說,所以先再次舉權、實,作為絕言稱歎的理由。文字分兩段:第一,舉出絕言稱歎之由;第二,指出絕言所對之境。

鄭重表示殷勤。『如來能善分別、巧說諸法』是舉權智;『言辭柔軟悅可眾心』是舉實智。怎麼知道?前面看見他土佛說頓法時,經文說聲音清淨、發出柔軟音;舍利弗領解時又說,聽到佛柔軟音,深遠而甚微妙。依前後兩處,便知柔軟音在這裡舉實智。

前一段稱歎時先實後權,這裡為什麼先權後實?前面要寄託言語,所以從實智舒展出權智;現在要停止言說,便須把權智收卷而歸於實智。

從『取要言之』以下,是指出所對之境。第一種拆法,把要字指向實智,因為最要者沒有超過實;無量無邊未曾有法則指權智。第二種拆法,以舉要作為開始指示的端點:無量無邊指權,未曾有法指實。這兩種法佛都已成就,是修道所得,怎能說得盡?若只指一件事,不應說悉;既然雙指權、實,經文的意思便很清楚。

七、一個止字,為何仍是稱歎

從止字以下,是第二段絕言歎。印師說,佛要藉停止言說生起大眾疑問、請法之心。觀師說,真實法難知,所以先抑止不說,以驚動眾人的常情。

現在的解釋是:這個法深奧寂靜,言語之道斷絕,其體不可言說,所以佛停止而稱歎。即使祂出於慈悲宣說,聽者也可能不能理解,反而損傷善根,所以停止。

從所以者何以下,是解釋停止稱歎的意思,分為兩層。第一,就佛說祂是最上之人,已成就、修得最上之法,所以不可說。第二,說祂所證甚深境界不可思議,所以不可說。

從佛成就以下,說最上之人的權、實橫向圓滿,不可言說;從唯佛與佛以下,說最上之人的權、實豎向深徹,不可言說。成就與不成就相對,難解與不難解相對,這些都是橫向說已成就。那是修道所得,所以不可說。

唯佛與佛才能究盡,是因初位、中間位雖分得一部分,仍未窮盡根源;譬如十四日的月亮,光的作用還沒有普遍。只有佛與佛窮盡邊底,如十五日的滿月,月體無不圓滿,月光無不遍照。如此豎深,也是修道所得,所以不可說。

從諸法實相以下,是第二個理由:甚深境界不可思議,所以不可說。

八、諸家如何分配十如

光宅說,最初一句標出權、實二智兩章:諸法標示權智之境。三組各有三項,彼此並非一法,所以稱作諸法;三法之中,教最為明顯,教必與根機相應,也就有受教之人,所以知道這個三三屬權。

實相則是實智之境。真理是一而不虛,所以稱作實相;四個一中遍舉一理,因理是根本,所以屬實。中間九句仍在解釋上面權、實兩章。

前五句解釋權章。相,是三乘言教可以攬取、辨別;性,是三乘教性分判確定,不能移易;體,是三乘教法各有八音章句,菩薩教以六度為體。〔云云〕力,是三乘教法具有訓導之力;作,是三乘教法施於受教人而有所造作。

實智境被廣說,卻沒有再牒出章名。實境有四個一,以四句廣釋一理。因,是境能生真實理解,萬善望向所成之果;緣,是境能發起實智;因所望到之處名果,果生起而酬答因名報。後兩句雙結:本末一句結權,本舉相,末舉作;究竟等一句結實,究竟結因,等結報。

北地師說,三乘法都具有相、性、果、報、本末。

瑤師說,相、性解釋智慧照用三乘,使三乘萌芽各異;必定成三是性;發心是體;隨心所能承受是力;能力有所造作是作;所作行招感果是因。因已分判以後,外在助力是緣;因緣共同成辦是果;酬因是報。相是本,報是末,終歸同一宗旨是究竟等。『如是』表示這些事沒有差錯。

暢師只約佛來解。相,是十力各有相貌;性,是眾生根性各有所習,所習不改,屬性力境;體,是根性不同,欲求也不同,心的作用有所繫著,所以用體為名,屬欲力境;力,是禪定的別名,神通變動非定不能運作,鎮心止亂非定不能寂靜,所以力是禪定力境;作,是業,屬業力境;因,是道能作因而到達涅槃,屬至處道力境;緣,屬宿命力境;果,是依現在之因說未來所召之果,屬天眼力境;報,是以現在果報回望過去因,屬漏盡力境;本是相,末是報,總體來看都屬處非處力境。

九、智者為何不用以上諸說

以上解釋並非各自全無一條可通的義路,可是在道理上不通,在經文上也不允當。

經文上不允,是因經說諸法,有什麼法不被收攝?怎能只限於三乘?道理上不通,是因經說實相,實相有哪裡不在?怎能只把它放在因、果、體中?

若實只在佛,佛便完全沒有權;若權只在三乘,三乘便永遠沒有實。若三乘只分前五如,權法自身已不完整,又全無實;若後四句只在佛,佛便全無權,實也不完整。凡夫完全沒有被涉及,諸法二字便成了無用;實相若不能遍在,實相以外便另有法。因有這些過失,所以都不採用。

《釋論》卷三十一說,每一法各有九種。第一,各有體;第二,各有法,例如眼、耳雖同由四大所造,眼有見用,耳沒有見功;火以熱為自己的法,不能潤濕。第三,各有力,例如火以燃燒為力,水以潤濕為力。第四,各有因。第五,各有緣。第六,各有果。第七,各有性。第八,各有限礙。第九,各有開通方便。

達磨欝多以這九種會通《法華經》十如:各有法,就是如是作;各有限礙,就是如是相;各有果,就是如是果、如是報;各有開通方便,就是本末究竟等;其餘名稱相同,可以知道。

現在說這個境,先用一句簡略標出權、實兩章,再用十句廣釋權、實之相。智者作四番解釋:第一,約十法界;第二,約佛法界;第三,約離合;第四,約位。經說諸法,所以用十法界解釋;經說佛所成就第一希有之法,所以用佛法界解釋;經說止止不須說、我法妙難思,所以用離合解釋;經說唯佛與佛才能究盡,所以用位次解釋。

十、第一番:一界之中具足餘九界

約十法界,是說六道、四聖,合成十法。法雖無量,數目不出這十界;每一界中雖有許多支派,也不超出十如。

例如地獄界,本位具足自身的相、性、本末,也具足畜生界的相、性、本末,乃至具足佛法界的相、性、本末,沒有缺減。因此《毘婆沙》說,地獄道眾生能成就他化天法,這便是同類事例;其餘九法界也是如此。

應當知道,每一界都具有其餘九界,也各有十如。若照各自本位看,九界十如都名為權;照佛界本位看,佛界十如名為實。一中具無量,無量中又具一,所以稱為不可思議。

若只照六道、三聖來看,五如可名為權;照佛界來看,四如可名為實。如此一項一項分得清楚,便成為可說、可顯示,又何必等待佛止止不說、以絕言作歎?

真正不可宣示之處,在於一中具有無量:凡夫雖然具足,卻隔絕真理,情識迷惑;二乘雖然具足,卻捨離其餘法,只求解脫;菩薩雖然具足,觀照仍不周遍,名為不能明了;如來則橫、豎洞察,完全具足,只有祂自己明了,其他人不能看見。因此不能宣示,佛停止言說,意旨正在這裡。《玄義》已經詳說,現在不完整記錄。〔云云〕

十一、第二番:佛法界十如與大車

約佛法界解釋,十如每一項都由雙重否定而安立。

佛界不是相,也不是沒有相,而方便名為如是相,指萬善緣因;所以後文說大車由眾寶莊校。佛界不是性,也不是沒有性,而方便名為如是性,指智慧了因;所以後文說有大白牛。佛界不是體,也不是沒有體,而方便名為如是體,指實相正因;所以後文說車身高廣。

佛界不是力,也不是沒有力,而方便名為如是力,指菩提道心、慈悲善根之力等;所以後文說車上張設幰蓋。佛界不是作,也不是沒有作,而方便名為如是作,指任運無功用之道;所以後文說車行疾速如風。

佛界不是因,也不是沒有因,而方便名為如是因,指四十一位;所以後文說乘著寶乘遊於四方。佛界不是緣,也不是沒有緣,而方便名為如是緣,指一切助菩提道;所以後文說有許多僕從侍衛。

佛界不是果,也不是沒有果,而方便名為如是果,指妙覺朗然,由圓滿因所成;所以後文說直至道場。佛界不是報,也不是沒有報,而方便名為如是報,指大般涅槃;所以後文說得到無量無漏清淨果報。

佛果不是本,也不是末,卻方便說本末:本是佛相,末是佛報,這是自行之權。佛界不是等,也不是不等,卻方便說究竟等,指向實相;所以標章說實相,這是自行之實。

即實而權,所以說本末;即權而實,所以說等。這是如來自行權實,最為無上。從無上相乃至無上果報,橫廣、豎深,都沒有更在其上者,所以標章說諸法實相。依例也應說諸法實性、實體、實力乃至實究竟等,只因文字簡略,舉一便能覆蓋其餘。

如來橫豎遍照,周遍明白,如同觀看掌中之果。凡夫卻如雙眼全盲,二乘如一眼有障,菩薩像夜間視物,朦朧不清;因此不可宣說,佛止止不言,意旨正在這裡。

十二、第三番離合與第四番約位

約離合解釋:佛心所觀的十界、十如,全都是無上相,乃至無上果報,合起來只是一佛法界,如大海總攝萬條水流,又如千輛車同循一條車轍。這是自行權實。

若隨順他人之意,便開出九法界及各界十如相、性等,這是化他權實。化他雖然也有實,都收束為權;自行雖然也有權,都收束為實。隨他便開,隨自便合;橫、豎周遍照了,開合自在。

雖開成無量,無量仍是一;雖合成一,一仍是無量。雖說無量與一,卻既不是一,也不是無量;雖不是一、不是無量,卻仍然是一、仍然是無量。只有佛與佛才能究盡。凡夫誹謗不信,二乘迷悶不受,菩薩也像面前有木樁、塵埃而看不清。因為這層義,佛停止言說。〔云云〕

約位解釋:一切眾生本自具有實相,這便是如來藏的相貌,名為如是相;性德智慧第一義空,名為如是性;中道法性之理,名為如是體。這三者合為三德,通於十法界,每一位都具有。

若研修三德,進入十信位,便名如是力、如是作;進入四十一地,名如是因、如是緣;到達佛地,名如是果、如是報。最初三項名為本,後面三組名為末;初、後同是三德,所以名究竟等。

最初位的三德通惡、通善,通賢、通聖,通小、通大,通始、通極。雖在惡而不沉下,雖在善而不上升;雖在賢而不降低,雖在聖而不增高;雖在小而不狹窄,雖在大而不寬廣;雖在開始而不是新有,雖到究竟而不是陳舊。因此不可思議、不可言說,佛止止不言。

十三、究竟等與不可思議

再說三德究竟等。十界相、性有權實、開合的種種差別,若以平等大慧如實觀察,究竟全都平等。

若迷於這個境,便有六界相、性,名為世諦;若理解這個境,便有二乘相、性,名為真諦;若通達它不是迷、不是解,便有菩薩、佛界相、性,名為中道第一義諦。

用這種智慧平等觀察俗諦,俗諦便不是迷;平等觀察真諦,真諦便不是解。不是解,也不是迷,雙重否定迷與解,只名平等。若雙照權、實,權就是實,實就是權;雖有二而不是二,也名究竟等。

再者,權、實不二之境,不是七種方便能以不二智平等觀照的境;只有諸佛能以不二智平等觀照不二境,所以名究竟等。

又因今日大乘根機發動,不再分別宣說九界相、性,直接說一切相、性全都進入佛界相、性。從前教法沒有這樣說,眾人便以為昔日教法與今日不等;如今既如此宣說,才知道昔、今本來平等,所以名究竟等。

最初是依惑、解說平等,其次依人說平等,最後依教說平等。這層義本來很廣,記錄的人不能全部詳錄。

若從超絕言語、思惟說不可思議,《釋論》卷七十九說,不可思議就是不可決定,超出一切心、心所法,超出一切言語道路,不能行、不能到,所以名不可思議。

若用譬喻說不可思議,《釋論》卷十四說,不能藉破壞色法進入平等道,觀察色法不異,才能平等進入大乘。譬如明與暗共同存在,只因看不見,便說明暗各異;要知道其中意思,可以觀察月光。又如日出時,黑暗並沒有走向十方;暗一直都在,沒有歸向之處,明也同樣與暗共合。生死與道相合,道就是生死。佛應盡的已經盡,應度的已經度,這些都不可思議。各經、各論中同類例子很多。

若從事相說不可思議,《阿含經》說有四種:眾生、世界、龍、佛。眾生從哪裡來、往哪裡去?為什麼出生、為什麼死亡?世界有邊還是無邊,可以斷還是不可斷,是天、龍、人、鬼中的誰所造?

《阿含》又說,有一名士夫在王舍城拘絺羅池旁,思惟世界有邊、無邊,看見四軍全進入蓮藕絲孔中,驚問自己是否發狂,世上不應有這種怪事。他問佛,佛說他沒有發狂,那是阿修羅被諸天追逐,敗退而藏入藕孔。思惟這類世間問題,不是通向涅槃之道,沒有義的利益、法的利益、梵行的利益。〔云云〕

龍降雨,是從龍的口、耳、眼、鼻、舌中出來嗎?實際不從這些處所出,只從龍的一念而出;念善、念惡都能降雨,是因過去本行而在今生得到這種力量。須彌山腹有一位名大力的天,也能降雨。

又有經說五道各有一種不可思議:地獄眾生的身體能斷而再續,畜生能飛,餓鬼能把少物變多,人能使火燒薪,天能自然得到果報。這些都是果報法事不可思議。〔云云〕這只是依因緣事相解釋不可思議,何況甚深境界,怎會不是不可思議?

十四、二十一行偈如何重頌

偈頌共有二十一行,分為兩段:前十七行半重頌長行,後三行半略開三顯一,使舊執動搖而生疑。前十七行半又分兩段:先四行重頌寄言歎,後十三行半重頌絕言歎。偈頌與長行彼此有廣有略,是為使義理容易顯明。長行把諸佛、釋迦權實分開稱歎,表示教化因緣不同;偈中把二佛合起來稱歎,表示二智的道理相同。

寄言歎四行又分兩段:最初兩行合頌二佛二智,後兩行合頌二佛的釋歎、結歎等。最初兩行再分兩層。『世雄』一句重頌諸佛智慧,『不可量』重頌甚深無量,是重頌諸佛實智;其後三句重頌諸佛權智。

這裡與長行有三點差別。第一,長行舉人又標法,所以說諸佛智慧;偈頌只舉人,用人的尊號讚美法,所以說世雄。第二,長行分開稱歎,偈中合起來稱歎;法有分別,所以分開,人能總攝,所以合說。第三,長行說一切二乘不知,偈中說一切眾生類都不知。

從佛力以下一行,重頌釋迦二智。佛字重頌從成佛以來,正頌實智;力、無所畏等功德重頌權智;餘法指化他之權,是實智的其餘助力,正重頌前面種種因緣。〔云云〕

從本從無數佛以下兩行,合頌二佛釋歎、結歎之意。本從無數佛、具足行諸道,重頌諸佛曾親近百千佛、盡行道法;甚深微妙法,重頌實智成就甚深未曾有法;難見難可了,重頌權智意趣難解。於無量億劫、行此諸道已,重頌釋迦知見波羅蜜全已具足,前兩句舉因具足;道場得成果舉果具足;我已悉知見,重頌如來知見廣大,結成釋迦二智。

另有一次分法,用四偈合頌二佛權實,再分六項:第一,世雄一句總頌二佛二智;第二,諸天及世人以下三句重頌揀人;第三,佛力以下一行重頌釋迦的權實;第四,本從以下一行重頌諸佛的權實;第五,於無量以下半行重頌上面的修行之因;第六,道場得成以下兩句重頌所得之果。

從如是大果報以下,有十三行半重頌絕言歎,分成五段。第一,最初半行『如是大果報』重頌不可思議境,只舉開頭,後面和中間可以依義知道;義字也兼頌究竟等。『大』與『種種』已在《玄義》中說明。

第二,我及十方佛以下半行,追頌取要言之、佛悉成就。第三,不可示以下半行,追頌止、不須再說;實相沒有固定方所,所以不可顯示,不在言語道路中,所以言辭相寂滅。

第四,從諸餘眾生類以下,重頌不能知道的人。長行說無人能知,所以佛停止不說;偈中以十行半列出不知之人,再分八類。第一,半偈總揀不能進入者,就是七種方便。第二,除諸以下兩句,揀出能進入者,就是圓教十信,所以說信力堅固者;長行舉究竟佛知,偈頌舉初信能知,彼此互舉。

第三,諸佛弟子以下一行半,揀二乘不知。第四,假使滿世間以下一行,舉舍利弗不知。第五,正使滿十方以下一行半,舉諸大弟子不知。第六,辟支佛以下兩行,舉辟支佛不知。第七,新發意以下兩行半,舉發心菩薩不能進入。發心一詞意義很廣;可以指修六度而經三大阿僧祇劫尚未斷惑的菩薩,也可以在上面人、天中攝得六度,而把發心另擬通、別等發心。第八,不退菩薩以下一行,揀不退菩薩仍不能知道;通教不退已斷界內惑,仍不知道別理,別教地前也有證位不退、行不退等,同樣還不能知道。

第五,從又告舍利弗、無漏以下一行半,重頌難解之法只有佛能知的實相境。無漏不思議重頌結要,舉出權、實停止言說所對之境;甚深微妙法重頌第一希有難解之法;我今已具得以下三句,重頌唯佛與佛才能究盡。諸佛所行之道相同,也同樣都已究竟,所以說只有我知道此相,十方佛也是如此。

十五、四句回扣四番,三行半略開顯一

解釋不可思議,可以譬如如意珠本身毫無一絲外在所有,卻能降下眾寶;實相不生,卻能生起般若。

以無漏不思議一行半為本,可以生出前面四種解釋。無漏半句作十法界解釋之本:十法界十如,收攝凡聖理性而沒有漏失,也收攝三諦、權實智而沒有漏失。不思議作開合解釋之本:即權而實,即實而權,所以不可思議。甚深微妙法作佛法界解釋之本。唯我知是相作約位解釋之本。〔云云〕

從舍利弗當知諸佛語無異以下,是略開三顯一,也使舊執動搖、疑問生起。開顯分兩段:第一,諸佛顯實;第二,釋迦開三,兩邊各明一面而互相顯發。

諸佛語無異,是說諸佛教化之道相同。其後兩句勸眾生生信,再後兩句正式顯實;佛經過很久,現在終將宣說真實。這句話動搖眾人過去的執著,生起今日的疑問,甚至懷疑眼前是否魔變作佛,正是因聽到這番話。佛既如實勸信,眾人為什麼反而懷疑?佛是為防有人因疑生謗,所以先勸信。

從告諸聲聞眾以下,是釋迦開三,分為三段。第一行正式開三。將要顯明二乘並非究竟,所以說『逮得涅槃者』。

又有一解,把我令脫苦縛、逮得涅槃判為六度菩薩乘。修六度能免四惡趣繫縛,卻還不能立即入滅度,要經三大阿僧祇劫及百劫才得涅槃;逮字表示距離遙遠而終能到達。六度行先度他,所以說我使他們脫離苦縛;後來取得無漏,所以說逮得涅槃。由此推知是六度乘。

又可從數目推知:下一句說佛以方便力顯示三乘教。如果這裡不含六度乘,第三乘要從哪裡成立?不應把二乘重複計數而說成三乘。

接下來半行正式斥三乘都屬虛偽,最後兩句說明建立三乘之意:佛用權宜引導,使眾生離開種種苦,所以三乘不是究竟真實,只是方便之門。

十六、大眾疑什麼,舍利弗如何請

從爾時大眾以下,是把疑問呈出而請佛決斷。眾人聽到三乘是方便、一乘是真實,舊執被動搖,疑問因而生起。這一段分為敘疑、正請兩部分。

敘疑又分兩層:先由經家敘述,再正式說眾人所疑。經家先敘千二百阿羅漢的疑,再敘四眾之疑。前面既斥三乘都是方便,這裡為何偏舉二乘?因二乘執著較重、疑問較深,所以偏舉。到了陳疑偈中,經文明說求佛道的菩薩多達八萬,也都有疑;由此可知三乘全都懷疑,只是先偏舉二乘。

從各作是念以下,是正式生疑,又分兩類:第一,疑佛的權、實二智;第二,疑自己所得。

何故慇懃稱歎方便,是總疑權、實二智。佛所得法甚深,是疑實智;有所言說、意趣難知,是疑權智。眾人因聽到諸佛語無異、終將說真實而生疑。佛過去說三乘智慧所證相同,只是習氣有盡、有未盡;現在忽然稱歎如來二智並非他們所能達到,所以他們疑佛二智。

從佛說一解脫義、我們也已得到這個法以下,是懷疑自己所得。三乘聖道本是真實出離之要,自己依此理修行也已到涅槃;如今佛忽然說它們都是方便,便不知道哪一個才是真實,所以說不知此義指向何處。這項疑問正從前面斥三乘為方便而生。

從舍利弗正式請問以下,有三請二止;若連同前面絕言歎的一止合算,則一共有三止。

瑤師、龍師說,第一次止是因道理甚深、難解,第一次請是替自己和他人求決;第二次止是怕眾人驚疑不信,第二次請是因會眾久種善根,必能理解;第三次止是因有人必會毀謗、墮入惡道,第三次請是因利根人能得利益。

今師另有一次解釋:佛預先知道三周說法所得利益不會同時出現、前後也不相同,所以三次抑止,等待舍利弗三請。

第一次請又分長行與偈頌。長行分陳疑、陳請;陳疑是疑二智,陳請則有舍利弗自己請和代眾人請。

偈頌共有十一行,分為六段。第一,最初兩句重頌疑實智。第二,從自說得以下三行重頌疑權智。第三,從無漏諸羅漢以下三行,說三乘四眾都有疑:上句說羅漢,後兩行說緣覺,中間的『及求涅槃者』則說六度菩薩。怎麼知道?前面說逮得涅槃者,這裡又用及字。這類菩薩自己求涅槃,又以涅槃利益他人,所以與二乘不同,明知是在說菩薩。

第四,從於諸聲聞眾以下一行半,說舍利弗自己的疑。第五,從佛口所生以下一行,說佛子疑。第六,從諸天龍以下兩行,總明大眾共同懷疑、共同請問。

偈頌與長行可以依義互相推知;若某些偈句不是重頌,便是長行以外另出的內容。對義理不緊要之處,記錄者不能用煩重文字逐句分拆,所以從略。

從佛告舍利弗以下,是請法以後的二止。佛第一次止,舍利弗又把疑問轉成第二次請;佛第二次再止。這些都依經文明白可見。〔云云〕

《妙法蓮華經文句》第三卷下終。

I. The Main Teaching of the Trace Gate Is First Brief, Then Extensive

From the Skillful Means chapter through the nineteen lines of verse in the Distinctions in Merit chapter—or, alternatively, extending the boundary through the prose after those verses concerning the four kinds of present faith—the passage may be called the division of main teaching. If the main teaching is divided into two sections, the passage from here through the Predictions for Those Still Learning and Those beyond Learning chapter is the main teaching of the Trace Gate. The nearer boundary is followed here, and the main teaching of the Trace Gate is again divided into two: first, the act of opening the three to reveal the one in brief, beginning here; second, the extensive opening of the three to reveal the one, beginning with the Buddha's words to Śāriputra that he has requested the Dharma earnestly.

The brief opening itself has two parts. First, from the scriptural words “At that time the World-Honored One” onward, is the brief opening of the three to reveal the one. Second, from “At that time the great assembly” onward, former attachments are stirred and doubts arise. The brief opening of the three to reveal the one has prose and verse. Its prose in turn has two parts: first, praise of the two wisdoms, provisional and real, by entrusting the matter to words; second, praise of those wisdoms by stopping speech. If words were not used at all, living beings would have no way to know; yet even when words are used in praise, the matter cannot be exhausted. The two wisdoms of the buddhas are as explained above. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

The praise entrusted to words has two sections. The first explains the provisional and real wisdoms of the buddhas, and the second those of Śākyamuni. Because the path practiced by the buddhas is the same, they are praised together. Earlier, the Buddha's light illuminated other lands, Maitreya asked horizontally, Mañjuśrī cited a former buddha, and the assembly heard vertically; all this revealed that the path of the buddhas is the same. The scripture therefore begins by saying that the Buddha calmly emerged from samādhi, making manifest that the path practiced by the buddhas is the same.

The words praising the buddhas divide into three parts: first the dual praise, second the dual explanation, and third the dual conclusion. Within the dual praise, the compiler first introduces the scene and the formal praise follows.

II. Why Does the Buddha Calmly Emerge from Samādhi?

“At that time” means at precisely that moment. The Buddha constantly abides in samādhi; why is it said particularly that he emerged from samādhi? Something is being shown here.

When buddhas of the past taught this scripture, they necessarily first entered the samādhi taught in the Sutra of Immeasurable Meanings and then immediately proceeded into the Lotus. The present Buddha does likewise. The rules by which buddhas past and present teach scripture are the same. In terms of the worldly siddhānta, this explains that the Buddha emerged from samādhi out of compassionate concern for living beings.

The Buddha has truly examined the Dharma-gateways he has traversed and the conditions under which living beings receive the Dharma. What he is about to teach will certainly not be mistaken and will increase the faith of living beings. In terms of the siddhānta for each person, this explains that the Buddha emerged from samādhi out of compassionate concern for living beings.

Though quiescent, the Buddha constantly illumines; even he first enters samādhi before teaching. How much less should people with distracted thoughts presume to teach falsely? In terms of the counteractive siddhānta, this explains that the Buddha emerged from samādhi out of compassionate concern for living beings.

While in samādhi, the Buddha takes truth as his object and settles his own mind in the true mark. After emerging, he also settles the minds of living beings in the true mark. In terms of the siddhānta of ultimate meaning, this explains that the Buddha emerged from samādhi out of compassionate concern for living beings. Because these four Dharmas are settled, the scripture says that the Buddha emerged calmly.

The Buddha addresses Śāriputra because Śāriputra is foremost in wisdom among lesser-vehicle śrāvakas. The Buddha will use him to break lesser wisdom and reveal the greater; the ten forms of abandoning, gathering, opening, and covering are explained in detail in the Profound Meaning. This still belongs to the words introducing the scene.

The Treatise on the Lotus Sutra says that the Buddha entered profound samādhi, remained unmoving in right mindfulness, and contemplated with wisdom as it really is. He arose from samādhi to reveal that the Tathāgata had attained sovereign power and also because no one could disturb or touch the Tathāgata while he was in samādhi. The treatise's meaning corresponds to the explanation here. The siddhānta of 〔ultimate meaning〕 transcends the world and therefore no one can disturb him; the four siddhāntas function without obstruction and therefore the Buddha possesses sovereignty. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

Next, the text explains sitting cross-legged. Buddhas and disciples of the past, as numerous as dust motes and Ganges sands, all practiced this way of sitting. Even if someone sitting cross-legged gives rise to an unwholesome thought, the posture can still make others respectful; how much more must someone who truly enters a profound sphere delight devas and humans? It is also not a form of ordinary worldly enjoyment, is not shared with non-Buddhist practitioners, can destroy demon armies and afflictions, and can give rise to the paths of three kinds of awakening. As I understand it, this too contains the purport of the four siddhāntas.

Someone asks: Other scriptures speak of binding mindfulness in front. What does this mean?

Answer: Conceptions of form, birth-and-death, and the sphere of afflictions are placed behind the body, while the object of quiescent extinction and nirvāṇa is rightly contemplated in front. It should therefore be explained in four ways. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

Another asks: Why is the object said to be bound at the face?

The answer has four levels. Ordinary beings give rise to desire from a person's face. First they experience bodily pleasure there and afterward throughout the body. The body discharges impurity from nine places, seven of which are openings in the face. Contemplation of impurity is therefore used to counteract desire, and the object is bound at the face. 〔First.〕

The activity of the six consciousnesses gathers at the face, and the mind frequently climbs upward. This signifies that all worthies and sages esteem emptiness and correspond with emptiness; the object is therefore bound at the face. 〔Second.〕

By contemplating the face one can distinguish the six consciousnesses. The object is therefore bound at the face in order to distinguish the six consciousnesses. 〔Third.〕

The body can be divided into six parts, of which the head and face are supreme. This signifies that among all dharmas the true mark is foremost. Because it is the foremost Dharma, the object is bound at the face. 〔Fourth.〕

III. The Two Wisdoms of the Buddhas: First Praising Real Wisdom, Then the Provisional Gateway

In the dual praise of the two wisdoms, real wisdom is praised first and provisional wisdom afterward. Real wisdom is the wisdom of the buddhas. The passage does not concern the three kinds of provisional and real used in transforming others, which is why it particularly speaks of the buddhas. It reveals the real of the buddhas' own practice and therefore calls it wisdom. The substance of this wisdom is the three wisdoms in a single mind.

“Profound and immeasurable” is praise. The Buddha's real wisdom penetrates vertically to the bottom of wisdom in accord with principle and therefore is called profound; horizontally it exhausts the boundary of the Dharma realm and therefore is called immeasurable. Immeasurable and profound mean depth, height, horizontal reach, and breadth. Just as deep roots make branches luxuriant and a distant source makes a stream long, so it is with real wisdom. Provisional wisdom can be understood by analogy. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

“Gateway of wisdom” praises provisional wisdom. It is the skillful means preceding the path in one's own practice and possesses the power of advance, so it is named a gateway. Entering through the gateway, one reaches the path; what is within the path is called real and what precedes it provisional.

“Difficult to understand and difficult to enter” also praises provisional wisdom. Without prior calculation it can know, and its application has no fixed location. The seven kinds of skillful means cannot measure it. At the ten abodes one begins to understand, and at the ten grounds one can be said to enter. Only the initial and final ends are raised, because the stages between cannot each be disclosed. Their difficulty of awakening can be known in the same way. The scripture particularly says that śrāvakas and pratyekabuddhas cannot know because the attachment of the two vehicles is heavier and must receive an additional refutation.

The Dharma body's original intent was to face living beings with the provisional and real of one's own practice, but their capacities had not yet awakened and they fled. It is therefore said that they did not know. When the Avataṃsaka suddenly shone upon them, they were like the deaf, mute, blind, and hard of hearing, and so it is said that they did not know. When they were rebuked in the Vaipulya teaching, they still guarded their thatched hut, and so it is said that they did not know. When the Prajñā teaching caused them to turn and teach others, they did not entertain even a single thought of obtaining one meal, and so it is said that they did not know. Now their great-vehicle capacities awaken: the Buddha emits light and moves the earth, and the paths of buddhas here and elsewhere, present and past, are the same. Yet living beings still doubt, so it is said that they do not know. Sharp-facultied bodhisattvas can understand at each stage, while dull-facultied bodhisattvas resemble the two vehicles and likewise cannot know.

Guangzhai takes the skillful means of the two vehicles as the gateway of wisdom in this scripture. This position must be considered from the two aspects of granting and withdrawing. If it truly is the gateway, they should already have obtained the gateway; why then does the Tathāgata refute them as not knowing? Since they do not know, it cannot be said that they have already obtained the gateway. If it is provisionally granted, theirs is merely the shallowest gateway capable of giving access, while they never recognize the place they are to enter. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

The present explanation is more expansive. First, skillful wisdom itself can serve as a gateway and enable entry into buddha-wisdom. As the Sutra of the Bodhisattva's Jeweled Necklace of the Original Karma says, the two contemplations are a path of skillful means by which one enters the ultimate meaning of the middle path. Each of the three teachings also possesses four gateways, which serve as skillful means for entering the middle path. Of the two contemplations, Guangzhai's explanation takes only one; of the twelve gateways, it takes only one. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

Second, skillful wisdom itself can serve as a gateway enabling entry into skillful wisdom, meaning that each of the three teachings uses its four gateways to enter realization in accordance with that teaching. Third, buddha-wisdom itself can serve as a gateway enabling entry into the Buddha's wisdom. As explained above, the perfect cause is called the Skillful Means chapter; the contemplative wisdom of one's own practice is precisely the gateway. This is the gateway of wisdom praised by the present scripture, and the four gateways of the Perfect Teaching are one such gateway. Fourth, real wisdom itself can serve as a gateway enabling entry into skillful wisdom so that both truths are illuminated. Such an explanation is rich and expansive; how could it be narrow like Guangzhai's confinement to one kind? If the treatises are followed in taking the verbal teachings of the Āgamas as a gateway, the doctrines of the various teachings must be unfolded. This principle can be known by analogy. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

IV. Dual Explanation and Dual Conclusion of the Two Wisdoms of the Buddhas

Guangzhai judges that the passage beginning “Why is this?” opens the section praising Śākyamuni. When the scriptural meaning is examined here, however, it is actually the dual explanation of the two wisdoms of the buddhas.

From the Buddha's former drawing near to innumerable buddhas through his full practice of the path-Dharmas of the buddhas explains the real wisdom of the buddhas. Because the buddhas encountered outwardly were many and the Dharmas received from them were all essential, real wisdom is profound. Because inward cultivation was pure and deep and fully practiced the immeasurable path-Dharmas of the buddhas, real wisdom is immeasurable. Immeasurable explains horizontal breadth, while profound explains vertical height.

Courageous vigor and a name universally heard explain the provisional wisdom of the buddhas. The gateway of wisdom is difficult to understand and enter because only courageous vigor can enter that difficult gateway. Having entered, the reaches of benefit have no boundary and living beings look up to excellent merit, so the name is heard universally. The two phrases can also be divided: courageous vigor enters the Dharma-gateway and explains the depth of provisional wisdom; the universally heard name explains its breadth. The scriptural passage on provisional wisdom does not directly use the words depth and breadth, but this meaning can be established by analogy with real wisdom. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

From “accomplishing the profound” onward is the dual conclusion of the two wisdoms of the buddhas. Corresponding with truth and reaching its finality is called accomplishment; reaching the bottom of the other shore is called profound. This concludes real wisdom. A Dharma taught in accord with the faculties of living beings and meeting them at the appropriate time is called “according to what is appropriate.” Because the seven kinds of skillful means cannot know it, it is called difficult to understand. This concludes provisional wisdom.

If a teaching merely follows the dispositions to which living beings cling, truth is obscured and the teaching is therefore difficult to understand. If it is definitive, its purport becomes manifest and is therefore easy to know. The Summary of the Great Vehicle says that the meaning of a definitive scripture is judged according to its wording, whereas the wording of a nondefinitive scripture is judged according to its meaning. This is precisely the point.

Another explanation takes “accomplishing profound and unprecedented Dharmas” as the conclusion of the provisional and real of one's own practice and “what is taught according to what is appropriate, whose purport is difficult to understand” as the conclusion of the provisional and real used in transforming others. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

V. Śākyamuni's Two Wisdoms: First Recording the Ancient Interpretation, Then Following the Scriptural Sequence

From “Since I became a buddha” onward is the praise of Śākyamuni's provisional and real wisdoms. The ancient interpretation held that Śākyamuni's provisional and real are praised separately. From “since becoming a buddha” onward praises the provisional, and “why is this?” explains the provisional. From “the Tathāgata's knowledge and vision, vast and great” onward praises the real, and “immeasurable and unobstructed” onward explains the real. “The Tathāgata can distinguish in many ways” onward generally concludes the praise of real wisdom.

The ancient interpretation gives three reasons for this earlier and later order. First, the two wisdoms of the buddhas are praised together to reveal that their substances are the same, while Śākyamuni's two wisdoms are praised separately to reveal that their functions differ. Second, to reveal the origin that descends and manifests traces, the buddhas' real is praised first; to reveal the function of the origin, Śākyamuni's provisional is praised first. Third, the buddhas are explained through their own practice, in which the real must be attained first; Śākyamuni is explained through transforming others, in which provisional wisdom first guides beginners. The wording mutually reveals, hides, and manifests its aspects in order to show that the substance is originally complete and cannot be taken from one side alone; preserving one side alone loses the tenet.

The present explanation does not hold this view. The meaning is easily understood by following the scriptural sequence alone; there is no need for circuitous distinctions. Since the ancient interpretation also says that the path of the buddhas is the same, why does it suddenly explain them differently here? It resembles someone skillful in praising filial conduct who nevertheless strikes their own parents. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

Under the present division, the Śākyamuni section likewise has three parts: first a dual praise, second a dual explanation, and third a dual conclusion.

“Since I became a buddha” praises real wisdom. If real wisdom were incomplete, the Buddha path could not have been accomplished. Since the text says that he has become a buddha, once that is accomplished everything is accomplished along with it. This is therefore praise of real wisdom.

From “manifold causes and conditions” onward is praise of provisional wisdom. For more than forty years, the Buddha responded to living beings through the three kinds of provisional and real used in transforming others, which is why it says manifold causes and conditions. Among similes, the lesser vehicle uses the plantain and foam, while the great vehicle uses the gandharva city, reflections in a mirror, and the like. According to the treatises, the lesser vehicle is compared to milk and the great vehicle to clarified essence.

“Extensively expounding” means drawing immeasurable meanings from one Dharma. “Innumerable skillful means” are the seven kinds of skillful means. “Guiding living beings and enabling them to separate from every attachment” has five levels. Teaching the scattered ten wholesome deeds enables beings to leave attachment to the three evil destinations. Teaching the pure ten wholesome deeds enables them to leave attachment to the desire realm. Teaching the Tripiṭaka enables them to leave attachment to the delusions of views and thought. Teaching the bodhisattva Dharma enables them to leave attachment to nirvāṇa. Teaching the Buddha Dharma enables them to leave attachment to love of the Dharma that conforms with the path.

From “Why is this?” onward is the dual explanation of the two wisdoms. The half-phrase “Tathāgata” explains real wisdom: coming from true suchness and the true mark, he accomplishes the Buddha path and is therefore named Tathāgata. This explains that real wisdom has been accomplished. “Skillful means” explains provisional wisdom: because he possesses skillful means, he can teach and transform through manifold causes and conditions.

“Perfection of knowledge and vision” raises provisional and real knowledge and vision together. All-mode wisdom is real knowledge, and the buddha eye is real vision. Wisdom of the varieties of the path is provisional knowledge, and the Dharma eye is provisional vision. All have reached the other shore of events and principle and are therefore called perfections.

“All are already complete” says that both the provisional and real have reached their finality. If this were not a dual explanation, why would the text suddenly say “all are already”? The word “all” makes the meaning of the dual explanation manifest.

From “the Tathāgata's knowledge and vision, vast, great, deep, and far-reaching” onward is the dual conclusion of Śākyamuni's two wisdoms. The Tathāgata's knowledge and vision are as explained above. Vast and great indicate the horizontal, deep and far-reaching the vertical. Real wisdom is originally neither horizontal nor vertical. Here, however, the praise is entrusted to words and its illumination without bounds is therefore explained through the horizontal and vertical, just as a large box has a large lid covering it.

From “immeasurable and unobstructed” onward is the conclusion of provisional wisdom. The provisional in one's own practice is the skillful means preceding the path. It is explained in terms of immeasurable Dharma-gateways, clearly showing that this is the conclusion of provisional wisdom, since real wisdom originally has no manifold differentiations. Guangzhai instead takes this passage as explaining real wisdom. Not only does Guangzhai fail to recognize real wisdom; the masters of the Liang also failed to understand that real wisdom has no manifold differentiations. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

“Immeasurable” refers to the four immeasurables at the buddha ground; “unobstructed” to the four kinds of unobstructed eloquence at the buddha ground. From a single term and a single meaning, the Buddha can turn and expound immeasurable joyful eloquence without exhaustion. Compared with him, bodhisattvas of the Distinct and Shared Teachings are like the soil beneath a fingernail beside the great earth. “Power” means the ten powers; “fearlessness” the four fearlessnesses; “meditation” exhausts the true mark of meditation; “concentration” is the Śūraṃgama concentration; and “samādhi” is the king samādhi. “Entering deeply without boundary” concludes vertical depth; “accomplishing every unprecedented Dharma” concludes horizontal breadth.

VI. Turning from Entrusting to Words toward Severing Words

The ancient interpretation takes the passage beginning “The Tathāgata can distinguish in many ways” as the conclusion of the preceding provisional and real. The present interpretation instead uses it to derive what follows. Because the Buddha is about to stop speaking, he first raises the provisional and real once more as the reason for praising through severing words. The passage has two parts: first raising the reason for praise through severing words, and second indicating the sphere toward which it is directed.

The repeated phrasing expresses earnestness. “The Tathāgata can skillfully distinguish and aptly teach all dharmas” raises provisional wisdom. “His words are gentle and delight the minds of the assembly” raises real wisdom. How can this be known? Earlier, when the buddhas of other lands were seen teaching the sudden Dharma, the scripture said that their voices were pure and emitted gentle sounds. When Śāriputra later understood, he said that he heard the Buddha's gentle voice, profound and exceedingly subtle. On the basis of these two passages before and after, one knows that “gentle voice” raises real wisdom here.

In the preceding praise, why was the real placed first and the provisional afterward, whereas here the provisional is placed first and the real afterward? Earlier the matter was entrusted to words, so provisional wisdom unfolded from real wisdom. Now speech is about to stop, so provisional wisdom must be rolled up and returned to real wisdom.

From “To state the essential” onward, the sphere toward which the severing of words is directed is indicated. One division takes “essential” as referring to real wisdom, because nothing is more essential than the real, and takes “immeasurable, boundless, unprecedented Dharmas” as referring to provisional wisdom. A second division takes “raising the essential” as the point at which indication begins: immeasurable and boundless indicate the provisional, while unprecedented Dharma indicates the real. The Buddha has accomplished both Dharmas through cultivation of the path; how could they be expressed exhaustively? If only one were indicated, the text should not say “all.” Because it points to both the provisional and real, the scriptural meaning is perfectly clear.

VII. Why Is the Single Word “Stop” Still Praise?

From the word “stop” onward is the second part, praise through severing words. Master Yin says that the Buddha stopped speaking in order to produce doubt and a desire to request the Dharma in the assembly. Master Guan says that the real Dharma is difficult to know, so he first suppressed speech in order to startle ordinary expectations.

The present explanation is that this Dharma is profound and quiescent, the path of words is severed, and its substance cannot be expressed. The Buddha therefore stops and praises it. Even if he were to teach it from compassion, hearers might fail to understand and instead damage their wholesome roots. He therefore stops.

From “Why is this?” onward is the explanation of praise through stopping, divided into two levels. First, speaking in terms of the Buddha, he is the supreme person and has accomplished and cultivated the supreme Dharma; it therefore cannot be expressed. Second, his realized profound sphere is inconceivable; it therefore cannot be expressed.

From “the Buddha has accomplished” onward explains that the provisional and real of the supreme person are complete horizontally and cannot be expressed. From “only a buddha together with a buddha” onward explains that the provisional and real of the supreme person are vertically profound and cannot be expressed. Accomplished is contrasted with unaccomplished, and difficult to understand with not difficult to understand; all this expresses accomplishment horizontally. It was attained through cultivating the path and therefore cannot be expressed.

Only a buddha together with a buddha can exhaustively comprehend because those at the initial and intermediate stages, although they attain a portion, have not exhausted its source. They resemble the moon on the fourteenth day, when the function of its light is not yet universal. Only a buddha together with a buddha exhausts its boundary and bottom, like the full moon on the fifteenth day, whose body is entirely full and whose light shines everywhere. This vertical depth too was attained by cultivating the path and therefore cannot be expressed.

From “the true mark of all dharmas” onward is the second reason: the profound sphere is inconceivable and therefore cannot be expressed.

VIII. How Do the Various Masters Distribute the Ten Suchnesses?

Guangzhai says that the first phrase marks the two divisions of provisional and real wisdom. “All dharmas” marks the object of provisional wisdom. The three groups each contain three elements and are not a single Dharma, so they are called all dharmas. Among the three Dharmas, teaching is the clearest. Teaching must correspond with faculties and therefore also implies persons who receive the teaching; this is how one knows that the three threes belong to the provisional.

The “true mark” is the object of real wisdom. Truth is one and not false and is therefore called the true mark. Among the four ones, one principle is raised throughout. Because principle is fundamental, it belongs to the real. The nine phrases between them continue to explain the preceding divisions of provisional and real.

The first five phrases explain the division of the provisional. Mark is what can be grasped and distinguished in the verbal teachings of the three vehicles. Nature is the determined division of the natures of those teachings and cannot be changed. Substance means that the teachings of the three vehicles each possess the eight sounds, clauses, and phrases, while the bodhisattva teaching takes the six perfections as its substance. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕 Power means that the teaching-Dharmas of the three vehicles possess the power to train and guide. Activity means that the teaching-Dharmas of the three vehicles are applied to recipients and perform an activity.

The object of real wisdom is explained extensively without repeating its heading. The real sphere contains four ones, and the one principle is extensively explained in four phrases. Cause means that the sphere can produce real understanding, with the myriad wholesome qualities looking toward the effect to be accomplished. Condition means that the sphere can activate real wisdom. What cause looks toward is named effect; what arises as effect and answers cause is named recompense. The last two phrases give a dual conclusion. The phrase beginning and end concludes the provisional: mark raises the beginning and activity the end. The phrase ultimate equality concludes the real: “ultimate” concludes cause and “equality” concludes recompense.

Masters of the northern region say that the Dharmas of the three vehicles all possess mark, nature, effect, recompense, beginning, and end.

Master Yao says that mark and nature explain wisdom's illumination and application to the three vehicles, through which the sprouts of the three vehicles differ. Their necessary establishment as three is nature; arousing the mind is substance; what the mind can receive is power; what this capacity can accomplish is activity; and the practice performed that brings an effect is cause. Once cause has been distinguished, assistance from outside is condition; the joint accomplishment of cause and condition is effect; and answering the cause is recompense. Mark is the beginning, recompense the end, and their final return to one tenet is ultimate equality. “Such” indicates that these matters are not mistaken.

Master Chang explains only in terms of the Buddha. Mark means that each of the ten powers has its own appearance. Nature means that the faculties of living beings have their respective habitual tendencies, and because what is habituated does not change, it belongs to the sphere of the power concerning faculties. Substance means that because faculties differ, desires also differ and the function of mind has its attachments; it is therefore named substance and belongs to the sphere of the power concerning desires. Power is another name for meditation: supernormal change cannot be activated without concentration, and the mind cannot be calmed and disorder stilled without concentration; power therefore belongs to the sphere of the power of meditation. Activity is karma and belongs to the sphere of the power concerning karma. Cause is the path functioning as cause and reaching nirvāṇa and belongs to the sphere of the power concerning the path that leads everywhere. Condition belongs to the sphere of the power concerning former lives. Effect, in terms of a present cause, is the future effect it brings and belongs to the sphere of the power of the divine eye. Recompense, looking back from a present recompense to a former cause, belongs to the sphere of the power concerning exhaustion of the contaminants. The beginning is mark and the end recompense; taken as a whole, all belong to the sphere of the power of knowing what is and is not possible.

IX. Why Does Zhiyi Not Use the Preceding Interpretations?

The preceding interpretations are not each wholly without an intelligible doctrinal route, but they fail in principle and do not accord with the scripture's wording.

They fail to accord with the wording because the scripture says “all dharmas.” What Dharma is not included? How can the phrase be confined to the three vehicles? They fail in principle because the scripture says “true mark.” Where is the true mark absent? How can it be placed only in cause, effect, and substance?

If the real existed only in the Buddha, the Buddha would possess no provisional at all. If the provisional existed only in the three vehicles, the three vehicles would forever possess no real. If the three vehicles were allocated only the first five suchnesses, the provisional Dharma itself would be incomplete and would contain no real. If the last four phrases belonged only to the Buddha, the Buddha would possess no provisional and the real too would be incomplete. Ordinary beings would not be addressed at all, making the words “all dharmas” useless. If the true mark did not pervade, some Dharma would exist outside the true mark. Because they entail these faults, none of the interpretations is adopted.

Fascicle Thirty-One of the Treatise on the Great Perfection of Wisdom says that every Dharma has nine aspects. First, each has a substance. Second, each has its own Dharma: although eye and ear are both made from the four elements, the eye has the function of seeing while the ear does not; fire takes heat as its own Dharma and cannot moisten. Third, each has power, as fire has the power to burn and water the power to moisten. Fourth, each has a cause. Fifth, each has a condition. Sixth, each has an effect. Seventh, each has a nature. Eighth, each has a limitation. Ninth, each has a skillful means of opening access.

Dharmottara correlates these nine aspects with the ten suchnesses of the Lotus Sutra. Having its own Dharma is activity as such; having a limitation is mark as such; having an effect comprises effect as such and recompense as such; having a skillful means of opening access is the ultimate equality of beginning and end. The remaining names agree and can be known accordingly.

The present explanation first uses one brief phrase to mark the two divisions of provisional and real, then extensively explains their marks in ten phrases. Zhiyi gives four rounds of explanation: first in terms of the ten Dharma realms, second in terms of the buddha Dharma realm, third in terms of opening and gathering, and fourth in terms of stages. Because the scripture says “all dharmas,” he explains in terms of the ten Dharma realms. Because it says “the foremost rare Dharma accomplished by the Buddha,” he explains in terms of the buddha Dharma realm. Because it says “Stop, stop—there is no need to speak; my Dharma is wondrous and difficult to conceive,” he explains in terms of opening and gathering. Because it says “only a buddha together with a buddha can exhaustively comprehend,” he explains in terms of stages.

X. First Round: Each Realm Completely Possesses the Other Nine

The ten Dharma realms are the six destinations and four sages, together making ten Dharmas. Although Dharmas are immeasurable, their number does not go beyond these ten realms; although each realm has many branches, none goes beyond the ten suchnesses.

The hell realm, for example, possesses in its own position its own mark, nature, beginning, and end, and also possesses the mark, nature, beginning, and end of the animal realm, through those of the buddha Dharma realm, without diminution. The Vibhāṣā therefore says that a living being in the hell destination can accomplish the Dharmas of the Heaven of Mastery over Others' Creations. This is an instance of the same kind; the other nine Dharma realms are likewise.

One should know that each realm possesses the other nine and that each has the ten suchnesses. Viewed in their respective present positions, the ten suchnesses of the nine realms are all called provisional. Viewed in the present position of the buddha realm, its ten suchnesses are called real. The one contains the immeasurable and the immeasurable in turn contains the one; this is why they are called inconceivable.

If the six destinations and three sages were viewed alone, five suchnesses could be called provisional; viewed in terms of the buddha realm, four could be called real. Once everything is clearly distinguished item by item in this way, it becomes expressible and revealable. Why then would it be necessary for the Buddha to say “Stop, stop,” refuse to speak, and praise through severing words?

What truly cannot be revealed is the immeasurable contained within the one. Ordinary beings possess it fully, yet remain cut off from truth and confused through their dispositions. The two vehicles possess it fully, yet abandon the other Dharmas and seek only liberation. Bodhisattvas possess it fully, yet their illumination remains incomplete and is called an inability to understand clearly. The Tathāgata comprehends it horizontally and vertically in complete fullness; he alone understands it, while others cannot see it. It therefore cannot be revealed, and the Buddha stops speaking. This is the purport. The Profound Meaning explains the matter in detail; it is not fully recorded here. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

XI. Second Round: The Ten Suchnesses of the Buddha Dharma Realm and the Great Cart

In the explanation in terms of the buddha Dharma realm, each of the ten suchnesses is established through a double negation.

The buddha realm is not mark and is not without mark, yet is provisionally named mark as such; this refers to the conditioning cause of the myriad wholesome qualities. Later, the scripture therefore says that the great cart is adorned with many jewels. The buddha realm is not nature and is not without nature, yet is provisionally named nature as such; this refers to wisdom as the revealing cause. Later, the scripture therefore says that there is a great white ox. The buddha realm is not substance and is not without substance, yet is provisionally named substance as such; this refers to the true mark as direct cause. Later, the scripture therefore says that the body of the cart is high and broad.

The buddha realm is not power and is not without power, yet is provisionally named power as such; this refers to the power of the mind of awakening, roots of compassion and wholesome qualities, and so forth. Later, the scripture therefore says that a canopy is spread over the cart. The buddha realm is not activity and is not without activity, yet is provisionally named activity as such; this refers to the path operating spontaneously without exertion. Later, the scripture therefore says that the cart moves swiftly like the wind.

The buddha realm is not cause and is not without cause, yet is provisionally named cause as such; this refers to the forty-one stages. Later, the scripture therefore says that they ride jeweled vehicles and travel in the four directions. The buddha realm is not condition and is not without condition, yet is provisionally named condition as such; this refers to every aid to the path of awakening. Later, the scripture therefore says that many servants guard and attend them.

The buddha realm is not effect and is not without effect, yet is provisionally named effect as such; this refers to the brilliance of wondrous awakening accomplished through the perfect cause. Later, the scripture therefore says that they proceed directly to the place of awakening. The buddha realm is not recompense and is not without recompense, yet is provisionally named recompense as such; this refers to great parinirvāṇa. Later, the scripture therefore says that they obtain immeasurable, uncontaminated, pure effects and recompenses.

The buddha effect is not beginning and is not end, yet beginning and end are provisionally spoken of. The beginning is the mark of buddhahood and the end the recompense of buddhahood; this is the provisional of one's own practice. The buddha realm is not equality and is not inequality, yet ultimate equality is provisionally spoken of, pointing to the true mark. The heading therefore speaks of the true mark; this is the real of one's own practice.

Because the real is provisional, beginning and end are spoken of; because the provisional is real, equality is spoken of. This is the Tathāgata's provisional and real in his own practice, the most unsurpassed. From unsurpassed mark through unsurpassed recompense, in horizontal breadth and vertical depth, there is nothing above it. The heading therefore says “the true mark of all dharmas.” By analogy it should also say the real nature, real substance, real power, through real ultimate equality of all dharmas. Because the wording is concise, raising one covers the rest.

The Tathāgata illuminates everywhere horizontally and vertically and understands completely, like viewing a fruit in his palm. Ordinary beings, however, resemble people blind in both eyes; the two vehicles resemble someone with an obstruction in one eye; and bodhisattvas resemble those looking at things at night, dim and indistinct. It therefore cannot be revealed, and the Buddha says “Stop, stop” and does not speak. This is the purport.

XII. Third Round on Opening and Gathering, and Fourth Round on Stages

In the explanation through opening and gathering, the ten realms and ten suchnesses contemplated by the Buddha's mind are all unsurpassed marks through unsurpassed effects and recompenses. Gathered together, they form only the one buddha Dharma realm, like the ocean receiving ten thousand streams or a thousand carts following one track. This is the provisional and real of one's own practice.

In accord with others' intentions, however, the nine Dharma realms are opened, together with the marks, natures, and so forth of each realm. This is the provisional and real used in transforming others. Although transforming others contains the real, it is gathered under the provisional; although one's own practice contains the provisional, it is gathered under the real. In accord with others there is opening, and in accord with self there is gathering; illumination extends everywhere horizontally and vertically, and opening and gathering are free.

Although the immeasurable is opened, the immeasurable remains one. Although it is gathered as one, the one remains immeasurable. Although immeasurable and one are spoken of, it is neither one nor immeasurable. Although it is neither one nor immeasurable, it is still one and still immeasurable. Only a buddha together with a buddha can exhaustively comprehend. Ordinary beings slander it and do not believe; the two vehicles are confused and refuse it; and bodhisattvas too see unclearly, as though a post or dust stood before them. Because of this meaning, the Buddha stops speaking. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

In the explanation by stages, all living beings innately possess the true mark. This is the appearance of the tathāgata-garbha and is called mark as such. The wisdom of innate virtue, the emptiness of ultimate meaning, is called nature as such. The principle of the Dharma-nature of the middle path is called substance as such. These three together form the three virtues, extend through the ten Dharma realms, and are possessed at every stage.

When the three virtues are studied and cultivated and one enters the ten faiths, they are named power as such and activity as such. Entering the forty-one grounds, they are named cause as such and condition as such. Reaching the buddha ground, they are named effect as such and recompense as such. The first three are named the beginning and the following three groups the end. Since the beginning and end alike are the three virtues, they are called ultimately equal.

At the initial stage, the three virtues extend through evil and good, worthies and sages, the lesser and great, the beginning and culmination. Although present in evil, they do not sink; although present in good, they do not rise. Although present in worthies, they do not become lower; although present in sages, they do not become higher. Although present in the lesser, they do not become narrow; although present in the great, they do not become broad. Although present at the beginning, they are not newly existent; although present at the culmination, they are not old. They are therefore inconceivable and inexpressible, and the Buddha says “Stop, stop” and does not speak.

XIII. Ultimate Equality and the Inconceivable

The ultimate equality of the three virtues can be explained further. Although the natures and marks of the ten realms have manifold differences in provisional and real and in opening and gathering, when they are contemplated as they really are through great impartial wisdom, all are ultimately equal.

When one is confused about this sphere, the natures and marks of the six realms appear and are called the worldly truth. When one understands this sphere, the natures and marks of the two vehicles appear and are called the true truth. When one comprehends that it is neither confusion nor understanding, the natures and marks of bodhisattvas and the buddha realm appear and are called the middle path and truth of ultimate meaning.

When the conventional truth is contemplated impartially with this wisdom, it is no longer confusion. When the true truth is contemplated impartially, it is no longer understanding. It is neither understanding nor confusion; by doubly negating confusion and understanding, it is called simply impartiality. When the provisional and real are both illumined, the provisional is precisely the real and the real precisely the provisional. Though two, they are nondual and are also called ultimately equal.

Further, the nondual sphere of provisional and real is not a sphere that the seven kinds of skillful means can impartially contemplate with nondual wisdom. Only the buddhas can impartially contemplate the nondual sphere with nondual wisdom. It is therefore called ultimately equal.

Further, because great-vehicle capacities awaken today, the natures and marks of the nine realms are no longer taught separately. The text directly says that all natures and marks entirely enter the natures and marks of the buddha realm. The former teachings did not say this, and the assembly therefore thought that the former and present teachings were unequal. Once it is taught in this way today, they know that past and present have always been equal. It is therefore called ultimate equality.

The first explanation establishes equality through confusion and understanding, the next through persons, and the last through teachings. The meaning is originally extensive, but the recorder was unable to record every detail.

When the inconceivable is explained through surpassing words and thought, Fascicle Seventy-Nine of the Treatise on the Great Perfection of Wisdom says that inconceivable means incapable of fixed determination. It surpasses every mind and mental factor and every path of language; one cannot travel to it or reach it, and it is therefore called inconceivable.

When the inconceivable is explained through simile, Fascicle Fourteen of the Treatise on the Great Perfection of Wisdom says that one cannot enter the path of equality by destroying form. Only by contemplating form as nondifferent can one enter the great vehicle equally. It is like light and darkness existing together: merely because they are not seen together, people say they differ. To understand the meaning, one can observe moonlight. Again, when the sun rises, darkness has not gone to the ten directions. Darkness was always present and has nowhere to return, and light likewise unites with darkness. Birth-and-death unites with the path; the path is precisely birth-and-death. The Buddha has exhausted what should be exhausted and ferried across those who should be ferried across. All this is inconceivable. Scriptures and treatises contain many examples of the same kind.

When the inconceivable is explained through events, the Āgamas speak of four kinds: living beings, the world, dragons, and buddhas. From where do living beings come and where do they go? Why are they born and why do they die? Does the world have a boundary or no boundary? Can it be ended or not ended? Who among devas, dragons, humans, and spirits made it?

The Āgamas also say that a man beside Kuṇṭhika Pond in Rājagṛha was reflecting on whether the world has or lacks a boundary when he saw an entire fourfold army enter the pore of a lotus fiber. Startled, he wondered whether he had gone mad, since no such strange event should exist in the world. He asked the Buddha, who said that he was not mad: asuras pursued by devas had been defeated and hidden inside the lotus pore. Reflecting on such worldly questions is not the path to nirvāṇa and has no benefit in meaning, Dharma, or brahma conduct. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

Does rain from a dragon emerge from its mouth, ears, eyes, nose, or tongue? It does not actually emerge from any of these places, but solely from one thought of the dragon. A wholesome or unwholesome thought can both produce rain because its former practice has given it this power in the present life. A deva named Great Power in the flank of Mount Sumeru can also produce rain.

Another scripture says that each of the five destinations has one inconceivable feature. The bodies of beings in hell can be severed and then join again; animals can fly; hungry ghosts can transform a small amount into much; humans can make fire burn fuel; and devas spontaneously obtain their recompenses. These are inconceivable events belonging to the Dharma of recompense. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕 This explains the inconceivable only through conditioned events; how much more must the profound sphere be inconceivable?

XIV. How Do the Twenty-One Lines of Verse Restate the Prose?

The verse has twenty-one lines and divides into two parts. The first seventeen and a half lines restate the prose; the final three and a half briefly open the three to reveal the one, stirring former attachments and giving rise to doubt. The first seventeen and a half lines in turn have two parts: four lines restate the praise entrusted to words, and thirteen and a half restate the praise through severing words. Verse and prose treat one another's material extensively or briefly so that the meaning becomes easy to reveal. The prose separately praises the provisional and real of the buddhas and Śākyamuni, showing that conditions for teaching and transforming differ; the verse praises the two buddhas together, showing that the principle of their two wisdoms is the same.

The four lines praising through entrusted words again divide into two. The first two lines together restate the two wisdoms of the two buddhas, and the next two together restate the explanation and conclusion of their praise. The first two lines themselves have two levels. The phrase “Heroes of the World” restates the wisdom of the buddhas, while “cannot be measured” restates “profound and immeasurable”; this restates the real wisdom of the buddhas. The following three phrases restate their provisional wisdom.

This differs from the prose in three ways. First, the prose raises the persons and also labels the Dharma, saying “the wisdom of the buddhas”; the verse raises only the persons, using their epithet to praise the Dharma and saying “Heroes of the World.” Second, the prose praises separately while the verse praises together. The Dharma has distinctions and is therefore treated separately; persons can gather the whole and are therefore treated together. Third, the prose says that none of the two vehicles know, while the verse says that no class of living beings knows.

The one line beginning “the Buddha's powers” restates Śākyamuni's two wisdoms. “Buddha” restates “since I became a buddha” and directly praises real wisdom. Powers, fearlessnesses, and other merits restate provisional wisdom. “Other Dharmas” refers to the provisional used in transforming others and is an additional aid to real wisdom, directly restating the preceding manifold causes and conditions. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

The two lines beginning “Originally, following innumerable buddhas” together restate the purport of the explanation and conclusion of the praise of the two buddhas. “Originally, following innumerable buddhas” and “fully practicing the various paths” restate the buddhas' former drawing near hundreds of thousands of buddhas and fully practicing the path-Dharmas. “Profound and subtle Dharma” restates real wisdom's accomplishment of profound and unprecedented Dharma. “Difficult to see and difficult to understand” restates the difficult-to-understand purport of provisional wisdom. “For immeasurable koṭis of eons, having practiced these paths” restates that all the perfections of Śākyamuni's knowledge and vision were complete; the first two phrases raise the complete cause. “At the place of awakening, he accomplished the effect” raises the complete effect. “I have entirely known and seen” restates the vastness of the Tathāgata's knowledge and vision and concludes Śākyamuni's two wisdoms.

Another division uses four verses to restate the provisional and real of the two buddhas together, then distinguishes six items. First, the phrase “Heroes of the World” generally restates the two wisdoms of the two buddhas. Second, the three phrases beginning “devas and humans” restate the exclusion of persons. Third, the line beginning “the Buddha's powers” restates Śākyamuni's provisional and real. Fourth, the line beginning “Originally, following” restates the provisional and real of the buddhas. Fifth, the half-line beginning “for immeasurable” restates the preceding causal practice. Sixth, the two phrases beginning “at the place of awakening he accomplished” restate the effect attained.

From “such great effects and recompenses” onward, thirteen and a half lines restate the praise through severing words and divide into five parts. First, the opening half-line, “such great effects and recompenses,” restates the inconceivable sphere. It raises only the beginning, and the rest and middle can be known by the meaning. The word “meaning” also restates ultimate equality. “Great” and “manifold” have been explained in the Profound Meaning.

Second, the half-line beginning “I and the buddhas of the ten directions” retrospectively restates “to state the essential, the Buddha has accomplished all.” Third, the half-line beginning “cannot be revealed” retrospectively restates “Stop, there is no need to speak again.” The true mark has no fixed location and therefore cannot be revealed; it is not on the path of language and therefore words are quiescently extinct.

Fourth, the passage beginning “the other classes of living beings” restates the persons unable to know. The prose says that no one can know and the Buddha therefore stops without speaking; the verse spends ten and a half lines listing the persons who do not know, dividing them into eight classes. First, half a verse generally excludes those unable to enter, meaning the seven kinds of skillful means. Second, the two phrases beginning “except those” select those who can enter, meaning the ten faiths of the Perfect Teaching; it speaks of those whose power of faith is firm. The prose raises the ultimate Buddha as knowing, while the verse raises the initial stage of faith as able to know; the two mutually raise different ends.

Third, the line and a half beginning “disciples of the buddhas” excludes the two vehicles as not knowing. Fourth, the line beginning “even if the world were filled” raises Śāriputra as not knowing. Fifth, the line and a half beginning “even if the ten directions were filled” raises the great disciples as not knowing. Sixth, the two lines beginning “pratyekabuddhas” raise pratyekabuddhas as not knowing. Seventh, the two and a half lines beginning “those newly arousing the intent” raise bodhisattvas who have aroused the mind as unable to enter. The expression “arousing the mind” has a broad meaning. It can refer to bodhisattvas who practice the six perfections for three great asaṃkhya eons without yet severing delusion. Or the preceding classes of devas and humans can include those practicing the six perfections, while “arousing the mind” is separately correlated with arousal in the Shared, Distinct, and other teachings. Eighth, the line beginning “nonretrogressing bodhisattvas” excludes even nonretrogressing bodhisattvas as unable to know. Those nonretrogressing in the Shared Teaching have severed delusions within the realms but still do not know the distinct principle; before the grounds, those in the Distinct Teaching likewise possess nonretrogression in realization, practice, and so forth but still cannot know.

Fifth, the one and a half lines beginning “again he addressed Śāriputra” and “uncontaminated” restate the sphere of the true mark, the difficult-to-understand Dharma known only by buddhas. “Uncontaminated and inconceivable” restates the concluding essential point and raises the sphere of provisional and real toward which stopping speech is directed. “Profound and subtle Dharma” restates the foremost, rare, difficult-to-understand Dharma. The three phrases beginning “I have now fully attained” restate that only a buddha together with a buddha can exhaustively comprehend. The path practiced by the buddhas is the same and has likewise been brought to finality by all; the text therefore says, “Only I know this mark, and the buddhas of the ten directions do so as well.”

XV. Four Phrases Return to the Four Rounds; Three and a Half Lines Briefly Open and Reveal

The inconceivable can be explained through the wish-fulfilling jewel, which in itself possesses not a single externally measurable thing yet can rain down many treasures. The true mark does not arise yet can give rise to prajñā.

The line and a half on “uncontaminated and inconceivable” can serve as the basis from which the preceding four explanations arise. The half-phrase “uncontaminated” is the basis for explanation through the ten Dharma realms: the ten realms and ten suchnesses encompass the principle-nature of ordinary and sage without omission and encompass the three truths and the provisional and real wisdoms without omission. “Inconceivable” is the basis for explanation through opening and gathering: the provisional is real and the real is provisional, and this is therefore inconceivable. “Profound and subtle Dharma” is the basis for explanation through the buddha Dharma realm. “Only I know this mark” is the basis for explanation through stages. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

From “Śāriputra, you should know that the words of the buddhas do not differ” onward is the brief opening of the three to reveal the one, which also stirs former attachments and gives rise to doubt. The opening and revealing divides into two parts: first the buddhas reveal the real, then Śākyamuni opens the three. Each side clarifies one aspect and they mutually reveal one another.

“The words of the buddhas do not differ” means that the path by which the buddhas teach and transform is the same. The following two phrases exhort living beings to give rise to faith, while the next two formally reveal the real: after a long time, the Buddha will now finally teach reality. These words stir the assembly's former attachments and produce their present doubt. They even wonder whether a demon has transformed into the Buddha before them, precisely because they hear these words. Since the Buddha exhorts them to faith according to reality, why do they instead doubt? The Buddha first exhorts them because he wishes to prevent anyone from allowing doubt to become slander.

From “he addressed the śrāvaka assembly” onward, Śākyamuni opens the three in three parts. The first line formally opens the three. Because he is about to reveal that the two vehicles are not ultimate, the verse says “those who have reached nirvāṇa.”

Another explanation takes “I enabled them to leave the bonds of suffering and reach nirvāṇa” as referring to the bodhisattva vehicle that practices the six perfections. Practice of the six perfections can free one from the bonds of the four evil destinations but cannot immediately enter extinction; only after three great asaṃkhya eons and one hundred eons does one attain nirvāṇa. “Reach” indicates that the distance is long but one finally arrives. Practice of the six perfections first ferries others across, and the text therefore says “I enabled them to leave the bonds of suffering”; afterward they attain the uncontaminated, and it therefore says “reach nirvāṇa.” From this one knows that the six-perfection vehicle is intended.

The number also supports this reading: the next phrase says that the Buddha reveals the teaching of the three vehicles through the power of skillful means. If the six-perfection vehicle were not included here, from where would the third vehicle be established? The two vehicles should not be counted twice and called three.

The following half-line formally rebukes all three vehicles as false, and the final two phrases explain the purpose for establishing them. The Buddha guides provisionally so that living beings leave manifold suffering. The three vehicles therefore are not the ultimate real, but only gateways of skillful means.

XVI. What Does the Assembly Doubt, and How Does Śāriputra Request?

From “At that time the great assembly” onward, the doubt is expressed and the Buddha is asked to decide. Having heard that the three vehicles are skillful means and the One Vehicle real, the assembly's former attachments are stirred and doubts consequently arise. The passage has two parts: narration of the doubt and the formal request.

The narration of the doubt again has two levels: first the compiler narrates, then the assembly's doubt is formally stated. The compiler first describes the doubt of the twelve hundred arhats and then that of the fourfold assembly. Since the preceding passage rebukes all three vehicles as skillful means, why are only the two vehicles raised here? Because their attachment is heavier and their doubt deeper, they are raised particularly. In the verses expressing doubt, the scripture explicitly says that eighty thousand bodhisattvas seeking the Buddha path likewise all doubt. From this one knows that all three vehicles doubt, though the two vehicles are raised first.

From “each had this thought” onward is the formal arising of doubt, again divided into two kinds: first doubt concerning the Buddha's provisional and real wisdoms, and second doubt concerning one's own attainment.

“Why does he so earnestly praise skillful means?” generally questions the provisional and real wisdoms. “The Dharma attained by the Buddha is profound” questions real wisdom. “What he teaches has a purport difficult to know” questions provisional wisdom. The assembly doubts because it has heard that the words of the buddhas do not differ and that the real will finally be taught. The Buddha formerly taught that the wisdom attained in the three vehicles was the same, differing only in whether habitual tendencies had or had not been exhausted. Now he suddenly praises the Tathāgata's two wisdoms as beyond their reach. They therefore doubt the Buddha's two wisdoms.

From “the Buddha taught one meaning of liberation, and we too have attained this Dharma” onward, they question their own attainment. The noble paths of the three vehicles are truly the essential means of leaving; having practiced according to that principle, they have already reached nirvāṇa. Now the Buddha suddenly says these paths are all skillful means. They do not know which is real and therefore say they do not understand where this meaning tends. This doubt arises directly from the preceding rebuke of the three vehicles as skillful means.

From Śāriputra's formal request onward, there are three requests and two refusals. If the one stopping in the preceding praise through severing words is counted as well, there are three refusals in all.

Masters Yao and Long say that the first refusal is because the principle is profound and difficult to understand, while the first request seeks resolution for oneself and others. The second refusal is because the assembly might be startled, doubt, and disbelieve, while the second request says that the assembly has long planted wholesome roots and must be able to understand. The third refusal is because some will certainly slander and fall into evil destinations, while the third request is because people of sharp faculties can obtain benefit.

The present master gives another explanation. The Buddha knew in advance that the benefits obtained through the three rounds of teaching would not arise simultaneously and would differ in their earlier and later timing. He therefore suppressed the teaching three times while awaiting Śāriputra's three requests.

The first request itself has prose and verse. The prose divides into expressing doubt and expressing the request. Expressing doubt concerns the two wisdoms; expressing the request includes Śāriputra's request for himself and his request on behalf of the assembly.

The verse has eleven lines and divides into six parts. First, the opening two phrases restate the doubt concerning real wisdom. Second, the three lines beginning “You yourself say you have attained” restate doubt concerning provisional wisdom. Third, the three lines beginning “the uncontaminated arhats” say that the three vehicles and fourfold assembly all doubt. The first phrase speaks of arhats, the next two lines of pratyekabuddhas, while “and those seeking nirvāṇa” between them speaks of six-perfection bodhisattvas. How can this be known? Earlier the text said “those who have reached nirvāṇa,” and here it again uses the word “and.” Such bodhisattvas seek nirvāṇa for themselves and also benefit others through nirvāṇa, unlike the two vehicles; this clearly speaks of bodhisattvas.

Fourth, the line and a half beginning “among the śrāvaka assembly” describe Śāriputra's own doubt. Fifth, the line beginning “born from the Buddha's mouth” describes the doubt of children of the Buddha. Sixth, the two lines beginning “devas and dragons” generally describe the assembly's shared doubt and shared request.

The verse and prose can be inferred from one another according to their meaning. If some verse phrases do not restate the prose, they present material additional to it. Where a point is not essential to the doctrine, the recorder could not use burdensome wording to divide every phrase and therefore abbreviates.

From “the Buddha addressed Śāriputra” onward are the two refusals after the request. At the Buddha's first refusal, Śāriputra turns the doubt into his second request; the Buddha then refuses a second time. All this is plainly visible in the scriptural text. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

Fascicle Three, Lower, of the Words and Phrases of the Sutra of the Lotus Blossom of the Wondrous Dharma ends.

方便品 · 廣開三顯一(十義料揀)Skillful Means · Extensively Opening the Three to Reveal the One: Tenfold Analysis

全文五層 →Full five layers →
白話Vernacular

一、三周與十項辨析

從世尊告訴舍利弗,說他既已殷勤三請,佛豈能不說以下,經文用七品半的篇幅,廣泛說明開三乘而顯一乘。這一大段分成三周:第一,為上根人作直接的法說;第二,為中根人作譬喻說;第三,為下根人說宿世因緣。這三周又名理、事、行,正如《大品》也為三種根機說法。〔云云:以下從略〕

現在以十項義理逐一辨析:第一,三周各有通義與別義;第二,聲聞究竟有或無;第三,迷惑有厚有薄;第四,根性能轉或不能轉;第五,各種根機有悟或不悟;第六,有沒有領解;第七,得到或沒有得到授記;第八,悟解有淺有深;第九,權行與實行所得的利益;第十,悟入須不須等待相應時機。

二、第一項:三周各有通義與別義

第一周特別名為法說,這是它的別義;若從通義看,三種說法都已具備。佛說優曇花只是久久才出現一次,便是譬喻說;佛又說,倘若祂遇到眾生,便全都教以佛道,便是因緣說。

第二周特別名為譬喻說,若從通義看,也具足三種說法。佛先說自己先前不曾明言,一切其實都是為了教導菩薩;接著又在合說譬喻時,對一佛乘分別說三,這便是法說。佛說自己在二萬億佛之處常常教化舍利弗,則是因緣說。若把這一句仍判歸法說,也可以改取長者聽見孩子在火宅,受驚後進入火宅,才設法救濟;這段敘明先前關係與後來教導的由來,便是因緣說。

第三周特別名為宿世因緣說,從通義看也具足三種說法。說涅槃的時候已到,大眾也已清淨,應當使他們進入佛慧,這是法說;說有一位導師,這是譬喻說。

既然每一周都通具三種說法,為什麼仍分成三周?命名時,是取其中較多、較正的一面,不取較略、較旁的一面;目的是不使名稱彼此混濫,各自依一項主要意義而立名。

有人問:三周本來是為三種根機而說;若每一周又都通具三種說法,那麼一周之內是否也應具足三種根機?

回答是:法說所對的不只三等根機中的上根人,其中也有中、下根人;只是依主要的一面、略去旁出的部分,所以說法說主要逗合上根人。其餘兩周也同樣如此。

三、第二項:有聲聞與無聲聞

光宅斷定實有真正修行而證果的聲聞。他的理由是:如果沒有實行聲聞,權巧示現的聲聞又要對應誰?開善則解作沒有實行聲聞,並引《勝鬘》所說三乘初發業者不愚昧於法,認為尚在外凡時已知道一乘,二乘人豈會仍然執著小果?所以,經中雖說有聲聞,也都只是權巧示現。這兩家各執一端,與經文及義理不能相應。

若斷定實有聲聞,經文為何又說沒有聲聞弟子,只有教導菩薩?若斷定全無聲聞,又是誰進入化城?既沒有三乘可以會歸,權巧又要引導誰?若回答實行聲聞是由權巧聲聞引導,那麼也應實有一位三藏佛,再由權巧示現的三藏佛引導。若說實無這一種佛、只有權佛,為何又不許只有權聲聞而沒有實行聲聞?

這兩例其實不能等同。真正斷除界內惑的人,可以依其實證而名為實行聲聞,權者也可以應現為聲聞來接引他。可是何處另有一位只斷界內惑的佛,再讓權佛應現為同類去接引那位佛?

現在所說,是不能偏執有或無。若從長者真實智慧的一面去看,便沒有一個本性固定的傭作人;若就窮子當時的根性與自我認定去看,他便以為自己只是受雇作工的人。

《法華論》列出四種聲聞:第一是決定聲聞,第二是增上慢聲聞,第三是退失大心的聲聞,第四是應化聲聞。前兩種根機尚未成熟,不為他們授記;後兩種則得到授記。若依本經來看,應當說有五種聲聞。

第一,久遠以來常習小乘,今世修道已經成熟,聽聞小教而證果;這相當於《論》的決定聲聞。

第二,本來是菩薩,歷劫修道,中途疲厭生死,退失大心而取小果。《大品》稱這一類為別異善根。佛暫且成全他們的小道,為他們說小教;他們依教斷結而取果。由於退失大心不久,修習小道的時間較近,照理應較容易悟入;這相當於《論》的退菩提聲聞。

第三,因為有前兩種人,諸佛、菩薩便在內隱藏大德,在外示現小乘行迹,成就並引接他們,使他們進入大道;這相當於《論》的應化聲聞。

第四,有人看見實行、權行兩種聲聞都能出離生死,便欣樂涅槃,修習戒、定、慧。他略有觀照智慧,尚未進入相似之位,只有微薄所得,卻以為自己已經證果;這便是未得自謂已得、未證自謂已證,相當於《論》的增上慢聲聞。

第五,是大乘聲聞,以佛道之聲使一切眾生得聞。

若從決定、退菩提兩種來看,確有聲聞。若從大乘道理看,並沒有永遠住在灰斷與化城而不再前進的人,終究都要歸向寶所。實行聲聞既是如此,便不能另外執定一種永遠與之相對的權聲聞,所以又可說無聲聞。至於增上慢者,他尚未入位,既不是實行聲聞,也不是應化聲聞,所以也不能列入權者。明白這些分際,有與無自然清楚,何必苦苦爭論?

再者,只就大乘聲聞本身,也可以說有或無。若是權巧示作應化,在外顯現小乘行迹、在內隱藏大德,從外相看便說沒有大乘聲聞;若從他自身的修行顯露本地來看,便說有大乘聲聞。

現在開三顯一的正意,是要使決定聲聞與退大聲聞成為大乘聲聞。他們自己的修行既已成立,便也能隨眾生之聲而應現為聲聞、教化他人。如此便能通達聲聞有與無的兩面。

四、第三項:迷惑有厚有薄

瑤師說,三種根機得果以後,遊觀無生之理。無生之理原是一個,等到他們出觀,所緣的三種教說卻彼此不同。他們拿必定不同的三種教說反疑無生的一理,心想:教既然有三,理怎會只是一個?又拿一理反疑三種教說,心想:理既然只是一個,教怎能有三?於是徘徊在理與教之間,在得與失之間來回不定。

依這一舊解,以一理反疑三教,在義理上有所得;以三教反疑一理,在義理上有所失。上根人多半以理疑教,初聞法說時正合其心,所以當下便悟;下根人多半以教疑理,聽到法說宣明沒有三乘,違逆他原有的計著,所以直到三次聽聞才解;中根人處在兩端之間,聽法說未悟,到譬喻說便明白。

現在認為,這樣解釋三根未必恰當。三種人究竟是在什麼理、什麼教之間徘徊?若徘徊於小乘的理教,便表示疑惑未盡,尚且不能算作斷結的初果人。若徘徊於大乘的理教,大乘與小乘本來分明有別,何曾彼此混濫,以至於必須徘徊?若說他以小疑大、以大疑小,那麼此前尚未斥明方便時,他為何已經預先出入觀察而生起徘徊?既已徘徊,便是早已生疑、原有的執著也已動搖,不是到今日才開始。若先前已經動執生疑,今日一聽開三顯一便應領解,又怎會仍有驚疑?這套解釋進退都沒有根據,所以不採用。

現在說根有利、鈍,全都約大乘根性而論;說迷惑有厚、薄,則約別惑而說。由此形成四句,次序是:第一,惑輕而根利;第二,惑重而根利;第三,惑輕而根鈍;第四,惑重而根鈍。

別惑輕而大乘根性利的人,初次聽聞便悟;惑重而根利的人,要再次聽聞才明白;惑輕而根鈍的人,要到第三次聽聞才決了;第四種惑重根鈍的人,即使聽過三周仍不能悟,只成為與大法結緣的大眾。又可以把最初兩句同判為根利而屬上根;也可以把中間兩句分作中根、下根。〔云云:以下從略〕

還可以約初品無明的三重遮覆初住中道來說。第一次法說時,上根人的三重無明同時斷盡,開啟佛的知見,進入菩薩位而得到菩提授記;中根人斷除兩重無明;下根人斷除一重。

第二次譬喻說時,中根人斷盡第三重無明,開啟佛的知見,進入菩薩位而得到授記;下根人再進一步斷除兩重。第三次聽聞因緣說時,下根人才斷盡三重無明,開啟佛的知見而進入菩薩位。這如同小乘十六心尚未圓滿時,不能名為初果;十六心圓滿,才名為須陀洹。

五、第四項:根性轉與不轉

舊說認為,上根人初聞法說便悟;中根人在此時轉成與上根相同,下根則進成中根。到譬喻說時,中根先前已轉為上根,所以能悟;下根又轉成上根。到因緣說時,下根也已與上根相同,所以立即得悟。

若果真如此,所有下根都已轉成上根,到因緣說時大家同樣是上根,利鈍既然完全均等,為什麼仍稱有人根鈍,必須等待因緣說?若已轉成上根,便應與上根同時悟;若尚未悟而仍叫鈍根,便沒有真正轉根的意義。

譬如舍利弗聽聞一次、目連再次聽聞,兩人同得初果。若因同得初果就說兩人同樣利,便沒有優劣;若仍稱一利一鈍,便不能把所到果位相同說成根性已全然轉同。

眾生的心識並不固定。遇到惡緣,可以由利轉鈍;遇到善緣,也可以由鈍轉利。先世值佛聞法時,有人已由下根、中根轉成上根,所以今世在法說時便悟;有人由下根轉成中根,所以聽譬喻說時得解;也有人仍是下根,沒有轉動,直到三周才明白。這樣解釋轉根,與舊說不同。

這好比用三把刀砍木頭:利刀砍一下,中等的刀砍兩下,鈍刀砍三下。三把刀都能把木頭砍斷,最後斷木之處相同,而一、二、三次所顯的利鈍之名並沒有消失。

有人問:三種根機都進入初住位後,還有利、鈍嗎?

回答是:真實修行的體性顯發後,便沒有高下差等。

又問:若是如此,初住以上再發起隨緣修行,還有優劣嗎?

回答是:同一位中的人不再有勝負;真實修行之體既然圓融,怎會另有差異?

六、第五項:有悟與不悟

經中多處把菩薩判為上根,緣覺判為中根,聲聞判為下根。若菩薩都是上根,是否應當全部在法說中得悟?緣覺是否全在譬喻說中得解?聲聞是否全到因緣說才悟?經文只是概略判出三種根機,至於實際悟解,未必如此機械地分限。

本經只明見聲聞得解,不另見支佛得解,是因支佛雖屬中根,值佛出世時便攝入聲聞眾中,隨自己的根性而悟,所以不另外標出緣覺。舍利弗請法的偈中,把求緣覺者列在比丘、比丘尼之中;由此可知,緣覺也攝在四眾之內。〈法師品〉又同時列出比丘、比丘尼、優婆塞、優婆夷,以及求聲聞、求支佛的人,怎能說沒有緣覺得解?

舊說認為,菩薩概稱上根,並不是人人都利,只是就多數而名上根。他們原本所懷便是求佛,即使曾執著走過三百由旬後便求近果,這種疑執仍容易轉變。依此說,三種根性的菩薩都在法說中得解:上根或在略說時,中根或在廣說之初,下根則與舍利弗同時悟。

現在說,菩薩這個名稱所含很廣,只要發大心便是菩薩,何必全是利根?何況若說菩薩到舍利弗得悟時已所剩很少,甚至初周以前已全部悟入,那麼後來流通分與〈壽量品〉中,為何仍處處有菩薩新得無生法忍、或新發菩提心?

舊說又認為,〈壽量品〉中得悟的人,全都是已得法身後再增進道行、減損生死。現在也不採這一說。經中有六百八十萬億那由他恒河沙人得到無生法忍;這些人是在當時才得到此忍,可知在〈壽量品〉以前尚未都已得法身。因此,菩薩的得悟不能局限在第一周之初。

有人問:菩薩的得悟既可通於全經始終,二乘的得悟也應延至後面。

回答是:三周已經確定父子本具的天性;此後這些人都名為菩薩,即使在後面才悟,也統稱菩薩得悟。

七、第六項:有沒有領解

若三乘同樣得悟,為何經中只見聲聞自述領解,另外兩乘卻沒有?

沒有佛出世時自行覺悟,名為獨覺;聽佛宣說十二因緣而悟,名為緣覺。緣覺既已攝入聲聞眾中而得悟、領解,便不另外列出,整體意旨由此可見。舍利弗、迦葉等都兼具中乘根性,所以聲聞領解也兼攝緣覺,不必另立一篇。四眾中又有發緣覺心的人,實際得悟者不只一人;〈信解品〉所說暗中派遣兩人追趕、捉取並帶回,便表示這一義。

菩薩為何不另作領解?以往聲聞所學的教說,不曾明說他們可以成佛;本經如今開出回歸大乘的道路,聲聞恐怕自己的理解有誤,所以要當佛面前陳述所解。菩薩的情形不同,故不另見領解。這又有三層意思。

第一,菩薩本來便求佛,即使另有執著,所執也較輕,終究仍要取佛果,沒有不得佛果的憂慮。如今聽聞三周,只是端正他的觀照智慧,所以不必另作領解。

第二,菩薩悟入大乘,處處都有經文;二乘作佛,則從這一教說才明白彰顯。為了傳流其中要義,所以略去菩薩領解。胡本或許有相關文字,漢本從略而沒有寫出。

第三,菩薩位行深遠,初學的小菩薩不敢代表大眾作領解。〈壽量品〉說完後,彌勒已總括領解全會所得,從初得無生法忍的人,一直到只剩一生便成佛的人,領解已經具足,還須另外尋求什麼?〔云云:以下從略〕

八、第七項:得到或沒有得到授記

若三乘都同樣領解,為何只見聲聞得授記,不見緣覺、菩薩受記?這也有三層意思。

第一,以往說二乘進入正位後不能再發大心,既不能發心,怎會得到授記?如今二乘已悟大乘,欣求一項明確決定,所以佛為他們授記將來成佛的劫數與國土。菩薩本已發心求佛,修行成熟便自然圓滿,既不急切欣求成佛,也不催促佛授記;而且此前教說處處已有菩薩授記。這是經中恆常宣說的事,傳譯時仍是追取要義,與前面所說相同。〔云云:以下從略〕

第二,菩薩也有各別授記。提婆達多、龍女的經文,難道不是授記或成佛的明證?〈法師品〉又說,求聲聞、求辟支佛、求佛道的各類人,在佛前聽聞《法華經》,佛都為他們授記,將得無上正等正覺。這豈不是三類都得到授記?

第三,二乘以往不曾得到八相成道之記,所以此處特別明記其劫數與國土。菩薩先前已曾得記,所以不再重說。初住可得的淺近授記,不是菩薩所欣求;菩薩所欣求的是圓滿至極、成就妙覺的遠記。〈壽量品〉中,從初發心者直到只剩一生者,妙因由此圓滿、極果頓然圓成;這正是授予法身之記,怎能說菩薩沒有得到授記?

有人問:二乘既由小乘悟入大乘,應當同樣得到法身之記,為何只授八相成道之記?

回答是:八相是應現之記。既得到應現成佛之記,便可知道必有它所依的本;同時也要使眾生聽聞後,共同結成未來得度的因緣,所以先授應記。再者,這些二乘若再聽聞〈壽量品〉,也會減損生死而得到法身之記。

九、第八項:悟解有淺有深

概略地說,三種根機都破除無明、證入初住,所到之位相同。若細細推尋,理解仍有明暗。最初聽法說已進入佛慧,後來再聽譬喻說,理解豈不更加明白?又聽因緣說,理當自行增進;再聽〈壽量品〉,便更加優勝深遠。

這好比同一位聽法的人再次聽聞,所得勝過前一次。又如單衣與複衣各有厚薄,細論之下,便可知道悟解仍有淺深之別。

十、第九項:權行與實行所得的利益

有一種說法認為,只有實行者得到利益;權行者只是為了接引實行者、作為助成教導的伴侶,不必論他自身所得。

現在說並非如此。到〈壽量品〉時,權行、實行二者都得到利益:道行增長得更高,生死損減得更盡,漸漸鄰近圓滿的極處,只餘一生。這怎會不是權者所得的利益?

權者起初作為助伴,共同使實行者根機成熟;後來聽佛宣說極果,自己的道行也更加明白。窮子譬中說,他出入經營所得的利息遍至別國;利息雖在別處,仍是自己所得的利益。實行者所得利益,由權者引導而成;教導眾生的功德也歸於權者自身,所以權者同樣得益。佛以同一音聲演說法義,眾生隨自己的種類各自得解,何必一定要等到〈壽量品〉才說權者有益?〔云云:以下從略〕

經文又表明,自己也想得到這一真實清淨的大法,這便是教導者自身所得的利益。

十一、第十項:待時與不待時

在此前沒有悟入,必須等到《法華經》才悟,名為待時;在《法華經》以前的教說中已經得解,名為不待時。

為何如此?佛有顯明與隱密兩種說法。若就顯明說法而論,《法華經》以前,二乘尚未悟入大道,必須經過五味次第調熟,最後在《法華經》中會歸,所以佛說宣說的時機先前尚未到,如今正是相應時機,應當決定宣說大乘。這便是待時。

若就隱密說法而論,不一定人人都要完整等過五味,到《法華經》才會歸;此前已有從隱密說法悟入的人,所以名為不待時。這是對待時、不待時的大體判分。若縮小到三周之內,也有待時與不待時;就迹、本兩門而論,也有待時與不待時。眾生由此前後悟入,正是這一意思。

有人問:有一種根性,在隱密與顯明兩種時機都沒有得到攝受,是否就永遠錯失時機,不能再悟?

回答是:其他經典或許把這稱為失時,本經卻不如此。此人雖在隱密、顯明兩種時機都未悟,也曾以為自己已入滅度,但他在另一國土仍可聽聞此經。因此,他並非永遠失時,只是在等待另一國土的相應時機。

又問:法會中起身離去的五千人,應當是錯失時機吧?

回答是:這些人應在如來滅度以後,從弘揚此經的人那裡得到利益。

十二、雜料揀一:請法與說法都是普遍的

有人問:舍利弗在第一周為四眾三根請法,到譬喻周時又為中、下根請法,怎能說佛每一周都為三種根機說法?

回答是:這種說法並不妥當。請法是為大眾普遍地請,佛說也是為大眾普遍地說。只是上根智慧敏利,聽法說便悟;中根居於中等,聽譬喻說才悟;下根居於下等,聽到第三周才悟。應當依隨義理理解,怎能只跟著語句表面分割?〔云云:以下從略〕

十三、雜料揀二:法、譬、宿世與三世

有人問:宿世是過去之事;法說與譬喻說是否分別可說是將來之事與現在之事?

回答是:經中沒有這一配當的明文,只能從義理推求而說大致如此。引導三乘歸於一乘,以三乘回望一乘,一乘是將來所歸,故可說是將來;舉眼前之事作譬,譬喻便可說是現在。依後面回望前面,大致可以如問者所說。這仍是義理上的推求,不是把沒有明文的配當改成經文明說。

十四、雜料揀三:障礙與聞法

有人問:舊說以五濁障礙大法,並以前文所說四句辨析。又有人把見惑與無明合在一起作障礙,指《法華論》所說沒有煩惱的人仍有染慢,不知道一乘法身常住,便是此義。至於普通凡夫,雖不執著涅槃,卻不能聞法,那便是只有無明作障礙。

如果如此,三種根機的無明究竟是在三周聞法以後才破,還是在尚未聞法以前便破?若要等到聞法後才破,無明似乎就不是阻礙聞法的障礙;若尚未聞法便能破除無明,又似乎完全沒有障礙。這項義理要怎樣說通?

回答是:這是別人建立的義說,現在只為他作通釋。譬如燈光生起時,黑暗便消滅,不能把燈生與暗滅判定為前後兩個分離時刻。雖然兩者沒有先後,黑暗仍確定是障礙。〔云云:以下從略〕

十五、雜料揀四:知與不知

有人問:《勝鬘》說三乘初發業者不愚昧於法,自己知道將會覺悟。《優婆塞戒經》第十四品說,二乘自己知道將得菩提,只是暫且取得小乘果;第十三品又說,知道此事容易、實行卻難,所以雖知道一乘,仍先取得羅漢果。這兩部經都說二乘能知,本經為何又說三種根機歷經三周以前仍然不知,起初懷疑、後來才悟?這要如何會通?

回答是:本經也說能知。它說,若真正得到羅漢果而不信此法,絕不可能;只有佛滅度後、眼前沒有佛時,此人雖生起自己已入滅度的想法,若再遇到其他佛,仍能明白決了。

這裡共有三層意思:前一段明能知,下一段明不知,最後再會歸於知;不知並不是永遠不知。舍利弗又說,大眾如今都在佛前墮入疑惑,自己不知道這項義理所歸。大通智勝佛時,聲聞也多生疑惑。他們親見佛、親聞法尚且懷疑不知,何況沒有見佛、聞法,怎會忽然全都知道?

若執著兩處文字彼此矛盾,只會增長爭論,對修道有什麼利益?論者可以討論其他事情;至於聲聞成聖後究竟能知或不能知,是唯佛所知的境界,並不是對方所熟悉。現在姑且試作會通。

『初業』有兩種起點。若以久遠以前為初業,這些人曾聽聞大乘,便不愚昧於法;若取他們中途忘失大心,直到今日修學小乘、才開始修念處為初業,那麼他們便仍然不知。如此一來,權者示現初業,內心其實能知;實行者確實才開始這段修學,所以不能知。

又有人說,利根能知,鈍根不能知。依這一說法,還可列成四句:第一,權者示現利根或鈍根,兩者都示現不能知;第二,權者示現利根或鈍根,兩者都示現能知;第三,權者示現利根或鈍根,聽聞便能知,沒有聽聞便不知;第四,權者示現利根或鈍根,兩者都示現既非知、也非不知。

現在不採這一判分,只取權者內心明明白白,久遠以來早已知道;實行者尚未進入大乘,所以確實不知。如此一來,義理自然清楚。〔云云:以下從略〕

十六、雜料揀五:緣覺、獨覺、部行與變化

有人問:緣覺既被說成出現在無佛之世,三周法會中為何仍有緣覺?

回答是,《釋論》分別緣覺與獨覺:獨覺出現在無佛之世,緣覺則發願生在有佛之世。《華嚴》說,菩薩從兜率天下降時放出光明照耀辟支佛;覺察光明的人便捨此身,沒有覺察的人則被移往他方。《大經》以彗星為譬,《中論》則說,支佛出世時佛法已經滅盡,這是獨覺人。

發願生在佛世的人,先前若已得到初果,十四番生死尚未走完時值遇佛,便成為羅漢;若沒有值佛,便成為獨覺。如今他既值佛,便不捨壽,也不被移往他方,因為他本來便發願見佛。先已得到二果、三果的人,也可依此類推。

另有部行緣覺,在無佛之世仍有師徒彼此教導。這裡應分辨兩種情形:佛滅度以後,世間已沒有文字,眾生根性又鈍,所以支佛不說法;這一類不是此處所說的部行。部行者能夠為人說法。

又有變化緣覺,對應適宜看見緣覺身的人,便示現緣覺之身。明白獨覺、願生佛世的緣覺、部行緣覺與變化緣覺各自所指,便可以理解三周座上為何有緣覺。

I. The Three Rounds and the Tenfold Analysis

From the World-Honored One's words to Śāriputra that, since he has now made three earnest requests, how could the Buddha not speak, the scripture uses seven and a half chapters to explain extensively the opening of the three vehicles to reveal the one vehicle. This long passage is divided into three rounds. First is direct Dharma-teaching for those of sharp faculties; second is teaching through simile for those of middling faculties; third is teaching through causes and conditions from former lives for those of dull faculties. These three rounds are also called principle, event, and practice, just as the Large Prajñāpāramitā Sūtra likewise teaches for three kinds of faculty. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

Ten doctrinal points will now be analyzed in sequence. First, each of the three rounds has a common and a specific meaning. Second, śrāvakas ultimately exist or do not exist. Third, delusion can be thick or thin. Fourth, faculties can or cannot be transformed. Fifth, the various faculties awaken or fail to awaken. Sixth, there are or are not expressions of understanding. Seventh, predictions are or are not received. Eighth, awakening and understanding can be shallow or deep. Ninth concerns the benefit attained by provisional and actual practitioners. Tenth concerns whether awakening must wait for the corresponding occasion.

II. First Inquiry: The Common and Specific Meanings of the Three Rounds

The first round is specifically called teaching through Dharma; this is its specific meaning. Viewed from its common meaning, however, all three modes of teaching are already present. When the Buddha says that an udumbara blossom appears only after a very long time, this is teaching through simile. When he says that whenever he encounters living beings he teaches them all through the buddha path, this is teaching through causes and conditions.

The second round is specifically called teaching through simile, but viewed from its common meaning it too possesses all three modes. The Buddha first says that he had not previously stated explicitly that everything was in fact for the sake of teaching bodhisattvas. Then, in correlating the simile with its meaning, he says that the one buddha vehicle was divided and taught as three; this is direct Dharma-teaching. When the Buddha says that he constantly taught and transformed Śāriputra in the presence of two myriads of koṭis of buddhas, this is teaching through causes and conditions. If this sentence is still classified as direct Dharma-teaching, one may instead take the elder hearing that his children were in the burning house, entering it in alarm, and only then devising a way to save them. Because this passage recounts their former relationship and the origin of the later instruction, it is teaching through causes and conditions.

The third round is specifically called teaching through causes and conditions from former lives, but viewed from its common meaning it too possesses all three modes. The statement that the time of nirvāṇa has arrived, that the assembly is purified, and that they should be enabled to enter buddha-wisdom is direct Dharma-teaching. The account of a certain guide is teaching through simile.

Since each round commonly possesses all three modes of teaching, why are three rounds still distinguished? A name is established according to the aspect that is predominant and principal, not the one that is brief and subsidiary. This keeps the names from becoming confused with one another, each being established according to its principal meaning.

Someone asks: The three rounds were originally taught for three kinds of faculty. If each round commonly possesses all three modes of teaching, should a single round also contain all three kinds of faculty?

Answer: The Dharma-teaching does not address only the sharpest among the three grades of faculty. Those of middling and dull faculties are also present. It is only because the principal aspect is followed and the subsidiary omitted that the Dharma-teaching is said principally to correspond to those of sharp faculties. The other two rounds are the same.

III. Second Inquiry: The Existence and Nonexistence of Śrāvakas

Guangzhai definitively asserts that actual śrāvakas who genuinely practice and realize the fruit exist. His reason is that if there were no actual śrāvakas, whom would śrāvakas manifested through provisional means correspond to? Kaishan instead explains that no actual śrāvakas exist. Citing the Śrīmālādevī Sūtra, which says that beginners in the practices of the three vehicles are not ignorant of the Dharma, he argues that they already knew of the one vehicle while still ordinary beings outside the stages. Why, then, would those of the two vehicles still cling to a lesser fruit? Thus, although the scripture says there are śrāvakas, they are all provisional manifestations. Each of these two schools clings to one extreme and fails to accord with the scripture and its meaning.

If the actual existence of śrāvakas is fixed, why does the scripture also say that there are no śrāvaka disciples and that only bodhisattvas are taught? If the complete nonexistence of śrāvakas is fixed, who enters the conjured city? If there are no three vehicles to converge, whom do provisional means guide? Suppose one answers that actual śrāvakas are guided by provisional śrāvakas. There should then likewise be an actual buddha of the Tripiṭaka Teaching who is guided by a provisionally manifested buddha of that teaching. But if one says there is no actual buddha of this kind, only a provisional buddha, why not allow there to be only provisional śrāvakas and no actual ones?

The two examples are not in fact equivalent. A person who genuinely severs delusions within the realms may be called an actual śrāvaka according to that genuine realization, while a provisional figure may manifest as a śrāvaka to guide that person. But where is there another buddha who has severed only delusions within the realms, so that a provisional buddha must manifest as the same kind in order to guide that buddha?

The present explanation is that neither existence nor nonexistence may be maintained one-sidedly. Viewed from the elder's true wisdom, there is no hired laborer with an inherently fixed identity. Viewed from the poor son's faculties and self-understanding at that time, he believes himself to be merely a hired worker.

The Treatise on the Lotus Sutra enumerates four kinds of śrāvaka: first, determinate śrāvakas; second, overweening-pride śrāvakas; third, śrāvakas who lost the great resolve; and fourth, responsive-transformation śrāvakas. The faculties of the first two kinds are not yet mature, and they do not receive predictions. The latter two kinds receive predictions. From the standpoint of the present scripture, however, one should speak of five kinds of śrāvaka.

First, some have long practiced the Lesser Vehicle and mature in the path in the present life, hearing the lesser teaching and realizing its fruit. These correspond to the determinate śrāvakas of the treatise.

Second, some were originally bodhisattvas cultivating the path over many eons, but grew weary of birth-and-death midway, lost the great resolve, and attained a lesser fruit. The Large Prajñāpāramitā Sūtra calls these “distinct wholesome roots.” The Buddha provisionally fulfills their lesser path and teaches them the lesser teaching; following it, they sever the bonds and attain the fruit. Because they lost the great resolve only recently and have practiced the lesser path for a shorter time, they should in principle awaken more easily. These correspond to the treatise's śrāvakas who withdrew from bodhi.

Third, because the preceding two kinds of people exist, buddhas and bodhisattvas inwardly conceal their great virtue and outwardly manifest Lesser Vehicle traces. They bring the first two kinds to maturity and guide them into the great path. These correspond to the responsive-transformation śrāvakas of the treatise.

Fourth, some see that actual and provisional śrāvakas both escape birth-and-death and so delight in nirvāṇa, cultivating precepts, concentration, and wisdom. They possess a small measure of contemplative wisdom but have not entered even the stage of resemblance. With only slight attainment, they suppose that they have realized the fruit. Thus they claim attainment without attaining and realization without realizing. These correspond to the treatise's overweening-pride śrāvakas.

Fifth are Great Vehicle śrāvakas, who cause all living beings to hear the voice of the buddha path.

Viewed from determinate śrāvakas and those who withdrew from bodhi, śrāvakas certainly exist. Viewed from the Great Vehicle principle, however, no one abides forever in the extinction of body and wisdom or in the conjured city without further advance; all ultimately proceed toward the place of treasure. Since this is so for actual śrāvakas, one cannot separately fix an eternally corresponding class of provisional śrāvakas, and therefore one may also say that śrāvakas do not exist. As for those of overweening pride, they have not entered a stage and are neither actual nor responsive-transformation śrāvakas, so they cannot be counted among provisional figures. Once these boundaries are understood, existence and nonexistence are naturally clear. Why argue bitterly?

Moreover, Great Vehicle śrāvakas themselves may be said either to exist or not exist. When provisionally manifested through responsive transformation, they outwardly display Lesser Vehicle traces and inwardly conceal their great virtue; from the external appearance one says there are no Great Vehicle śrāvakas. When their own practice is revealed and their original ground disclosed, one says that Great Vehicle śrāvakas exist.

The principal purport of opening the three to reveal the one here is to transform determinate śrāvakas and those who withdrew from the Great into Great Vehicle śrāvakas. Once their own practice is established, they can respond to the voices of living beings by manifesting as śrāvakas and teaching others. In this way both the existence and nonexistence of śrāvakas become intelligible.

IV. Third Inquiry: Delusion Can Be Thick or Thin

Master Yao says that after the three kinds of faculty attain the fruit, they range contemplatively through the principle of nonarising. The principle of nonarising is one, but when they emerge from contemplation the three teachings they take as objects differ from one another. They use the necessarily different three teachings to cast doubt upon the one principle of nonarising, thinking: if the teachings are three, how can the principle be only one? They also use the one principle to cast doubt upon the three teachings, thinking: if the principle is one, how can the teachings be three? Thus they waver between principle and teaching and remain uncertain between attainment and loss.

According to this old interpretation, using the one principle to question the three teachings contains doctrinal attainment, while using the three teachings to question the one principle contains doctrinal loss. Those of sharp faculties mostly use principle to question the teaching. The first Dharma-teaching accords precisely with their minds, so they awaken at once. Those of dull faculties mostly use the teaching to question the principle. Hearing the Dharma-teaching declare that there are no three vehicles contradicts their former reckoning, so they understand only after hearing all three times. Those of middling faculties stand between the two extremes; they fail to awaken at the Dharma-teaching and understand upon hearing the simile.

The present interpretation holds that this explanation of the three faculties is not necessarily apt. Between what principle and what teaching do these three kinds of people waver? If they waver between the principle and teaching of the Lesser Vehicle, their doubt has not been exhausted and they cannot even be counted as stream-enterers who have severed the bonds. If they waver between the principle and teaching of the Great Vehicle, the Great and Lesser Vehicles are already clearly distinct; when were they ever confused with each other in a way requiring such hesitation? If they use the lesser to question the great and the great to question the lesser, why did they already enter and emerge from contemplation and begin wavering before provisional means had yet been refuted? If they were already wavering, their doubt arose earlier and their former attachments had already been stirred, not merely today. If those attachments had previously been stirred and doubts arisen, they should understand as soon as they hear the opening of the three to reveal the one today. Why would alarm and doubt remain? This interpretation lacks a basis whichever way it turns, so it is not adopted.

The present explanation treats sharp and dull faculties entirely in terms of Great Vehicle faculties and treats thick and thin delusion in terms of distinct delusion. Four propositions therefore arise, in this order: first, thin delusion and sharp faculties; second, thick delusion and sharp faculties; third, thin delusion and dull faculties; fourth, thick delusion and dull faculties.

Those whose distinct delusion is thin and whose Great Vehicle faculties are sharp awaken on the first hearing. Those whose delusion is thick and faculties sharp understand upon a second hearing. Those whose delusion is thin and faculties dull decide the matter only upon the third hearing. Those in the fourth class, with thick delusion and dull faculties, still fail to awaken after the three rounds and only become members of the assembly who form a connection with the great Dharma. Alternatively, the first two propositions can be jointly classified as sharp faculties and included among the superior faculty; or the two middle propositions can be divided between the middling and inferior faculties. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

This can also be explained in terms of three layers of ignorance in the initial grade covering the middle path of the first abode. During the first Dharma-teaching, those of sharp faculties sever all three layers at once, open the Buddha's knowledge and vision, enter the bodhisattva stage, and receive a prediction of bodhi. Those of middling faculties sever two layers of ignorance, while those of dull faculties sever one.

During the second, simile teaching, those of middling faculties exhaust the third layer of ignorance, open the Buddha's knowledge and vision, enter the bodhisattva stage, and receive a prediction. Those of dull faculties advance by severing a second layer. During the third teaching, through causes and conditions from former lives, those of dull faculties finally exhaust all three layers of ignorance, open the Buddha's knowledge and vision, and enter the bodhisattva stage. This is like the sixteen thought-moments of the Lesser Vehicle: before they are complete, one cannot be called a stream-enterer; only when all sixteen have been completed is that stage attained.

V. Fourth Inquiry: Faculties Are or Are Not Transformed

The old interpretation holds that those of sharp faculties awaken when they first hear the Dharma-teaching; those of middling faculties are transformed at that time to become the same as those of sharp faculties, while those of dull faculties advance to middling faculties. During the teaching through simile, those formerly of middling faculties have already become sharp and so can awaken, while those formerly dull are again transformed into sharp. During the teaching through causes and conditions, the formerly dull faculties have also become the same as the sharp and therefore awaken at once.

If this were really so, all those of dull faculties would already have become sharp by the teaching through causes and conditions. Everyone would then equally possess sharp faculties. Since sharpness and dullness would be wholly equal, why would some still be called dull and be required to wait for teaching through causes and conditions? If they have become sharp, they should awaken simultaneously with those of sharp faculties. If they have not awakened and are still called dull, there is no real sense in which their faculties have been transformed.

Śāriputra, for example, hears once and Maudgalyāyana hears again, and both attain the first fruit. If attaining the same first fruit makes them equally sharp, there is no superiority or inferiority. If one is still called sharp and the other dull, arriving at the same fruit cannot mean that their faculties have been transformed into complete equality.

The minds and consciousnesses of living beings are not fixed. Encountering harmful conditions, they can be transformed from sharp to dull; encountering wholesome conditions, from dull to sharp. When they encountered buddhas and heard the Dharma in former lives, some had already transformed their faculties from dull or middling to sharp and therefore awaken at the Dharma-teaching in the present life. Some had transformed from dull to middling and therefore understand upon hearing the simile. Others remain dull and untransformed and understand only upon the third round. This explanation of transformed faculties differs from the old interpretation.

It is like cutting wood with three knives. A sharp knife cuts once, a middling knife twice, and a dull knife three times. All three cut through the wood, and the place where it finally breaks is the same, yet the names sharp and dull, disclosed through one, two, or three strokes, have not disappeared.

Someone asks: Once the three kinds of faculty have all entered the first abode, do sharpness and dullness remain?

Answer: Once the substance of true cultivation becomes manifest, there is no higher or lower gradation.

Another asks: If so, when cultivation responsive to conditions is again undertaken above the first abode, is there superiority or inferiority?

Answer: Among people at the same stage, no victor or loser is established. Since the substance of true cultivation is perfectly integrated, how could there be a separate difference?

VI. Fifth Inquiry: Awakening and Not Awakening

Many scriptural passages classify bodhisattvas as those of sharp faculties, pratyekabuddhas as those of middling faculties, and śrāvakas as those of dull faculties. If all bodhisattvas are sharp, should they all awaken during the Dharma-teaching? Should every pratyekabuddha understand during the simile teaching? Should every śrāvaka awaken only upon the teaching through causes and conditions? The scripture merely gives a broad classification of three faculties; actual awakening and understanding need not be apportioned so mechanically.

The present scripture visibly shows only śrāvakas understanding and does not separately show pratyekabuddhas understanding. This is because, although pratyekabuddhas belong to the middling faculty, when they encounter a buddha in the world they are included among the śrāvaka assembly and awaken according to their own faculties; pratyekabuddhas therefore receive no separate heading. Śāriputra's verse requesting the Dharma lists those seeking pratyekabuddhahood among monks and nuns, showing that pratyekabuddhas are included within the fourfold assembly. The Dharma Teacher chapter likewise lists monks, nuns, laymen, laywomen, and those seeking śrāvakahood, pratyekabuddhahood, or the buddha path. How can it be said that no pratyekabuddhas understand?

The old interpretation holds that bodhisattvas are generally called sharp-facultied, not because every one is sharp but because the name follows the majority. What they originally cherished was the quest for buddhahood. Even if they once clung to the idea that they had traveled three hundred yojanas and could then seek a nearby fruit, this doubtful attachment was still easy to transform. According to this view, bodhisattvas of all three faculties understand during the Dharma-teaching: those of sharp faculties perhaps during the brief teaching, those of middling faculties perhaps at the beginning of the extensive teaching, and those of dull faculties simultaneously with Śāriputra.

The present explanation says that the designation bodhisattva is broad: anyone who arouses the great resolve is a bodhisattva. Why must all have sharp faculties? Moreover, if few bodhisattvas remained by the time Śāriputra awakened—or if all had entered awakening before the first round—why do the later circulation section and Life Span chapter repeatedly show bodhisattvas newly attaining patience regarding the nonarising of dharmas or newly arousing the mind of bodhi?

The old interpretation further holds that everyone who awakens in the Life Span chapter had already attained the Dharma-body and merely advances in the path and diminishes birth-and-death. The present explanation does not adopt this claim either. The scripture says that six hundred and eighty myriads of koṭis of nayutas of persons, numerous as Ganges sands, attained patience regarding the nonarising of dharmas. They attained that patience at that moment, showing that not all possessed the Dharma-body before the Life Span chapter. Bodhisattva awakening therefore cannot be confined to the beginning of the first round.

Someone asks: Since bodhisattva awakening can extend throughout the scripture, the awakening of the two vehicles should also extend into its later portions.

Answer: The three rounds have already established the father and sons' inherent kinship. Thereafter, all these persons are called bodhisattvas, so even if they awaken only later, their awakening is collectively called bodhisattva awakening.

VII. Sixth Inquiry: Expressions of Understanding or Their Absence

If the three vehicles awaken alike, why does the scripture show only śrāvakas stating their understanding, while the other two vehicles do not?

One who awakens independently when no buddha appears is called a solitary awakened one; one who hears a buddha teach the twelve links of dependent arising and awakens is called a condition awakened one. Since condition awakened ones are included among the śrāvaka assembly, awaken, and express their understanding there, they are not separately listed; the general purport is apparent from this. Śāriputra, Kāśyapa, and the others also possess the faculties of the middle vehicle, so śrāvaka expressions of understanding encompass condition awakened ones and no separate chapter is needed. The fourfold assembly also contains people who have aroused the aspiration for condition awakening, and more than one person actually awakens. In the Faith and Understanding chapter, the two persons secretly dispatched to pursue, seize, and bring back the son signify this meaning.

Why do bodhisattvas make no separate expressions of understanding? The teachings previously studied by the śrāvakas never stated explicitly that they could become buddhas. The present scripture now opens the road of return to the Great Vehicle, and the śrāvakas fear that they may have understood it wrongly, so they state their understanding before the Buddha. The bodhisattvas' situation is different and they are therefore given no separate expression. This has three further meanings.

First, bodhisattvas originally sought buddhahood. Even when they have other attachments, those attachments are comparatively light. Ultimately they still take up the buddha-fruit and have no anxiety that it cannot be attained. Hearing the three rounds now merely rectifies their contemplative wisdom, so no separate expression of understanding is required.

Second, scriptural passages in which bodhisattvas awaken to the Great appear throughout, whereas the buddhahood of the two vehicles becomes clearly manifest only with this teaching. To transmit the essential point, bodhisattva expressions of understanding are omitted. A Sanskrit version may contain relevant wording, while the Chinese version abbreviates it and does not record it.

Third, bodhisattva stages and practices are profound and far-reaching, and beginner bodhisattvas do not dare to express understanding on behalf of the assembly. After the Life Span chapter was taught, Maitreya already gathered the attainments of the entire assembly, from those newly attaining patience regarding nonarising to those only one life from buddhahood. Their expression of understanding is complete; what else need be sought? 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

VIII. Seventh Inquiry: Receiving or Not Receiving Predictions

If the three vehicles alike express understanding, why are only śrāvakas seen receiving predictions, with no predictions for pratyekabuddhas or bodhisattvas? This too has three meanings.

First, the earlier teachings said that once those of the two vehicles entered the position of certainty they could no longer arouse the great resolve. If they could not arouse it, how could they receive predictions? Now that they have awakened to the Great Vehicle, they gladly seek a definite assurance, so the Buddha predicts the eons and lands of their future buddhahood. Bodhisattvas have already aroused the resolve and seek buddhahood; when their practice matures, it naturally becomes complete. They neither urgently seek buddhahood nor press the Buddha for predictions, and the earlier teachings already contain predictions for bodhisattvas throughout. This is constantly taught in the scriptures; the transmission again follows the essential point, just as explained above. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

Second, bodhisattvas also receive individual predictions. Are the passages on Devadatta and the dragon girl not clear evidence of prediction or buddhahood? The Dharma Teacher chapter further says that every kind of person seeking śrāvakahood, pratyekabuddhahood, or the buddha path who hears the Lotus Sutra before the Buddha receives a prediction of attaining unsurpassed complete awakening. Does this not show that all three classes receive predictions?

Third, those of the two vehicles had not previously received predictions of attaining the path through the eight marks, so the eons and lands are specifically recorded here. Bodhisattvas received predictions earlier and thus they are not repeated. A shallow and near prediction attainable at the first abode is not what bodhisattvas seek. They seek the distant prediction of perfect culmination and accomplishment of wondrous awakening. In the Life Span chapter, from those newly arousing the mind through those having only one life remaining, the wondrous cause is fulfilled and the ultimate fruit suddenly completed. This is precisely prediction concerning the Dharma-body. How can one say that bodhisattvas receive no predictions?

Someone asks: Since those of the two vehicles awaken from the Lesser to the Great Vehicle, they should likewise receive predictions concerning the Dharma-body. Why do they receive only predictions of attaining the path through the eight marks?

Answer: The eight marks constitute a prediction of responsive manifestation. Once a prediction of responsive buddhahood is received, one knows that it necessarily has an underlying basis. It also enables living beings who hear it to form conditions for future deliverance, so the prediction of responsive manifestation is given first. Moreover, if these persons of the two vehicles also hear the Life Span chapter, they will diminish birth-and-death and receive predictions concerning the Dharma-body.

IX. Eighth Inquiry: Awakening and Understanding Can Be Shallow or Deep

In broad terms, all three faculties destroy ignorance and realize the first abode, entering the same stage. When the matter is examined finely, however, their understanding may still be dim or clear. Having first heard the Dharma-teaching and entered buddha-wisdom, would understanding not become clearer upon subsequently hearing the teaching through simile? Hearing the teaching through causes and conditions should further advance it; hearing the Life Span chapter makes it still more excellent and profound.

It is like a person at a single stage who hears the Dharma again and gains more than before. It is also like an unlined and a lined robe, each with a different thickness. Examined finely, awakening and understanding can therefore still be shallow or deep.

X. Ninth Inquiry: Benefit Attained by Provisional and Actual Practitioners

One view holds that only actual practitioners receive benefit. Provisional practitioners merely guide the actual, serving as companions who assist the teaching, so no benefit of their own need be discussed.

The present explanation says otherwise. By the Life Span chapter, provisional and actual practitioners both receive benefit: their path advances higher, their birth-and-death is diminished more completely, and they gradually approach the ultimate point of perfection, with only one life remaining. How could this not be benefit attained by provisional figures?

At first, provisional figures serve as assisting companions and together bring the faculties of actual practitioners to maturity. Later, when they hear the Buddha teach the ultimate fruit, their own path becomes clearer. In the parable of the poor son, the profit earned through his coming and going in business extends through other lands; although earned elsewhere, it is still his own benefit. The benefit of actual practitioners comes about through the guidance of provisional figures, and the merit of teaching living beings also returns to those provisional figures. They therefore benefit as well. The Buddha teaches the Dharma with a single voice and living beings each understand according to their kind. Why must one wait until the Life Span chapter to speak of benefit for provisional figures? 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

The scripture further states that one also wishes to attain this real and pure great Dharma oneself. This is benefit attained by the teacher.

XI. Tenth Inquiry: Waiting and Not Waiting for the Occasion

Those who did not awaken earlier and must wait until the Lotus Sutra to awaken are called persons who wait for the occasion. Those who already understood in teachings before the Lotus Sutra are called persons who do not wait for the occasion.

Why is this? The Buddha possesses two modes of teaching, explicit and secret. From the standpoint of explicit teaching, before the Lotus Sutra those of the two vehicles had not yet awakened to the great path. They had to be brought to maturity gradually through the sequence of five flavors and finally gathered in the Lotus. The Buddha therefore says that the time for teaching had not arrived before, whereas now is precisely the corresponding time and the Great Vehicle should certainly be taught. This is waiting for the occasion.

From the standpoint of secret teaching, not everyone must pass through all five flavors and wait until the Lotus Sutra to converge. Some had already awakened through secret teaching, and these are called persons who do not wait for the occasion. This is the broad classification of waiting and not waiting. Compressed within the three rounds, there is also waiting and not waiting; viewed in terms of the Trace and Origin Gates, there is likewise waiting and not waiting. Living beings awakening earlier or later is precisely this meaning.

Someone asks: If a certain faculty is gathered by neither the secret nor the explicit occasion, has that person forever missed the occasion and become unable to awaken?

Answer: Other scriptures may call this missing the occasion, but the present scripture does not. Although this person awakens through neither secret nor explicit occasions and once thinks that extinction has been entered, the scripture can still be heard in another land. Thus the occasion has not been missed forever; the person is simply awaiting the corresponding occasion in another land.

Another asks: Surely the five thousand who rose and left the Dharma assembly missed their occasion?

Answer: After the Tathāgata's extinction, these people should receive benefit from those who propagate this scripture.

XII. First Miscellaneous Analysis: Requesting and Teaching the Dharma Are Both Universal

Someone asks: In the first round Śāriputra requests the Dharma for the fourfold assembly and all three faculties; in the simile round he again requests it for those of middling and dull faculties. How can it be said that the Buddha teaches all three faculties in every round?

Answer: This claim is unsound. The Dharma is requested universally for the assembly, and the Buddha likewise teaches universally for the assembly. It is only that those of sharp faculties possess keen wisdom and awaken through the Dharma-teaching; those of middling faculties awaken through the simile; and those of dull faculties awaken only upon hearing the third round. One should understand by following the meaning. How could the surface wording alone be used to divide them? 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

XIII. Second Miscellaneous Analysis: Dharma, Simile, Former Lives, and the Three Times

Someone asks: Former lives concern the past. Can teaching through Dharma and teaching through simile be said to concern the future and the present respectively?

Answer: The scripture contains no explicit statement establishing this correlation. It can only be inferred from the meaning and said to be broadly so. Guiding the three vehicles to return to the one vehicle means that, viewed from the three vehicles, the one vehicle is the destination in the future and may therefore be called future. Taking a present event as a simile allows simile to be called present. Looking back from what follows toward what precedes, the matter may broadly be as the questioner says. This remains an inference from meaning, not a transformation of an unstated correlation into explicit scriptural wording.

XIV. Third Miscellaneous Analysis: Obstruction and Hearing the Dharma

Someone asks: The old interpretation says that the five turbidities obstruct the great Dharma and analyzes them through the four propositions described above. Another person combines view-delusion and ignorance as obstructions, citing the Treatise on the Lotus Sutra statement that even persons without afflictions retain defiled pride and do not know that the Dharma-body of the one vehicle permanently abides. As for ordinary beings, though they do not cling to nirvāṇa, they cannot hear the Dharma; for them ignorance alone is the obstruction.

If so, is the ignorance of the three faculties destroyed after hearing the Dharma in the three rounds, or before they have heard it? If it is destroyed only after hearing, ignorance would not seem to obstruct hearing. If ignorance can be destroyed before they hear, there would seem to be no obstruction at all. How is this point to be reconciled?

Answer: This is a doctrine established by others, for which the present text merely supplies a reconciliation. It is like the arising of lamplight and the disappearance of darkness: the lamp's arising and darkness's disappearance cannot be determined as two separate moments, one before and one after. Although neither precedes the other, darkness is certainly an obstruction. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

XV. Fourth Miscellaneous Analysis: Knowing and Not Knowing

Someone asks: The Śrīmālādevī Sūtra says that beginners in the practices of the three vehicles are not ignorant of the Dharma and themselves know that they will awaken. Chapter Fourteen of the Sūtra on Upāsaka Precepts says that those of the two vehicles know that they will attain bodhi but provisionally attain a Lesser Vehicle fruit; Chapter Thirteen says that knowing this is easy but practicing it is difficult, and so even though they know the one vehicle, they first attain the arhat fruit. These two scriptures say that the two vehicles can know. Why does the present scripture say that the three kinds of faculty still do not know before passing through the three rounds, doubting at first and awakening only later? How can these statements be reconciled?

Answer: The present scripture also says they can know. It says that if someone has truly attained the arhat fruit yet does not believe this Dharma, that is absolutely impossible. Only after the Buddha's extinction, when no buddha is present, might such a person conceive the thought of having entered extinction; if that person then encounters another buddha, understanding and certainty will still be attained.

There are three levels here. The former passage clarifies knowing, the next not knowing, and the last a return to knowing; not knowing does not mean never knowing. Śāriputra also says that the assembly now before the Buddha has fallen into doubt and does not itself know where this meaning leads. At the time of the Buddha Great Universal Wisdom Excellence, the śrāvakas likewise gave rise to many doubts. They saw a buddha in person and heard the Dharma directly yet still doubted and did not know. How much less, without seeing a buddha or hearing the Dharma, could all of them suddenly know?

Clinging to two passages as contradictory only increases contention. What benefit does that bring to cultivation of the path? Others may discuss other matters; whether śrāvakas can or cannot know after becoming noble ones is a sphere known only by the Buddha and is not something with which the opponent is familiar. The present text will provisionally attempt a reconciliation.

“Initial practice” has two starting points. If the distant past is taken as their initial practice, these people once heard the Great Vehicle and were not ignorant of the Dharma. If the point at which they forgot the great resolve midway and today study the Lesser Vehicle, first cultivating the stations of mindfulness, is taken as their initial practice, they still do not know. Thus provisional figures manifest initial practice while inwardly actually knowing; actual practitioners genuinely begin this course of study and therefore cannot know.

Another person says that those of sharp faculties can know and those of dull faculties cannot. This position can be expanded into four propositions. First, provisional figures manifest sharp or dull faculties, and both manifest not knowing. Second, provisional figures manifest sharp or dull faculties, and both manifest knowing. Third, provisional figures manifest sharp or dull faculties, know upon hearing, and do not know without hearing. Fourth, provisional figures manifest sharp or dull faculties, and both manifest neither knowing nor not knowing.

The present text does not adopt this classification. It takes only the fact that provisional figures are inwardly perfectly clear and have known since the distant past, while actual practitioners have not yet entered the Great Vehicle and therefore genuinely do not know. The meaning then becomes clear of itself. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

XVI. Fifth Miscellaneous Analysis: Condition Awakened, Solitary Awakened, Group Practice, and Transformation

Someone asks: Since pratyekabuddhas are said to appear in a world without a buddha, why are pratyekabuddhas still present in the assembly during the three rounds?

Answer: The Treatise on the Great Perfection of Wisdom distinguishes condition awakened and solitary awakened ones. Solitary awakened ones appear in a world without a buddha; condition awakened ones aspire to be born in a world with a buddha. The Avataṃsaka Sūtra says that as the bodhisattva descends from Tuṣita, he emits light illuminating the pratyekabuddhas. Those who perceive the light relinquish their bodies, while those who do not are moved to another region. The Mahāparinirvāṇa Sūtra uses a comet as a simile. The Treatise on the Middle Way says that when pratyekabuddhas appear in the world, the Buddha Dharma has already become extinct; these are solitary awakened ones.

Those who aspire to be born in a buddha's world may previously have attained the first fruit. If they encounter a buddha before completing fourteen successive births and deaths, they become arhats; if they do not encounter one, they become solitary awakened ones. Since those present now have encountered a buddha, they neither relinquish their lifespan nor are moved elsewhere, because they originally aspired to see a buddha. The same principle applies to those who previously attained the second or third fruit.

There are also group-practice pratyekabuddhas, among whom teachers and disciples still instruct one another in a world without a buddha. Two situations must be distinguished here. After a buddha's extinction, when no writing remains in the world and living beings' faculties are dull, pratyekabuddhas do not teach the Dharma. Those are not the group-practice practitioners meant here. Group-practice practitioners can teach others.

There are also transformation pratyekabuddhas. For people whom it is appropriate to teach by appearing in the body of a pratyekabuddha, they manifest precisely such a body. Once the distinct referents of solitary awakened ones, condition awakened ones aspiring to birth in a buddha's world, group-practice pratyekabuddhas, and transformation pratyekabuddhas are understood, the presence of pratyekabuddhas in the assembly during the three rounds becomes intelligible.

方便品釋·法說(四佛章)Skillful Means · Prose Teaching: The Four-Buddha Chapter

全文五層 →Full five layers →
白話Vernacular

一、初周法說的五段與長行三段

初周以直接說法為主,整體經文分成五段。第一,從舍利弗已經殷勤三請、佛怎能不說以下,一直到這一卷終了,是正式的法說。第二,從下一卷卷首直到偈頌結束,是舍利弗領解。第三,從佛在天、人等大眾中宣告以下,直到說這是佛所護念,是佛為舍利弗述成。第四,從佛告舍利弗來世如何,直到叫他應當自我欣慶,是為他授記。第五,從四眾聽聞以下,直到眾人把一切功德都回向佛道,是四眾歡喜。

第一段法說自身又有長行與偈頌。長行分三:一是佛答應宣說,二是舍利弗領受佛旨,三是正式宣說。答應宣說又有三層:一、順著舍利弗的請求而許;二、告誡他善聽而許;三、揀去不能承受的人而許。

佛說舍利弗已三次請法,是順許;佛叫他現在仔細聽,是誡許。仔細聽,對應由聽聞而生的智慧;善加思惟,對應由思惟而生的智慧;把所聞所思繫念於心,對應由修習而生的智慧。《大般涅槃經》說四種善法是大涅槃的因;本論在此只點明其中的善知識就是如來,其餘由文義可知。

佛說這番話時,便進入揀眾許。因為五千人還在座,如來先前三度停止宣說;如今將要答應廣說,便以威神使他們離去,所以叫作揀眾。

二、五千人為何退席

論文從三方面說明五千人的過失。第一,五濁造成的障礙很多,所以稱為罪重。第二,他們執著小乘,以小法遮蔽大法,所以稱為根深。第三,他們尚未得到卻自以為已得,所以稱為增上慢;也就是尚未得到三果,卻以為已得,尚未證得無學,卻以為已證。因此,經文所說的『有這樣的過失』,不是只指一項傲慢,而是指障、執、慢三種過失。

佛默然不加制止,是因為前面雖已說開三乘、顯一乘,但文句簡略,義理仍隱,五千人還沒有因此生起毀謗;先前所聞也已足以成為日後如衣中繫珠般的因緣。他們此時退去,可以避免謗法,所以退有利益;若留下聽聞廣說開三、顯一,內容違逆其所執,反而會起毀謗,所以住有損害。佛因此不制止他們離去。

經文說大眾中已沒有枝葉。枝葉是細碎末端,不能充當器材;這些人執著的,是方便之中的方便,對大法而言還不是能承受的器。《大品般若》說,捨棄根本而攀附枝葉的人並不明智,正是這一層意思。

經文又說他們退去也好。既然他們以小法遮蔽自己,又妨礙別人接受大法的光明,如今退去,既不再有謗法的過失,也不再有障礙他人的過失,所以說好。在枝葉尚未退去時,如來三度停止;真實之眾一心願聞,因此舍利弗四次請法。師徒都照見眾機,這不是佛吝於說法、舍利弗徒然固請。

三、為何不用神力把人留下

有人問:佛有大慈悲,為什麼不用神力使五千人留在座中,卻令他們聽不見,如《華嚴》中的聲聞一般?又為什麼不採取像毒鼓、喜根菩薩對勝意比丘那樣的強說,使他們即使不願也聽見深法?

回答是,各種作法都有各自的理由。《華嚴》法會到末席才開始為聲聞開出漸次道路,當時他們的小乘執著還沒有破,所以雖然在座,卻與所見所聞隔絕。此處則是諸佛久久之後必定要宣說真實,正要消滅化城般的暫止、破除草庵般的狹小安住,因此必須揀去不能承受者。

若一個人無論離去或留下都會毀謗,便應像喜根菩薩那樣強為宣說。但眼前五千人離去有益,怎能忽然強令他們留下?留下有害,怎能忽然不讓他們離去?喜根出於慈心而強說,如來出於悲心而遣退。兩種處置各有其所以。

四、此刻不受,將來是否仍有利益

又有人問:五千人在座尚且沒有得到利益,離開以後還能有什麼利益?

回答是,這些人不是此刻能直接承受正說的人,而是由此結下後時得度因緣的人,前文已經說過。往昔大通智勝佛時,也有無量眾生心生疑惑;他們生生世世與師同在,後來如今都得到度脫。這五千人也是如此。

宣說《大般涅槃經》時,有萬五千億人對經法不生信心,但論文說這些人未來仍會生信。依此類推,五千人的利益不必等到極遠。《金光明經》說閻浮提有兩種人,也用來表示同樣的意思。本論所傳為『萬五千億』,今本異數另見考據。

佛再告舍利弗要好好聽,便是總結三許;舍利弗領受佛旨,原文義意明白,不再另作分解。

五、由略說轉為廣說

從經文說如是妙法以下,進入正式的廣說,分為兩章。第一是四佛章,廣說先前總諸佛的權與實;第二是釋迦章,廣說先前釋迦佛的權與實。

先前句子少,是文字簡略;只總稱諸佛,是人物簡略;只概括開三乘、顯一乘,是義理簡略。此處章句增加,是文字廣;列出五佛,是人物廣;列出六番義,是義理廣。

六義依次是:一、讚歎法門稀有;二、說佛語沒有虛妄錯謬;三、開出方便;四、顯示真實;五、舉五濁說明為何必須施設三乘;六、揀去虛偽而勉勵真實。讚歎法門,使人生起尊重;說沒有虛妄錯謬,止息人對佛語的毀謗;開出方便,使人不再固執小法;顯示真實,使人領悟大法;舉五濁,顯明佛為何不能不說三乘;揀偽敦實,顯明能受者必須真實。

五佛每一章本來都應具足六義。經文卻讓各義在前後各章互相出現,不必每章逐項重複;這是如來善巧說法,使文字雖略而義理不缺,直達所要說明之處而不繁瑣。六義在各章出現的先後也不固定,其餘可依此推知。

六、總佛章的四義與歎法希有

四佛章分成兩部分:先總說諸佛,再分列過去、未來、現在三世佛。總佛章本來應具六義,現前明說四義:一、歎法;二、無虛妄;三、開方便;四、示真實。所缺的五濁釋權與揀偽敦實,指向後面的釋迦章。

歎法一段同時以法與譬喻讚歎。諸佛同樣出現在五濁之世,必定像釋迦世尊一樣,先開三乘。經過四十餘年才顯真實,久久才明說一次,所以經文說到適當時候才說。此前長久不說,有三個原因:聽者還不能承受;說法的時節尚未到;五千人尚未離去。如今也有三個相應條件:聽者已能承受;時節已到;五千人已離去。因此,佛決定宣說大乘,才說『時乃說之』。

優曇花譯作靈瑞,三千年才出現一次;它出現時,金輪王出世。這個譬喻表示三乘根機經過調熟以後,佛才說妙法,為人授法王之記。又如經過酪、生蘇、熟蘇三味以後,才說如醍醐的法味,其餘意義由此類推。

若從觀心說,觀察此心即是中道,便名為瑞;這一觀能貫通一切法而到達實相,便名為靈,其餘可依此推知。

七、無虛妄與開方便

佛勸大眾相信,是勸信沒有虛妄的法。現今所顯之理極深,與昔日所聞不同;現今所說之言極妙,與昔日說法相反;現今所行極普,與昔日所行相違;現今所化之人極勝,勝過昔日被視為下劣的人。這仍指窮子自稱客作時的理、言、行、人四種粗相,如今都被開顯為妙。眾生可能因此懷疑佛先後所說相反,所以佛勸他們相信。能信的,是不虛妄的人;所信所說的,是不虛妄的法。

從經文說諸佛隨宜說法以下,是開方便,分成三段:開、釋、結。

第一,說佛道隨三種根機所宜而施設方便,所以稱隨宜;然而佛心所向是真實,眾生不能理解,所以說意趣難解。

第二,以『為什麼』作進一步解釋。論文舉釋迦佛自己的方便力,解釋總諸佛如何運用方便;諸佛的善巧智慧相同,所以借此佛來解彼佛。釋迦佛說自己用無數方便、種種因緣、譬喻言辭演說諸法,也表示諸佛開權同樣如此。

第三,經文說此法不是思量分別所能理解,具有兩層歸屬。若作開權的結語,是說佛意難知,只有佛與佛能徹底明了;承受教法的人以為有三乘,諸佛卻知道其實是一乘。若作顯實的起句,則歸入下文。

八、顯實五段與一大事因緣

顯實分五:一、標出殊勝的人與法;二、標明諸佛出世的本意;三、再次揭示;四、正式解釋;五、總結成立。

第一,經文舉出沒有分別的法,只有佛能知。佛以無分別智,了知無分別法;能知的佛與所知之法同時標出,這就是顯真實法。

第二,標出出世本意,又分總說與分字解釋。總說是:諸佛覺悟如實之相,乘著真實之道而應現世間,只為使眾生得到同一實相。諸佛唯為這件事出現,沒有另一件事;離開諸法實相,其餘在此權實語境中都叫魔事。

分字解釋如下。『一』就是一實相,不是五、不是三、不是七、不是九,所以叫一。它的性質廣博,能包攝五、三、七、九,所以叫大。諸佛出世所行的儀式,所以叫事。眾生有能感佛的根機,所以叫因;佛乘著眾生根機而應現,所以叫緣。這才是諸佛出世的本意。

既然本意在一,為什麼如今又開三?因為開三是為一乘作誘引,如同有人想取得對方所有,先給對方一些東西。佛雖說種種道路,真正所為仍是一乘。

第三,經文再次問舍利弗什麼叫一大事,是因將要分別解釋,先重新提出題目作為解釋開端。又因這件大事是佛所尊重的,所以反覆說它。如《釋論》所舉,父王喜歡聽到太子的名字,屢次說也沒有厭足;論文只說父王與太子,沒有另具名號。

九、舊四一、光宅與地論師三解

第四,正式解釋時,先列諸家說法。

舊說把四一解為果一、人一、教一、因一。前兩句依說法者而說,後兩句依受教者而說。從說法者看,先在因門略說果理,叫開佛知見;後在果門廣顯果理,叫示佛知見。從受教者看,先在因門略得開解,叫悟;後在果門廣得深入理趣,叫入。

本論不採用這種解釋。經文四句都說是為了眾生,語意都以眼前眾機得益為主,不是說教化主自身;怎能把開、示兩句分給能教化的佛?當時正在因門說法、開三顯一,怎能預先把兩句分到果門?果門因緣尚未會集,不能預說。若依舊解,六瑞初起、佛尚未出定時就應是略說,五千人尚未離去時便應是廣說;但兩處都不是如此。下方菩薩還未踊出,分身諸佛也未集會,怎能把因門中的兩句說成果門?

光宅說,第一句有開除、開出兩義:昔日方便說三乘,是使人除去五濁;由此開出大乘覺悟佛知見之理。先前雖為人開說此理,沒有說明所以,便再顯示此理,使人生聞慧;雖已聽聞仍未悟,所以再廣為分別,使人生思慧;既已信悟得意,便使人發心學習佛知見,得修慧而入佛知見之理。

本論也不採用。既同舊說把題目定為果一,四句都應說果義,怎能用因位的三慧解釋,使因果前後矛盾?三慧又有多種。本經正破二乘的決定執,不能採取三藏中的三慧;菩薩方便若與二乘相同,只是通意,也不能採;若作別的三慧,是菩薩法而不是佛法;若說圓三慧來開佛知見,也不能恰當消解經文;若另取其他三慧,離經更遠;若仍作圓三慧,原先所說果一又不能成立。各路都不能採用,其餘類推。

地論師說,第五恒河沙佛處所得的八分解,就是三十心位,配開;從初地到六地,見惑、思惑盡,理解漸明,配示;七地到八地,空有並觀而無礙,配悟;十地配入,並引經說十地叫眼見。

本論也不採用。本經所明是開佛知見;佛以一切種智而知,以佛眼而見,開發這樣的智眼才叫佛知見。第五恒河沙佛處所得八分解仍未入地,怎能叫開?這種開不是開佛眼,這種知也不是一切種智知,與經不相應。

十、其餘十家異解與逐一辨破

又有人說,第一句是理,後三句是略解。八苦、五濁障蔽未來佛果,所以叫閉;如今以教除五濁,佛果知見顯出,所以叫開,垢累除去而理顯,所以叫清淨;後三句再配聞、思、修。本論說,對這一家的問難與前面相同。

又有人把三乘各自的教法配開,把三乘共通的教法配示,把抑下小乘、褒揚大乘配悟,把《法華》配入。另有人把三乘共通教法配開,把抑揚配示,把《無量義》配悟,把《法華》配入。這兩種解法都把三句劈到別的經,只把一句留給《法華》;論文判為割裂穿鑿,傷害並誣枉經意,過失很大。

又有人說三十心是開,初地到六地是示,七地到九地是悟,十地是入。本論說,這是旁取通義而夾入別義,仍未顯出《法華》的奇特,哪裡值得經文如此讚歎?

又有人引《華嚴》《瓔珞》《仁王》《攝大乘》《十七地論》,說凡夫等也有五十二位,地前有四十心,為什麼不用?本論說,他誤引《華嚴》,因為《華嚴》不明十信;即使其他部類說地前有四十心,這些位也都不是斷惑之道,不能拿來解開佛知見,只是漫無根據的話。

又有人引《釋論》,說四智的總相與別相同時得到。本論說,不能用這一說解開、示、悟、入:四句似有淺深,四智所在又高;開、示可以通於淺深,不能只因四智同時便拿來相比。這一家只看到《釋論》所說四智的一時,沒有看到開、示自身也可一時具足。

又有人說,非空非有是開,能空能有是示,空有不二是悟,了知不二而二是入。本論說,他只是依空、有二諦作解,尚且不能拔出二乘,怎會是《法華》的一乘宗意?

又有人說,通達三諦之理是開,三諦分明是示,不見三諦為一或為異是悟,任運順流是入。本論說,他依次第延展三諦作義,尚未超出菩薩法,怎能稱佛法?

又有人說,佛知見中的知,是一切智所知總相;見,是一切種智所知別相。本論說,《釋論》明一切智屬聲聞智,道種智屬菩薩智,一切種智屬佛智。這是分別排列的三智,不是三智同在一心;怎能把二乘的知與別教佛的見拼合,用來解圓佛知見?

最後又有人說,斷盡煩惱而清淨的盡智叫知,因果患累畢竟不再生起的無生智叫見。本論說,這是取通家所說佛的名稱與教義,來解究竟佛,完全不相應。以上諸師漫取各經語句,都沒有看見《法華》的大意。

十一、《法華論》的三番解釋

《法華論》先依三乘說四義。第一,開是無上義,除一切智以外再沒有別事;經說開佛知見,使眾生清淨而出現於世。第二,示是同義,聲聞、辟支佛與佛的佛性法身平等;經說示眾生佛知見而出世,因佛性法身沒有差別。第三,悟是不知義,二乘不知究竟唯一佛乘,如今使他們知道。第四,入是使人證得不退轉地,並顯現無量智慧之業。

《論》的次第是:先說佛知見無上;但人可能以為只有佛獨自具有,所以第二說三乘同有佛性法身;雖然同有,二乘還不覺悟,所以第三使他們知道;雖然知道,尚未得到不退,所以第四使他們證不退。

第二番依菩薩說。開與前一番相同;示,是使心有疑惑的菩薩知道如實修行;悟,是使尚未發菩提心的人發心;入,是使已發菩提心的人進入正法。

第三番依凡夫說。開仍如前;示,是顯示凡夫具有法身佛性;悟,是使外道眾生覺悟;入,是使他們進入大菩提。

十二、今師由無量一到十種一、四一

今師所作四解不違背《法華論》。《論》逐句各作解釋,今師則在一句中作四種解;《論》說證不退轉地,今師用四位解;《論》說如來能證真實,今師用四智解;《論》說同義,今師用觀心解;《論》說不知究竟之處,今師用四門解,其餘可依此推知。

今釋顯實,可以廣說無量法都是一;如依《法華玄義》十妙,便是十種一;若暫與舊說會通,則略作四一。若說無量一,一色一香無不是中道,其義可知。若依十種一逐項帖經,經文雖不完全按其次第排列,十義卻沒有減少。

經文說佛以無數方便、種種因緣演說諸法,本身仍是開權文。其後說此法不是思量分別所能解,顯理一;只有諸佛能知,顯智一;說只為一大事,其中一是理、大是智、事是行,理由智發明,智又引導行,所以顯行一;佛知見是智慧知理、佛眼見諦,依開、示、悟、入廣分為四十位,所以顯位一。

總結四句的一大事又顯三法一:一是法身,大是般若,事是解脫,合成祕密藏。佛出現於世,顯感應一;只教化菩薩,顯眷屬一;一切所作,顯神通一;只以佛知見使眾生得示、悟,顯利益一;只以一佛乘為眾生說法,顯說法一。經文與義理相合,如符節相契。

若略依四一說,今、舊數目相同,義卻不同。舊家叫果一,今師叫理一。從義說,若沒有理一,眾事便顛倒而成魔說,不再是佛經;從文說,經稱佛知見,現在取佛所知、所見而言:所見是諦,所知是境,境諦就是實相之理,所以叫理一。舊家叫因一,今師叫行一;因只說單一階段,行卻通收因與果,所以叫行一。人一、教一的名稱則與舊家相同。

十三、理一第一解:四位

現在從略,以四一消解經文;先解理一,又有四種進路:一、依四位;二、依四智;三、依四門;四、依觀心。

先依四位。諦境不能憑普通知見了知,必須依智慧與眼才能知見。二智、四眼都不能究竟知見,只有一切種智與佛眼能知見。經文卻說是使眾生開佛知見,不是只說佛果自知自見;若偏說佛果,就失去眾生這一面,若只說眾生,又沒有佛知見,所以兩邊都不可偏取。

三教行人雖然也是眾生,尚未具有佛眼、佛智,不能知見實相。圓教四位之人同樣是眾生,卻已分得佛眼、佛智,既成立眾生義,也成立佛知見義,所以寄託四位解理一。如瑞相中天雨四種花,表示萬善同歸而進入四位;眾生乘四位之花趣向佛果,因此依位顯理。

第一,開配十住。十住初破無明,開如來藏,見實相理。自性本具之理被通、別兩種惑染著覆藏,很難了知。初心雖能圓信、圓受、圓伏,尚未能斷惑,所以不叫開;內加觀行,外借法雨助成,破除覆藏之惑,顯出真實修德與本性,知見明朗開發,如太陽升起、黑暗消滅、眼睛能用,所以叫開。由緣修破惑,所以叫使得清淨。《仁王經》說入於理般若名為住,就是住於十住的小白花位。

第二,示配十行。惑障既除,知見本體顯現;本體具備萬德,法界眾德顯示分明,所以叫示,也就是十行的大白花位。

第三,悟配十迴向。障礙除去,本體顯現,法界之行明了,事與理融通,不再有兩種不同歸趣。《攝大乘》說如理智、如量智;如今理與量不二,所以叫悟,也就是十迴向的小赤花位。

第四,入配十地。事理既已融通,便能自在無礙、自然流注,從阿字到茶字,進入薩婆若海。如《攝大乘》說如理、如量而通達自在。如量知見能持眾德,如理知見能遮諸惑,所以是十地的大赤花位。

然而圓妙之位,一位中就具足四十一地功德;開本身已具示、悟、入,不是四個彼此分離的心。就如理知見而言,沒有可以分別的淺深相;為了顯明如量知見,才分四位。發心與畢竟兩心本質不別,但本論仍說前心較難;既有難易,就知道初心與畢竟心有明暗、淺深差別。如同月體初後都圓,朔日與望日的明暗卻不同;四位知見都照實相,仍可說開、入之異,其餘依此推知。

十四、理一其餘三解與逆順生起

第二,依四智。這裡要用圓教四智對四位,不依《般若》中的通教解釋。

一、道慧見道的真實性,在真實性中得以開佛知見。二、道種慧知道十法界各種道路、種類、理解與迷惑之相,一一都顯示佛知見。三、一切智知道一切法同一寂滅相,寂滅就是悟佛知見。四、一切種智既知道一切法同一寂滅相,又能識別種種行類相貌,就是入佛知見。

又可作第二組配當:道慧如理,叫開;道種慧如量,叫示;一切智使理、量不二,叫悟;一切種智對理、量雙照,叫入。這也在實理本無淺深之中,為說明而分別淺深。

第三,依四門橫向解四句。空門是一空則一切空,配開;有門是一有則一切有,配示;亦空亦有門是一切亦空亦有,配悟;非空非有門是一切非空非有,配入。能通達理的門有四,所通達的理只有一;開、示、悟、入是能通之門,所知、所見是所通之理。

第四,依觀心。觀察心性所具三諦之理不可思議,這一觀明淨,叫開。雖不可思議,卻能分別空、假、中三者,清楚而不混亂,叫示。空、假、中即三而一、即一而三,叫悟。空、假、中並不是三個固定的空、假、中,卻又同時照見空、假、中,叫入。這就是在一心三觀中分出開、示、悟、入的不同。

為什麼作這四種解?順著所成說:見理要由位,位的成立要由智,智的發起要由門,門的通達要由觀。反過來說:因為有觀,所以門通;門通,所以智成;智成,所以位立;位立,所以見理;見理,因此叫理一。從經文總結諸佛以一大事出世以下,就是總結成立理一。

昔日方便教也可依義說開、示、悟、入,但那還不是佛知見,所以叫權;如今明說佛知見,所以叫實,實就是理一。

十五、人一、行一與教一

從佛告舍利弗諸佛如來只教化菩薩,是明人一。昔日隨方便看,似乎教化三乘;依真實說,所教化的只有菩薩。如窮子自認為是客作賤人,長者所見卻知道他實是自己的兒子,這就是人一。

從諸有所作常為一事,光宅稱為教一,今師稱為行一。三乘眾多的行叫『諸』;這些行都是為圓滿而有,所以眾多行就是一事。這一行走向哪裡?只走向佛知見,便是行一。

這句也可以側重教一。若依教主說,諸佛一切所作都以教化為事,稱教一較便;若依行人說,所作之事就是行,稱行一較便。四句其實都有兩向。理一句,取能知見便側重位一,取所知見便側重理一。人一句,取教化便側重教一,取菩薩便側重人一。教一句,取以一佛乘為眾生說法便側重教一,取乘有運載義便側重行一。四句都可如此,隨文中較便利的一向而解。

從只以一佛乘以下,光宅稱因一,今師稱教一。圓頓之教名為一佛乘,所以〈序品〉說宣說大乘經,這正是教義。自別教以下仍是帶著未盡方便的有餘說,並非究竟了義的佛一乘。

十六、無餘、無二、無三與四佛總結

光宅說,無二是沒有緣覺、聲聞二乘;無三是沒有偏行菩薩這第三乘。又有人說,無二是沒有菩薩、緣覺,無三是沒有聲聞。若如此,只是除去三藏諸乘,仍保存通乘,與一佛乘無關。

又有人說,無二是沒有緣覺,無三是沒有聲聞,仍保存菩薩大乘。若如此,只除三藏中的二乘,卻仍保存三藏菩薩,還是有餘,與佛乘無關。又有哪一處經論把聲聞列為第三?既沒有這種次第,便是妄說。若照這樣排列,無二只除緣覺,無三又改除菩薩,第一個聲聞反而沒有被除,次第更加倒亂。

今師說,只以一佛乘,就是純說佛法的圓教乘。無餘乘,是沒有別教帶方便的有餘說;無二,是沒有《般若》中所帶的二;無三,是沒有方等中所對的三。這些二、三尚且都沒有,何況三藏中的三乘。

從舍利弗、一切十方諸佛之法也是如此,是第五總結。過去、未來、現在三世佛章,各自明說教一與行一;其後總文再說人一與理一,從文字可以看出。若在各章內兼作四一解,也可以成立,但不如總文顯明。

《菩薩瓔珞經》第十三說九世佛:過去、現在、未來三大類,各自再有三世。就未來三世佛說,古佛以慈悲進入未來,示現種種身形度眾生,是未來中的過去佛;將在未來受記者,是未來中的現在佛;將由未來之佛依次授記者,是未來中的未來佛。過去三世佛可以依此類推,其餘不另展開。就現在三世佛說,當下作教化主的是現在中的現在佛;其次補處者是現在中的未來佛;古佛垂迹者是現在中的過去佛。

十七、過去、未來、現在佛章

過去諸佛章本應具六義,明文只出兩種:一、開方便;二、顯真實。其餘兩項向上指總佛章,兩項向下指釋迦章。經文說過去佛以無量無數方便,是明開權;說一切所說之法皆為一佛乘,是明顯實。

依上文,一佛乘是教一。眾生從諸佛聞法,既說所聞之法,也說受法的眾生,所以兼得人一。究竟皆得一切種智,其中種智所知是理一,能知則是行一。雖然經文不按理、人、行、教的次第排列,四一仍兼具。

未來佛章同樣明出開方便、顯真實兩義,其餘向上、向下互指,兼而具足六義,其餘可以依過去佛章推知。

現在佛門以現在佛為當下教化主。第一先標諸佛出世之意,如總佛章說只因一大事因緣出現於世,此處也一樣:諸佛只為饒益、安樂眾生而出現。其次開權,其次顯實,又兼具理、人、行、教四一。

I. The Five Sections of the First-Round Dharma-Teaching and the Three Sections of Prose

The first round proceeds principally through direct Dharma-teaching, and its scriptural text as a whole is divided into five sections. First, from the point where Śāriputra has already made three earnest requests and the Buddha asks how he could fail to speak, through the end of this fascicle, is the formal Dharma-teaching. Second, from the beginning of the next fascicle through the end of the verses, is Śāriputra's understanding. Third, from the Buddha's declaration among the assembly of gods, humans, and others through his statement that this is what the buddhas protect and keep in mind, is the Buddha's confirmation of Śāriputra's understanding. Fourth, from the Buddha's telling Śāriputra what will happen in a future age through the instruction that he should rejoice in himself, is the prediction bestowed upon him. Fifth, from the fourfold assembly's hearing through everyone's dedication of all merit to the buddha path, is the fourfold assembly's rejoicing.

The Dharma-teaching in the first section itself has prose and verse. The prose is divided into three: the Buddha's assent to teach, Śāriputra's reception of the Buddha's intent, and the formal teaching. The assent to teach likewise has three layers: first, assenting in response to Śāriputra's request; second, admonishing him to listen well and assenting; and third, distinguishing and removing those unable to receive the teaching and then assenting.

The Buddha's statement that Śāriputra has now requested the Dharma three times is the responsive assent. His instruction to listen carefully now is the admonitory assent. Listening carefully corresponds to wisdom born of hearing; reflecting well corresponds to wisdom born of reflection; and keeping what one has heard and reflected upon continually in mind corresponds to wisdom born of cultivation. The Mahāparinirvāṇa Sūtra says that four wholesome dharmas are causes of great nirvāṇa. Here the treatise identifies only the spiritual friend among them as the Tathāgata; the others can be understood from the wording and meaning.

When the Buddha speaks these words, the text enters the assent made after distinguishing the assembly. Because the five thousand are still seated, the Tathāgata had previously stopped the teaching three times. Now, just as he is about to assent to teach extensively, he uses his awe-inspiring power to cause them to leave. This is why it is called distinguishing the assembly.

II. Why the Five Thousand Leave the Assembly

The treatise explains the faults of the five thousand from three perspectives. First, the five turbidities create many obstructions, so their offenses are called grave. Second, they are attached to the Lesser Vehicle and use a lesser Dharma to conceal the great Dharma, so their attachment is called deep-rooted. Third, although they have not attained, they suppose that they have, so they are called persons of overweening pride: although they have not attained the three fruits, they suppose that they have, and although they have not realized the stage beyond training, they suppose that they have realized it. Thus, the scripture's words “they had faults such as these” do not refer to pride alone, but to the three faults of obstruction, attachment, and pride.

The Buddha remains silent and does not restrain them because, although he previously taught opening the three to reveal the one, the wording was brief and the meaning still concealed; the five thousand therefore had not yet slandered it. What they had already heard was also sufficient to become a later cause and condition like the jewel sewn into a robe. By leaving now they can avoid slandering the Dharma, so leaving benefits them. If they remained to hear the extensive teaching that opens the three and reveals the one, its content would run contrary to their attachments and they would instead slander it, so remaining would harm them. The Buddha therefore does not prevent their departure.

The scripture says that the assembly is now free of branches and leaves. Branches and leaves are fine, peripheral parts that cannot serve as useful timber. What these people cling to is a provisional means within provisional means; in relation to the great Dharma, they are not yet vessels capable of receiving it. The Large Prajñāpāramitā Sūtra says that those who discard the root and cling to branches and leaves are not wise; this is precisely its meaning here.

The scripture also says that it is well that they have withdrawn. Because they used a lesser Dharma to conceal themselves and also prevented others from receiving the illumination of the great Dharma, their withdrawal now leaves them without the fault of slandering the Dharma and without the fault of obstructing others. Thus the Buddha says it is well. Before the branches and leaves had withdrawn, the Tathāgata stopped three times; because the genuine members of the assembly single-mindedly wished to hear, Śāriputra requested the Dharma four times. Teacher and disciple both perceive the faculties of the assembly. It is not that the Buddha begrudges the Dharma or that Śāriputra presses his request in vain.

III. Why Supernatural Power Is Not Used to Keep Them There

Someone asks: The Buddha possesses great compassion. Why does he not use supernatural power to keep the five thousand seated while making them unable to hear, like the śrāvakas in the Avataṃsaka Sūtra? Or why does he not force the profound Dharma upon them even against their will, as with the poisonous drum or Bodhisattva Root of Joy's teaching to the bhikṣu Superior Intent?

The answer is that each way of acting has its own rationale. Only at the end of the Avataṃsaka assembly does a gradual path begin to be opened for the śrāvakas. At that time, their Lesser Vehicle attachments have not yet been broken, so although they remain seated, they are cut off from what is seen and heard. Here, however, the buddhas are about to teach the real after a very long time. They are precisely about to abolish the temporary stopping place of the conjured city and break down the narrow shelter of the grass hut. Those unable to receive the teaching must therefore be distinguished and removed.

If a person would slander whether leaving or remaining, one should forcefully teach that person as Bodhisattva Root of Joy did. But the five thousand before the Buddha benefit by leaving, so how could he suddenly force them to remain? Remaining would harm them, so how could he suddenly prevent them from going? Root of Joy teaches forcefully out of loving-kindness; the Tathāgata sends them away out of compassion. Each treatment has its own reason.

IV. If They Cannot Receive It Now, Will They Still Benefit Later?

Someone further asks: The five thousand gained no benefit even while seated. What benefit could they gain after leaving?

The answer is that these are not people who can directly receive the formal teaching now. Rather, they form causes and conditions for liberation at a later time, as already explained above. In the past, during the time of the Buddha Great Universal Wisdom Excellence, immeasurable living beings likewise gave rise to doubts. Life after life they remained together with their teacher, and now they have all attained liberation. The same is true of these five thousand.

When the Mahāparinirvāṇa Sūtra was taught, fifteen thousand koṭis of people did not give rise to faith in the scriptural Dharma, yet the treatise says that they would still give rise to faith in the future. By analogy, the benefit of the five thousand need not wait until an extremely distant time. The Sūtra of Golden Light says that there are two kinds of people in Jambudvīpa, which is also used to express the same meaning. The text transmitted in this treatise reads “fifteen thousand koṭis”; the different figure in the present edition is discussed separately in the textual notes.

When the Buddha again tells Śāriputra to listen well, he concludes the three kinds of assent. Śāriputra's reception of the Buddha's intent is clear in the original wording and meaning and requires no separate analysis.

V. From the Brief Teaching to the Extensive Teaching

Beginning with the scripture's words “Such a wondrous Dharma,” the text enters the formal extensive teaching and is divided into two chapters. The first is the four-buddha chapter, which extensively teaches the provisional and the real of the buddhas in general that were previously presented. The second is the Śākyamuni chapter, which extensively teaches the provisional and the real of Śākyamuni Buddha that were previously presented.

The earlier passage contains few sentences, so its wording is brief. It refers only generally to the buddhas, so its persons are brief. It only summarizes the opening of the three vehicles and revelation of the one vehicle, so its meaning is brief. Here the phrases and passages increase, so the wording is extensive. Five kinds of buddha are listed, so the persons are extensive. Six meanings are listed, so the meaning is extensive.

The six meanings are, in order: first, praising the rarity of the Dharma-gate; second, declaring that the Buddha's words contain no falsehood or error; third, opening provisional means; fourth, revealing the real; fifth, citing the five turbidities to explain why the three vehicles had to be established; and sixth, distinguishing the false and encouraging the genuine. Praising the Dharma-gate causes people to give rise to reverence. Declaring the absence of falsehood and error stops their slander of the Buddha's words. Opening provisional means keeps them from clinging to a lesser Dharma. Revealing the real causes them to awaken to the great Dharma. Citing the five turbidities makes clear why the Buddha could not avoid teaching the three vehicles. Distinguishing the false and encouraging the genuine makes clear that those capable of receiving the teaching must be genuine.

Each of the five buddha chapters should originally possess all six meanings. In the scriptural text, however, the meanings appear reciprocally in earlier and later chapters and need not be repeated one by one in every chapter. This is the Tathāgata's skillful teaching: although the wording is brief, the meaning is complete, and it goes directly to what must be explained without becoming cumbersome. The sequence in which the six meanings appear in the individual chapters is likewise not fixed; the rest can be understood accordingly.

VI. The Four Meanings of the General-Buddha Chapter and Praise of the Rare Dharma

The four-buddha chapter is divided into two parts: first the buddhas are discussed generally, and then the buddhas of the past, future, and present are listed separately. The general-buddha chapter should possess all six meanings, but four are explicitly stated here: first, praise of the Dharma; second, absence of falsehood; third, opening provisional means; and fourth, revealing the real. The two omitted meanings—using the five turbidities to explain the provisional and distinguishing the false to encourage the genuine—point ahead to the Śākyamuni chapter.

The passage praising the Dharma praises it through both Dharma and simile. All buddhas appear alike in an age of the five turbidities and must, like Śākyamuni, first open the three vehicles. Only after more than forty years do they reveal the real. Because they explicitly teach it just once after a very long time, the scripture says they speak only when the proper time arrives. There are three reasons it was not taught for so long: the listeners were not yet capable of receiving it; the time for teaching had not yet arrived; and the five thousand had not yet left. Now there are three corresponding conditions: the listeners are capable of receiving it; the time has arrived; and the five thousand have left. The Buddha therefore resolves to teach the Great Vehicle, and the text says, “only then does he speak it.”

Udumbara is translated as “auspicious marvel.” It appears once every three thousand years, and when it appears, a wheel-turning king of the golden wheel emerges in the world. This simile means that only after the faculties for the three vehicles have been trained and matured does the Buddha teach the wondrous Dharma and bestow predictions that people will become Dharma kings. It is also like passing through the three flavors of curds, raw butter, and clarified butter before teaching the Dharma-flavor of ghee. The remaining meanings can be inferred from these.

From the perspective of contemplating the mind, contemplating this very mind as the middle way is called an auspicious sign. Because this contemplation penetrates all dharmas and reaches the true aspect, it is called marvelous. The remaining meanings can be understood accordingly.

VII. Absence of Falsehood and Opening Provisional Means

When the Buddha exhorts the assembly to believe, he exhorts them to trust a Dharma without falsehood. The principle revealed now is exceedingly profound and differs from what they heard in the past. The words spoken now are exceedingly wondrous and run contrary to the former teachings. The practice undertaken now is exceedingly universal and conflicts with former practice. The people transformed now are exceedingly excellent, surpassing those previously regarded as inferior. These still refer to the four coarse aspects of principle, words, practice, and persons associated with the poor son's self-description as a hired laborer; all are now opened and revealed as wondrous. Living beings may therefore suspect that the Buddha's earlier and later teachings contradict each other, so he exhorts them to believe. Those who can believe are persons free from falsehood; what they believe and what is taught is a Dharma free from falsehood.

Beginning with the scripture's statement that the buddhas teach the Dharma according to what is appropriate, the text opens provisional means in three sections: opening, explaining, and concluding.

First, the buddha path establishes provisional means in accord with what is appropriate for three kinds of faculty and is therefore said to accord with what is suitable. Yet the Buddha's own intent is directed toward the real, which living beings cannot understand; thus the scripture says that his intent is difficult to understand.

Second, the words “Why is this?” introduce a further explanation. The treatise cites Śākyamuni Buddha's own power of provisional means to explain how the buddhas in general employ provisional means. Because the buddhas share the same skillful wisdom, this buddha is used to explain those buddhas. Śākyamuni's statement that he uses innumerable provisional means, various causes and conditions, similes, and expressions to expound the dharmas likewise shows that all buddhas open the provisional in this same manner.

Third, the scriptural statement that this Dharma cannot be understood through thought and discrimination has two possible affiliations. If taken as the conclusion to opening the provisional, it says that the Buddha's intent is difficult to know and can be thoroughly understood only by buddhas together with buddhas. Those who receive the teaching suppose that there are three vehicles, while the buddhas know that in fact there is only one. If taken as the opening statement of revealing the real, it belongs to the text that follows.

VIII. The Five Sections of Revealing the Real and the Causes and Conditions of the One Great Matter

Revealing the real is divided into five: first, indicating the supreme persons and Dharma; second, indicating the original intent for which the buddhas appear in the world; third, raising the topic again; fourth, giving the formal explanation; and fifth, concluding and establishing the meaning.

First, the scripture presents a Dharma free from discrimination that only a buddha can know. A buddha knows the Dharma free from discrimination through nondiscriminating wisdom. The knowing buddha and the Dharma known are presented together; this is the revelation of the real Dharma.

Second, the original intent for appearing in the world is indicated, first through a general explanation and then through an explanation of the individual words. The general explanation is this: the buddhas awaken to the aspect of things just as they are, ride upon the real path, and respond by appearing in the world solely to enable living beings to attain that same true aspect. The buddhas appear only for this matter and no other. Apart from the true mark of all dharmas, everything else in this context of the provisional and the real is called the work of Māra.

The individual words are explained as follows. “One” is the one true aspect; it is not five, three, seven, or nine, and is therefore called one. Its nature is vast and comprehensive, encompassing five, three, seven, and nine, so it is called great. It is the rite enacted by the buddhas in appearing in the world, so it is called a matter. Living beings possess faculties capable of affecting a buddha, so they are called the cause. A buddha responds by appearing in accordance with the faculties of living beings, so he is called the condition. This is the original intent for which the buddhas appear in the world.

Since the original intent lies in the one, why are three vehicles now opened? The three are opened to serve as inducements toward the one vehicle, like someone who wishes to acquire everything another person possesses and therefore first gives that person something. Although a buddha teaches various paths, what he truly acts for remains the one vehicle.

Third, when the scripture again asks Śāriputra what the one great matter is, it raises the topic anew before analyzing and explaining it, thereby opening the explanation. Because this great matter is also honored by the Buddha, he speaks of it repeatedly. As the Treatise on the Great Perfection of Wisdom says, a royal father delights in hearing the name of the crown prince and never tires of repeating it. The treatise speaks only of a royal father and crown prince and gives no separate names.

IX. Three Interpretations: the Old Four Ones, Guangzhai, and the Masters of the Treatise on the Grounds

Fourth, in giving the formal explanation, the interpretations of various masters are presented first.

An old interpretation explains the four ones as one effect, one class of persons, one teaching, and one cause. The first two sentences are explained from the perspective of the teacher, while the latter two are explained from the perspective of those receiving the teaching. From the teacher's perspective, first briefly presenting the principle of the effect in the Cause Gate is called opening the Buddha's knowledge and vision; later extensively revealing the principle of the effect in the Effect Gate is called showing the Buddha's knowledge and vision. From the recipients' perspective, first gaining a brief understanding in the Cause Gate is called awakening, while later extensively entering the purport of the principle in the Effect Gate is called entering.

The present treatise does not adopt this explanation. All four scriptural sentences say that the action is undertaken for living beings, and their meaning principally concerns the present faculties' attainment of benefit, not the transforming lord himself. How, then, can the two sentences on opening and showing be assigned to the teaching buddha? At this moment the Dharma is being taught in the Cause Gate and the three are being opened to reveal the one. How could two sentences be assigned in advance to the Effect Gate? The causes and conditions for the Effect Gate have not yet assembled, so it cannot be taught beforehand. According to the old explanation, the first appearance of the six auspicious signs, before the Buddha has even emerged from samādhi, would already have to be the brief teaching, while the time before the five thousand have left would have to be the extensive teaching. Yet neither passage is such a teaching. The bodhisattvas from below have not yet emerged and the buddhas who are Śākyamuni's emanations have not yet assembled. How can two sentences in the Cause Gate be made to refer to the Effect Gate?

Guangzhai says that the first sentence contains the two meanings of opening by removing and opening by producing. The three vehicles formerly taught as provisional means enable people to remove the five turbidities, thereby opening forth the Great Vehicle principle of awakening to the Buddha's knowledge and vision. Although this principle was previously opened and taught to people, its rationale was not explained, so it is shown again, causing people to develop wisdom through hearing. Although they have heard, they have not yet awakened, so it is further analyzed extensively, causing them to develop wisdom through reflection. Once they have gained the purport through faith and awakening, they are caused to arouse the resolve to train in the Buddha's knowledge and vision, attain wisdom through cultivation, and enter the principle of the Buddha's knowledge and vision.

The present treatise does not adopt this either. Since it follows the old interpretation in defining the topic as the one effect, all four sentences should explain the effect. How can wisdom through hearing, reflection, and cultivation from the causal stage be used in their explanation, contradicting the causal and resultant stages before and after? Moreover, there are many kinds of the three wisdoms. Because this scripture precisely refutes the determinate attachments of the two vehicles, the three wisdoms of the Tripiṭaka Teaching cannot be adopted. If the provisional means of bodhisattvas are the same as those of the two vehicles, they express only the meaning of the Shared Teaching and cannot be adopted either. If the three wisdoms of the Distinct Teaching are intended, they are a bodhisattva Dharma and not a buddha Dharma. If the three wisdoms of the Perfect Teaching are said to open the Buddha's knowledge and vision, they still cannot appropriately resolve the scriptural text. If some other three wisdoms are taken, the interpretation strays even farther from the scripture. If the Perfect Teaching's three wisdoms are retained, the originally asserted one effect cannot be established. None of these paths can be adopted; the rest can be inferred accordingly.

The masters of the Treatise on the Grounds say that the eightfold understanding attained in the presence of buddhas numerous as the sands of the fifth Ganges River is the stage of the thirty minds and corresponds to opening. From the first through the sixth ground, the delusions of views and thought are exhausted and understanding gradually becomes clear; these correspond to showing. On the seventh and eighth grounds, emptiness and existence are contemplated together without obstruction; these correspond to awakening. The tenth ground corresponds to entering, and they cite a scripture saying that the tenth ground is called seeing with the eyes.

The present treatise does not adopt this either. This scripture teaches the opening of the Buddha's knowledge and vision. A buddha knows through the wisdom of all modes and sees with the buddha-eye; only the opening and development of such wisdom and vision is called the Buddha's knowledge and vision. The eightfold understanding attained in the presence of buddhas numerous as the sands of the fifth Ganges River has not yet entered the grounds. How could it be called opening? This opening does not open the buddha-eye, and this knowledge is not the knowledge of the wisdom of all modes. It does not accord with the scripture.

X. Ten Further Interpretations and Their Point-by-Point Refutation

Someone else says that the first sentence is the principle and the latter three are its brief explanation. Because the eight sufferings and five turbidities conceal the future buddha-fruit, this is called closed. Now the teaching removes the five turbidities and the knowledge and vision of the buddha-fruit become manifest, so this is called open; because defilements are removed and the principle appears, it is called purity. The latter three sentences are then correlated with hearing, reflection, and cultivation. The present treatise says that the objections to this school are the same as those above.

Another person correlates the separate teachings of the three vehicles with opening, the teaching shared by the three vehicles with showing, the disparagement of the Lesser and praise of the Great with awakening, and the Lotus Sūtra with entering. Yet another correlates the Shared Teaching of the three vehicles with opening, disparagement and praise with showing, the Sūtra of Immeasurable Meanings with awakening, and the Lotus Sūtra with entering. Both interpretations split three sentences off into other scriptures and leave only one for the Lotus. The treatise judges this to be a fragmented and forced construction that injures and falsely imputes the scripture's intent; the fault is grave.

Another person says that the thirty minds are opening, the first through sixth grounds are showing, the seventh through ninth grounds are awakening, and the tenth ground is entering. The present treatise says that this takes a peripheral meaning from the Shared Teaching and inserts the meaning of the Distinct Teaching. It still does not reveal what is extraordinary about the Lotus; how could it merit such praise from the scripture?

Another person cites the Avataṃsaka Sūtra, the Sūtra of the Jeweled Necklace, the Sūtra for Humane Kings, the Summary of the Great Vehicle, and the Treatise on the Seventeen Grounds, saying that ordinary beings and others also have fifty-two stages and that there are forty minds before the grounds. Why are these not used? The present treatise says that this person misquotes the Avataṃsaka, because the Avataṃsaka does not teach the ten faiths. Even if other classes of scripture teach forty minds before the grounds, none of these stages is a path that severs delusion. They cannot be used to explain the opening of the Buddha's knowledge and vision; these are merely groundless words.

Another person cites the Treatise on the Great Perfection of Wisdom, saying that the general and specific aspects of the four wisdoms are attained simultaneously. The present treatise says that this cannot explain opening, showing, awakening, and entering. The four sentences appear to have shallow and deep levels, while the four wisdoms themselves are lofty. Opening and showing can extend through both shallow and deep levels and cannot be compared merely because the four wisdoms occur simultaneously. This school sees only the simultaneity of the four wisdoms stated in the Treatise on the Great Perfection of Wisdom and fails to see that opening and showing themselves can also be complete simultaneously.

Another person says that neither emptiness nor existence is opening, the capacity for emptiness and existence is showing, the nonduality of emptiness and existence is awakening, and understanding the twofold character of the nondual is entering. The present treatise says that this only explains the two truths of emptiness and existence. It cannot even draw the two vehicles out, so how could it be the One Vehicle purport of the Lotus?

Another person says that penetrating the principle of the three truths is opening, clearly distinguishing the three truths is showing, not seeing the three truths as either one or different is awakening, and naturally following their flow is entering. The present treatise says that this interpretation unfolds the three truths sequentially and still does not go beyond a bodhisattva Dharma. How could it be called a buddha Dharma?

Another person says that “knowledge” in the Buddha's knowledge and vision is the general aspect known by all-wisdom, while “vision” is the specific aspect known by the wisdom of all modes. The present treatise says that the Treatise on the Great Perfection of Wisdom assigns all-wisdom to śrāvaka wisdom, path-wisdom to bodhisattva wisdom, and the wisdom of all modes to buddha-wisdom. These are three wisdoms arranged separately, not three wisdoms present together in one mind. How could the knowledge of the two vehicles be joined to the vision of the buddha of the Distinct Teaching and used to explain the knowledge and vision of the buddha of the Perfect Teaching?

Finally, another person says that the exhaustion-wisdom in which afflictions are completely severed and purified is called knowledge, while the nonarising-wisdom in which the afflictive burdens of cause and effect will ultimately never arise again is called vision. The present treatise says that this takes the name and doctrine of a buddha as taught by the Shared school and uses them to explain the ultimate buddha; it is wholly inapplicable. The masters above randomly take phrases from different scriptures and none sees the great intent of the Lotus.

XI. Three Rounds of Explanation in the Treatise on the Lotus Sutra

The Treatise on the Lotus Sutra first explains four meanings in relation to the three vehicles. First, opening means unsurpassed: apart from all-wisdom there is no other matter. The scripture says that the Buddha appears in the world to open the Buddha's knowledge and vision and enable living beings to attain purity. Second, showing means sameness: the buddha-nature and Dharma-body of śrāvakas, pratyekabuddhas, and buddhas are equal. The scripture says that the Buddha appears in the world to show living beings the Buddha's knowledge and vision because there is no difference in the buddha-nature and Dharma-body. Third, awakening means not knowing: the two vehicles do not know that ultimately there is only the one buddha vehicle, and now they are caused to know. Fourth, entering means causing people to realize the ground of nonretrogression and manifesting the activity of immeasurable wisdom.

The sequence of the treatise is this: first it says that the Buddha's knowledge and vision is unsurpassed. People might suppose, however, that the Buddha alone possesses it, so the second point says that the three vehicles alike possess the buddha-nature and Dharma-body. Although they possess these equally, the two vehicles are still unaware of it, so the third point causes them to know. Although they know, they have not yet attained nonretrogression, so the fourth causes them to realize nonretrogression.

The second round explains the passage in relation to bodhisattvas. Opening is the same as in the first round. Showing causes bodhisattvas whose minds contain doubts to know how to practice in accord with reality. Awakening causes those who have not yet aroused the mind of bodhi to arouse it. Entering causes those who have already aroused the mind of bodhi to enter the true Dharma.

The third round explains the passage in relation to ordinary beings. Opening is again as above. Showing reveals that ordinary beings possess the Dharma-body and buddha-nature. Awakening causes non-Buddhist living beings to awaken. Entering causes them to enter great bodhi.

XII. The Present Master's Explanation: from Immeasurable Ones to Ten Kinds of One and the Four Ones

The present master's four explanations do not contradict the Treatise on the Lotus Sutra. The treatise explains each sentence separately, while the present master gives four explanations within a single sentence. The treatise speaks of realizing the ground of nonretrogression; the present master explains this through the four stages. The treatise says that the Tathāgata can realize the real; the present master explains this through the four wisdoms. The treatise speaks of sameness; the present master explains it through contemplating the mind. The treatise speaks of not knowing the ultimate place; the present master explains it through the four gateways. The remaining correspondences can be understood accordingly.

In the present explanation of revealing the real, one can extensively explain immeasurable dharmas as all being one. Following the ten subtleties of the Profound Meaning of the Lotus Sutra, these become ten kinds of one. If provisionally reconciled with the old interpretation, they can be explained briefly as the four ones. With respect to immeasurable ones, no single form or fragrance is anything other than the middle way; the meaning is evident. If the ten kinds of one are correlated one by one with the scripture, the ten meanings are all present even though the scriptural wording does not arrange them entirely in sequence.

The scripture's statement that the Buddha expounds the dharmas through innumerable provisional means and various causes and conditions still belongs to the passage opening the provisional. The following statement that this Dharma cannot be understood through thought and discrimination reveals one principle. Only buddhas can know it, revealing one wisdom. The words “only for the sake of one great matter” reveal one practice: “one” is principle, “great” is wisdom, and “matter” is practice. Principle is illuminated by wisdom, and wisdom in turn guides practice. The Buddha's knowledge and vision means that wisdom knows the principle and the buddha-eye sees the truth. Because opening, showing, awakening, and entering are extensively distinguished as the forty stages, these words reveal one set of stages.

The conclusion to the four sentences through “one great matter” further reveals the oneness of the three dharmas: “one” is the Dharma-body, “great” is prajñā, and “matter” is liberation; together they form the secret treasury. The Buddha's appearance in the world reveals one stimulus-and-response. Teaching only bodhisattvas reveals one retinue. Everything he does reveals one spiritual power. Using only the Buddha's knowledge and vision to cause living beings to be shown it and awaken to it reveals one benefit. Teaching the Dharma to living beings only through the one buddha vehicle reveals one teaching. Scripture and meaning correspond like the matching halves of a tally.

If explained briefly through the four ones, the present and old interpretations have the same number but different meanings. The old school calls the first the one effect; the present master calls it one principle. In terms of meaning, without one principle all matters would become inverted, turning into Māra's teaching rather than a buddha scripture. In terms of wording, the scripture speaks of the Buddha's knowledge and vision, and the present explanation takes what the Buddha knows and sees: what is seen is the truth, and what is known is the object. The object and truth are the principle of the true aspect, so this is called one principle. The old school calls the next one cause; the present master calls it one practice. Cause indicates only a single stage, while practice includes both cause and effect, so it is called one practice. The names one class of persons and one teaching are the same as in the old school.

XIII. The First Explanation of One Principle: the Four Stages

The scripture will now be explained briefly through the four ones. One principle is explained first, using four approaches: first, the four stages; second, the four wisdoms; third, the four gateways; and fourth, contemplating the mind.

First, the four stages. The object of truth cannot be known and seen through ordinary knowledge and vision; it must be known and seen through wisdom and the eye. The two wisdoms and four eyes cannot know and see it ultimately; only the wisdom of all modes and the buddha-eye can do so. Yet the scripture says that living beings are caused to open the Buddha's knowledge and vision, not merely that the Buddha-fruit itself knows and sees. To speak solely of the Buddha-fruit loses the side of living beings; to speak solely of living beings leaves no Buddha's knowledge and vision. Neither side can therefore be taken in isolation.

Although practitioners of the three teachings are also living beings, they do not yet possess the buddha-eye and buddha-wisdom and cannot know and see the true aspect. People in the four stages of the Perfect Teaching are likewise living beings, yet they have already acquired a share of the buddha-eye and buddha-wisdom. They therefore fulfill both the meaning of living beings and the meaning of the Buddha's knowledge and vision, so the four stages are used to explain one principle. In the auspicious signs, the heavens rain four kinds of flowers, indicating that the myriad wholesome deeds all converge and enter the four stages. Living beings ride the flowers of the four stages toward the buddha-fruit; therefore the principle is revealed through the stages.

First, opening corresponds to the ten abodes. At the first of the ten abodes, one first breaks ignorance, opens the tathāgata treasury, and sees the principle of the true aspect. The inherently possessed principle of one's nature is stained and concealed by the delusions of the Shared and Distinct Teachings and is difficult to know. Although a beginner can have perfect faith, perfect reception, and perfect mastery, that person cannot yet sever delusion, so this is not called opening. Inwardly, contemplative practice is intensified; outwardly, the rain of Dharma assists its completion. The delusions that conceal the principle are broken, and the real virtue of cultivation and the original nature are revealed. Knowledge and vision become bright and open, like the sun rising, darkness vanishing, and the eye becoming able to function. This is called opening. Because delusion is broken through cultivation dependent upon conditions, living beings are said to be caused to attain purity. The Sūtra for Humane Kings says that entering the prajñā of principle is called abiding; this means abiding in the stage of the small white flower of the ten abodes.

Second, showing corresponds to the ten practices. Once the obstructing delusions have been removed, the essence of knowledge and vision appears. This essence possesses the myriad virtues, and all the virtues of the Dharma-realm are shown with clarity. Thus it is called showing; this is the stage of the great white flower of the ten practices.

Third, awakening corresponds to the ten dedications. Once obstructions have been removed, the essence appears and the practices of the Dharma-realm become clear. Event and principle interpenetrate, and there are no longer two different destinations. The Summary of the Great Vehicle speaks of wisdom in accord with principle and wisdom in accord with measure. Here principle and measure are nondual, so this is called awakening; this is the stage of the small red flower of the ten dedications.

Fourth, entering corresponds to the ten grounds. Once event and principle have interpenetrated, one can function freely and without obstruction, flowing naturally from the letter a to the letter ḍha and entering the ocean of sarvajñā. As the Summary of the Great Vehicle says, one penetrates freely in accord with principle and measure. Knowledge and vision in accord with measure can sustain the myriad virtues; knowledge and vision in accord with principle can ward off all delusions. This is the stage of the great red flower of the ten grounds.

Yet within the perfectly subtle stages, the merit of all forty-one grounds is complete in any one stage. Opening itself already possesses showing, awakening, and entering; these are not four mutually separate minds. With respect to knowledge and vision in accord with principle, no shallow or deep aspects can be distinguished. The four stages are distinguished only to illuminate knowledge and vision in accord with measure. The mind at first arousal and the ultimate mind do not differ in essence, yet the present treatise still says that the former mind is more difficult. Since there is difficulty and ease, the beginning and ultimate minds differ in brightness and darkness, shallowness and depth. The moon's body is round both at first and last, yet the new moon and full moon differ in brightness. The knowledge and vision of all four stages illuminates the true aspect, yet one can still speak of the difference between opening and entering. The rest can be inferred accordingly.

XIV. Three Further Explanations of One Principle and Their Forward and Reverse Arising

Second, the four wisdoms. Here the four wisdoms of the Perfect Teaching must be correlated with the four stages; the Shared Teaching interpretation in the Prajñāpāramitā Sūtras is not followed.

First, path-wisdom sees the reality of the path, and within that reality the Buddha's knowledge and vision is opened. Second, wisdom of path varieties knows the paths, categories, understandings, and deluded aspects of each of the ten Dharma-realms, thereby showing the Buddha's knowledge and vision in each. Third, all-wisdom knows that all dharmas share the single aspect of quiescent extinction; that quiescent extinction is awakening to the Buddha's knowledge and vision. Fourth, the wisdom of all modes both knows that all dharmas share the single aspect of quiescent extinction and distinguishes the varied features of their kinds of practice; this is entering the Buddha's knowledge and vision.

A second set of correlations may also be made. Path-wisdom accords with principle and is called opening. Wisdom of path varieties accords with measure and is called showing. All-wisdom makes principle and measure nondual and is called awakening. The wisdom of all modes illuminates both principle and measure and is called entering. This too distinguishes shallow and deep for purposes of explanation within the real principle, which in itself has no shallow or deep.

Third, the four gateways explain the four sentences horizontally. In the gateway of emptiness, one emptiness means that all is empty; this corresponds to opening. In the gateway of existence, one existence means that all exists; this corresponds to showing. In the gateway of both emptiness and existence, all is both empty and existent; this corresponds to awakening. In the gateway of neither emptiness nor existence, all is neither empty nor existent; this corresponds to entering. The gateways capable of reaching the principle are four, but the principle reached is one. Opening, showing, awakening, and entering are the gateways that penetrate; what is known and seen is the principle penetrated.

Fourth, contemplating the mind. Contemplating the inconceivable principle of the three truths inherent in the nature of the mind, with this contemplation clear and pure, is called opening. Although inconceivable, emptiness, provisional existence, and the middle can nevertheless be distinguished clearly without confusion; this is called showing. Emptiness, provisional existence, and the middle are three and yet one, one and yet three; this is called awakening. Emptiness, provisional existence, and the middle are not three fixed entities, yet all three are simultaneously illuminated; this is called entering. These are the distinctions of opening, showing, awakening, and entering within the three contemplations in one mind.

Why are these four explanations given? In forward sequence: seeing the principle depends on the stages; establishing the stages depends on wisdom; arousing wisdom depends on the gateways; and penetrating the gateways depends on contemplation. In reverse sequence: because there is contemplation, the gateways are penetrated; because the gateways are penetrated, wisdom is perfected; because wisdom is perfected, the stages are established; because the stages are established, the principle is seen; and because the principle is seen, it is called one principle. Beginning with the scripture's conclusion that the buddhas appear in the world for the one great matter is the concluding establishment of one principle.

The former provisional teachings can also be said, according to their meaning, to contain opening, showing, awakening, and entering. Yet these are not the Buddha's knowledge and vision, so they are called provisional. Now the Buddha's knowledge and vision is explicitly taught, so it is called real. The real is one principle.

XV. One Class of Persons, One Practice, and One Teaching

Beginning with the Buddha's telling Śāriputra that the buddhas and tathāgatas teach only bodhisattvas is the explanation of one class of persons. Viewed according to former provisional means, it appeared that the three vehicles were taught. According to the real, those taught are only bodhisattvas. The poor son thinks himself a lowly hired laborer, while the elder sees and knows that he is truly his own son. This is one class of persons.

Beginning with the statement that everything they do is always for one matter, what Guangzhai calls one teaching the present master calls one practice. The many practices of the three vehicles are called “all”; because all these practices exist for the sake of perfection, the many practices are the one matter. Where does this one practice go? It proceeds only toward the Buddha's knowledge and vision; this is one practice.

This sentence can also emphasize one teaching. From the perspective of the teaching lord, everything the buddhas do takes teaching and transforming as its work, so it is more convenient to call it one teaching. From the perspective of practitioners, what is done is practice, so it is more convenient to call it one practice. All four sentences in fact have two directions. In the sentence on one principle, taking that which knows and sees emphasizes one set of stages, while taking that which is known and seen emphasizes one principle. In the sentence on persons, taking the act of teaching and transforming emphasizes one teaching, while taking bodhisattvas emphasizes one class of persons. In the sentence on teaching, taking the teaching of the Dharma to living beings through the one buddha vehicle emphasizes one teaching, while taking “vehicle” in its meaning of bearing and transporting emphasizes one practice. Each of the four sentences can be interpreted in this way, following whichever direction is more convenient in its context.

Beginning with the words “only through the one buddha vehicle,” what Guangzhai calls one cause the present master calls one teaching. The perfectly sudden teaching is called the one buddha vehicle. Thus the Introductory chapter speaks of expounding a Great Vehicle scripture; this precisely indicates the meaning of teaching. The teachings below the Distinct Teaching remain residual statements carrying unexhausted provisional means; they are not the ultimate and definitive one buddha vehicle.

XVI. No Other, No Two, No Three, and the Conclusion to the Four-Buddha Chapter

Guangzhai says that “no two” means there are no two vehicles of pratyekabuddhas and śrāvakas, while “no three” means there is no third vehicle of partial-practice bodhisattvas. Another person says that “no two” means there are no bodhisattvas or pratyekabuddhas, while “no three” means there are no śrāvakas. If this were so, it would merely remove the vehicles of the Tripiṭaka Teaching while preserving the vehicle of the Shared Teaching and would have nothing to do with the one buddha vehicle.

Another says that “no two” means there are no pratyekabuddhas and “no three” means there are no śrāvakas, while still preserving the Great Vehicle of bodhisattvas. If this were so, only the two vehicles within the Tripiṭaka Teaching would be removed, while the Tripiṭaka bodhisattva would still remain. This would still leave a remainder and would have nothing to do with the buddha vehicle. Moreover, where does any scripture or treatise list the śrāvaka vehicle as third? Since no such sequence exists, this is a false claim. In this arrangement, “no two” removes only pratyekabuddhas, while “no three” then switches to removing bodhisattvas; the first vehicle of śrāvakas is instead never removed, making the sequence even more disordered.

The present master says that “only through the one buddha vehicle” means the vehicle of the Perfect Teaching that teaches the Buddha-Dharma in purity. “No other vehicle” means there is no residual statement of the Distinct Teaching carrying provisional means. “No two” means there is no duality carried within the Prajñāpāramitā Sūtras. “No three” means there are no three vehicles set in opposition within the Vaipulya teachings. If even these twos and threes do not exist, how much less the three vehicles of the Tripiṭaka Teaching.

Beginning with “Śāriputra, the Dharma of all buddhas throughout the ten directions is also like this” is the fifth section, the conclusion. The chapters on the buddhas of the past, future, and present each explicitly teach one teaching and one practice; the general text that follows then teaches one class of persons and one principle, as the wording shows. The four ones can also be explained within each chapter, but they are not as clearly manifest as in the general passage.

Chapter Thirteen of the Sūtra of the Bodhisattva's Jeweled Necklace speaks of nine generations of buddhas: the three great categories of past, present, and future are each again divided into three times. Among the three generations of future buddhas, ancient buddhas who enter the future through compassion and manifest various bodies to liberate living beings are the past buddhas within the future. Those who will receive predictions in the future are the present buddhas within the future. Those who will in turn be predicted by future buddhas are the future buddhas within the future. The three generations of past buddhas can be inferred from this, and the rest is not elaborated separately. Among the three generations of present buddhas, the present buddha within the present is the teaching lord at this moment; the next bodhisattva in the position of succession is the future buddha within the present; and an ancient buddha who lowers a trace is the past buddha within the present.

XVII. The Chapters on the Buddhas of the Past, Future, and Present

The chapter on past buddhas should possess all six meanings, but the explicit text presents only two: first, opening provisional means; second, revealing the real. Of the remaining four, two point upward to the general-buddha chapter and two point downward to the Śākyamuni chapter. The scripture's statement that past buddhas used immeasurable and innumerable provisional means explains the opening of the provisional. Its statement that all the dharmas they taught were for the sake of the one buddha vehicle explains the revelation of the real.

According to the preceding passage, the one buddha vehicle is one teaching. Living beings hear the Dharma from the buddhas; because the passage speaks both of the Dharma heard and the living beings receiving it, it also includes one class of persons. In “all ultimately attained the wisdom of all modes,” the object known by the wisdom of all modes is one principle, while that which knows is one practice. Although the scriptural wording does not follow the sequence of principle, persons, practice, and teaching, all four ones are present.

The future-buddha chapter likewise explicitly presents the two meanings of opening provisional means and revealing the real. The other meanings point reciprocally upward and downward, so all six are present together. The rest can be understood by analogy with the past-buddha chapter.

The present-buddha chapter takes the buddhas of the present as the teaching lords of the present moment. First it indicates the intent for which the buddhas appear in the world. Just as the general-buddha chapter says that the buddhas appear in the world solely because of the causes and conditions of the one great matter, here too the buddhas appear solely to benefit living beings and bring them peace and joy. Next comes opening the provisional, then revealing the real; the four ones of principle, persons, practice, and teaching are likewise included.

方便品釋·法說(釋迦章)Skillful Means · Prose Teaching: The Śākyamuni Chapter

全文五層 →Full five layers →
白話Vernacular

《妙法蓮華經文句》第四卷下,天台智者大師說。

一、釋迦章在六義中只現五科

第二,廣泛解釋釋迦佛這一章。原來的章門共有六義;釋迦章沒有讚歎法稀有這一義,所以眼前只分五科:第一開顯權宜,第二顯明真實,第三舉五濁說明施設方便的原因,第四辨別虛偽而敦促大眾信受唯一真實,第五說明佛語沒有虛妄。

『我現在也是如此』,其中的我是釋迦佛。釋迦現在先說三乘,後說一乘,與前面四佛沒有差別,所以說也是如此。

『知道眾生有種種欲求』,是說眾生有五乘的根、性與欲。過去名為根,現在名為欲,未來名為性。『內心深深執著』,所說的也是根。『方便』,就是隨順眾生所宜,開出三乘權宜之法。

『這些全都是為了使眾生得到一佛乘』,便是顯明真實。佛乘表示所教之法唯一;一切表示所行唯一;一切種智所知的境界表示所證之理唯一。這裡先列教、行、理三種一,尚未列人一。

二、清淨一實中,為何還要分別說三

從『十方世界尚且沒有二乘,何況有三乘』以下,是第三科:舉出五濁,解釋為何開設權宜。

在正式舉出五濁以前,先標明本段意旨。上文已經說諸佛開權顯實,卻還沒有說明祂們為何隱藏真實而施設權宜。那一真實之法清淨、澄湛、純一,如同虛空;其中尚且沒有兼帶二乘、兼帶三乘的權法,更何況單獨施設三乘、單獨施設五乘的權法?

只因五濁障礙沉重,真實之法不能直接宣說,所以必須施設單五、單三的權法,也施設帶二、帶三的權法。因此經文說,在一佛乘中分別說三;這個三,既包括帶二、帶三之三,也包括單五、單三之三。

三、五濁的體與相

說五濁,自有四層分別:第一唱出數目,第二列出名稱,第三說明體與相,第四解釋總結。唱數與列名,經文已經明白,這裡不再重抄。經文所說『如是』,在此用來總指五濁的體與相。

先說五濁之體。

劫濁沒有另一個獨立的體。劫是長時,剎那是短時;只是依其餘四濁聚在同一時期,才安立劫濁這個假名。經文所說『劫濁混亂之時』,便是這個意思。

眾生濁也沒有另一個獨立的體。它攬取見與慢,在果報上安立眾生這個假名。經文所說『眾生垢穢沉重』,便是這個意思。

煩惱濁以五種鈍使為體;見濁以五種利使為體;命濁則以相續維持色與心為體〔云云:以下從略〕。

再說五濁之相。

劫濁的相,是其餘四濁在這個時期增劇而聚集。瞋恚增劇,便有刀兵災;貪欲增劇,便有飢餓災;愚癡增劇,便有疾疫災。三種災難一起,煩惱更加隆盛,各種邪見更加熾盛;色與心變得粗惡弊壞,名聲污穢,年歲、壽命都被摧減,眾濁一同交會。

這如同奔流的水變得昏濁,風波鼓動,魚龍在其中攪擾,使人沒有一處可以依賴;是當時的情勢使它如此。又如成劫初起時,光音天人墮落到地面,因地而生欲;也如忉利天人進入粗澀園,因那座園林而生鬥爭之心。這些名為劫濁之相。

煩惱濁的相有五種譬喻。貪欲如大海容納百川,從來不會滿足;瞋恚如毒蛇吸取毒液,擾亂世間;愚癡昏暗、頑昧,比漆與墨更黑;驕慢從高處俯視低處,欺凌、輕忽而沒有分寸;懷疑如網,沒有信心,便不能把真實之法告訴他。這些是煩惱濁之相。

見濁的相,是在沒有真實主體之處,妄說有一個實在的人;在確有正道之處,反說沒有正道。十六知見、六十二見等,如同羅網,又像稠密的樹林,使人被纏縛、屈曲其中而不能出去。這是見濁之相。

眾生濁的相,是攬取色與心,安立一個主宰;又像黐膠一樣,沒有什麼不能黏著。眾生流轉漂蕩於六道,處處受生,實際如同貧乏、短促,卻被假名為長久、富有。這是眾生濁之相。

命濁的相,是早晨生起、夜晚便死亡,白日出現、傍晚便隱沒;如波浪轉動,如煙氣迴旋,瞬息不停。命濁的相就是如此。五濁的相狀很多,不能全部說盡。

再說它們生起的次第。煩惱濁與見濁是根本;由這兩濁形成眾生濁;有了眾生,便有相續維持的命;這四濁經過一段時間,便名為劫濁。

四、第一問:五濁若障大,為何仍有人聞大

進入料揀。

問:如果五濁障礙大乘,為什麼《華嚴》會中有人尚未除去五濁,卻能聽聞大法?

答:這應當用四句分別。

第一,大乘根利而障重;因為根利,沉重的障礙也不能形成障礙。此土《華嚴》會中最初聽聞大乘的人,便屬這一句。

第二,根利而障輕。正文只列這一組,沒有另配人物。

第三,根鈍而障輕;他方淨土聽聞大乘的人,便屬這一句。

第四,根鈍而障重;如同此土舍利弗一類的人,必須先除去五濁,後來才能聽聞大乘。

五、第二問:五濁是否也障礙小乘

問:五濁會不會障礙小乘?

答:這也應當就小乘作四句分別。

第一,小乘根利而遮礙輕,障礙不能成為障礙,舍利弗便是這一類。

第二,根利而遮礙重,障礙仍不能成為障礙,央掘便是這一類。

第三,根鈍而遮礙輕,也不形成障礙,槃特便是這一類。

第四,根鈍而遮礙重,這才形成障礙;這一類人不能聽聞小乘,也不能因此得度。

六、第三問:不在《華嚴》、三藏而聞大小

問:另有人不在《華嚴》會中,也不在三藏教中,卻能聽聞大乘或小乘,這又是為什麼?

答:這要就四種教法而說,在每一教中又以四門分別。

根利而遮礙輕的人,聽聞非空非有門而得入;根利而遮礙重的人,聽聞亦空亦有門而得入;根鈍而遮礙輕的人,聽聞空門而得入;根鈍而遮礙重的人,聽聞有門而得入。

其中兩教的四門,依小乘作分別;另兩教的四門,依大乘作分別。若要逐一配合,還須仔細推究〔云云:以下從略〕。

七、第四問:為何一往說障大而不障小

問:概略而言,五濁為什麼障礙大乘,卻不障礙小乘?

答:眾生濁沉重,眾生把五陰妄計為常、樂、我、淨四德;如果直接聽見常與我,便會把錯誤執作正確。這如同舊醫愚頑,不知道乳藥有好、有壞,不知道疾病生起的根源,也不知道施藥時何時應開、何時應遮;因為完全不能明白,所以五濁障礙大乘。

經文說:『如果我只讚歎佛乘,眾生便會沉沒在苦中。』說的就是這個意思。

如果先聽聞無常、苦、空,眾生便會厭離生死、欣求涅槃,破除錯誤計著,所以五濁不障礙小乘。經文說:『正在這樣思惟時,十方諸佛全都出現,以清淨梵音安慰、教導我。』說的就是這個意思。

再依五濁說四悉檀。劫濁、命濁屬世界悉檀;眾生濁、見濁屬為人悉檀;煩惱濁屬對治悉檀。先用前三悉檀除去五濁,然後再為眾生宣說大乘第一義悉檀。

若依因果分別,煩惱、見二濁是因,其餘三濁是果;若依人法分別,眾生是一人,其餘四濁是四法;若依法與時分別,四濁是法,劫濁是一時。

若依三障分別,其中有兩種報障、兩種煩惱障,業障居於二者之間。若依因成、相續、相待三假分別,眾生是因成假,命是相續假,其餘三濁如何屬相待假,可以依例知道。若依受假、法假、名假分別,眾生是受假,其餘四濁是法假,名假則通於兩處。

若依凡聖分別,煩惱濁、見濁在凡夫,其餘三濁通於凡夫與聖者。若依長短分別,命短、劫長,其餘三濁通於長與短。劫只是一段時間,命則帶著色心之法來論時間。

若依內外分別,劫濁通於內、外,命濁只在有情內身。若依所害分別,三種小災傷害人而不傷害外物,三種大災傷害外物而不傷害人。若依所通界道分別,小劫只在人間,大劫通於色界,命則通於五道、三界。

劫濁是眾生共同所處的濁,其餘四濁則各各有別。小劫只是劫濁;大劫則通於有濁與無濁。人的壽命從八萬歲逐步減至十歲,名為一小劫;這樣增減往返八十次,名為大劫。

八、第五問:何者是五清

問:既然說有五濁,什麼又是五清?

答:可以準照邪、正三毒的例子來說。邪三毒是五濁,正三毒是五清;他方淨土沒有邪三毒,所以五濁的障礙較輕。這層意思可以依例知道〔云云:以下從略〕。

正文只用邪、正三毒作準例,沒有逐一列出五個固定的五清名稱。

九、揀偽敦真:誰是真弟子

從『如果我的弟子自稱』以下,是第四科:辨別虛偽而敦促真實。佛弟子如果能夠信受、理解,才是佛弟子;如果不能信解,便不是真弟子,也不是真阿羅漢。這段敦促、逼勸當時的大眾信受、理解。

依經文分為兩段:第一辨別真偽,第二開除並解釋疑問。辨別真偽又分兩層:第一,不曾聽聞、不曾知道的人不是真弟子;第二,已經聽聞卻不肯信受的人,成為增上慢者。

世間弟子會隨順老師所教之法,繼承法脈、傳續明燈。如果不曾聽聞、不曾知道,便沒有可隨順的法,怎能稱作弟子?

如來過去因五濁而開說三乘,你們隨順權法而得到涅槃;能夠聽聞、能夠知道,所以名為弟子。現在五濁已經除去,佛為你們宣說一乘,你們為什麼反而不聞、不知?

不聞,是沒有聽聞教法唯一;不知,是不知道所行唯一;不真,是沒有契合理一;不是弟子,是沒有成就人一。教、行、理、人四種一,在這裡得到完整配合。

接著,從經文再呼舍利弗以下,是第二層:不信便成增上慢。這段同樣是敦促他們生信。

為什麼?你自稱這是最後一身,其實尚有無量身,並不是最後一身;你自稱已到究竟,譬喻中離寶所尚有二百由旬,其實還沒有究竟。尚未得到卻自稱已得,難道不是增上慢嗎?

真阿羅漢在五濁除去、根機明利時,知道自己尚未究竟,也相信真實之法;知道這並非最後一身,所以不起增上慢。祂知道自己尚未究竟,卻信受真正的究竟,便是信理一;沒有增上慢,便成行一;所信的是唯一教法,便是教一;能作佛弟子,便是人一。

十、佛滅後的兩重開除

從『除了佛滅度以後』以下,是第二大段:先作開除,再解釋疑問。

第一重開除,是佛滅度以後,可以不把這種情形判成增上慢。第二重開除,是佛滅後善知識難遇、深奧經典難解,因此也可以不把這種情形判成增上慢。

如果佛在世,正在宣說這部經,聽者仍不信、不受,那便不是真阿羅漢,而成增上慢。如果有人在佛滅度後才證得阿羅漢,偏執權宜經典,不信圓滿之法,則暫且容許不把他判作增上慢。

又有人問:佛雖滅度,這部經仍在世間;若他不信、不受,難道不應當仍是增上慢嗎?

這裡再作開除。佛滅度後,雖然仍有此經,能解釋經文義理的人卻很難遇到;這使已得阿羅漢的人不能信解,因此也暫且容許不判為增上慢。這不是說佛滅後一切不信都成為正確,而是依現前有無佛、能否遇到解經之人,開除增上慢的判定。

十一、有餘之國、餘佛與《釋論》問答

接著解釋疑問。

問:如果佛滅後能解經的人很難遇到,已得阿羅漢的人是不是就永遠入涅槃?

答:這個人雖然生起自己已經滅度的想法,捨棄此生命以後,仍會生到三界以外的有餘之國;在那裡遇到其他佛,聽聞此經,便能明白決了。

《釋論》第九十三釋〈畢定品〉提出疑問:『阿羅漢所受的先世之身,這個身體必定應當滅去;他住在什麼地方,才能具足佛道?』

回答說:『阿羅漢在三界中的有漏因緣已經窮盡,不再生於三界。三界以外另有清淨佛土,連煩惱這個名稱都沒有;他在那個國土的佛前聽聞《法華經》,便能具足佛道。』

《釋論》隨即引用《法華經》說:『有阿羅漢如果沒有聽聞《法華》,便以為自己已得滅度;我會在其他國土為他說明這件事,你們全都將成佛。』

《釋論》既然引用《法華經》作證,現在解釋《法華經》,也還用《釋論》來疏通。

十二、南岳三解、瑤師與後一異解

南岳師對餘佛另有三種解釋。

第一,所謂餘佛,是四依;阿羅漢遇到四依,聽聞此經而得到明決。

第二,阿羅漢修習念佛定,見到十方諸佛,諸佛為他宣說此經,他便得到明決。

第三,凡夫行者受苦至極而發起懺悔,見到十方諸佛為他說法,也得到明決。

瑤師說:真實的阿羅漢必定自己知道《法華》而志求大乘;利根人能自己知道,中根、下根人則須由聽聞而知道,所以經中說聞知。哪裡會容許一位聖者在佛滅後沒有聽聞《法華》,或雖聽聞而不能相信,要等遇到其他佛才明白?末法凡夫尚且能信,何況聖者?所以經文所說『除了佛滅度以後』,應當是指凡夫。

又有人提出相反的說法:凡夫尚未證得法相,所見不明,執著也不堅固,所以反而容易相信;阿羅漢已證法相,所見分明,執著牢固,忽然聽見與原先不同的說法,未必立即信受,所以經文才說不信,這個道理必定如此。

這一說又援引舍利弗的疑問:『難道是魔化作佛,來擾亂我的心嗎?』若依這項解釋,遇到餘佛而決了的人是阿羅漢,不是凡夫〔云云:以下從略〕。

本論最後說,這只是一種不同的解釋,不採用這項意思。

十三、佛語為何沒有虛妄

從經文再呼舍利弗以下,是第五科:說明佛語沒有虛妄,以止息眾人誹謗的心。這一科分成三層。

第一,勸眾生相信釋迦佛所說真實:你們應當一心信解,受持佛語。

第二,勸眾生相信一切諸佛:諸佛所說沒有虛妄。諸佛所行之道相同,更應當信受。

第三,總結佛語確實不虛:除了所說的一佛乘以外,沒有另一個乘;唯一只有佛乘。

Words and Phrases of the Sutra of the Lotus Blossom of the Wondrous Dharma, Fascicle Four, Second Part. Taught by the Great Master Zhizhe of Tiantai.

I. Only Five Sections among the Six Meanings Appear in the Śākyamuni Chapter

Second is the extensive explanation of the Śākyamuni Buddha chapter. The original chapter framework has six meanings. The Śākyamuni chapter lacks the meaning of praising the rarity of the Dharma, so only five sections appear here: first, opening and revealing the provisional; second, revealing the real; third, citing the five turbidities to explain why skillful means are established; fourth, distinguishing the false and urging the assembly to believe and receive the single reality; fifth, explaining that the Buddha's words contain no falsehood.

In “I too am now like this,” “I” is Śākyamuni Buddha. Śākyamuni now teaches three vehicles first and one vehicle afterward, without differing from the four buddhas above, and therefore says that he too is like this.

“Knowing that living beings have various desires” means that living beings possess the faculties, natures, and desires of the five vehicles. The past is called faculty, the present desire, and the future nature. “The deep attachments in their minds” also refers to faculty. “Skillful means” means opening the provisional Dharmas of the three vehicles according to what is appropriate for living beings.

“All of these are to enable living beings to attain the one buddha vehicle” reveals the real. Buddha vehicle indicates that the Dharma taught is one. “All” indicates that the practice undertaken is one. The object known by the wisdom of all modes indicates that the principle realized is one. Here the three ones of teaching, practice, and principle are listed first; the one class of persons has not yet been listed.

II. Why Distinguish and Teach Three within the Pure, Single Reality?

Beginning with “Throughout the worlds of the ten directions there are not even two vehicles, how much less three,” the text enters the third section: citing the five turbidities to explain why the provisional is opened.

Before formally presenting the five turbidities, the passage first indicates its intent. The preceding text has already explained the buddhas' opening the provisional to reveal the real, but has not yet explained why they conceal the real and establish the provisional. That one real Dharma is pure, limpid, and undivided like empty space. Within it there are not even provisional Dharmas carrying two or three vehicles, much less provisional Dharmas establishing the three vehicles alone or the five vehicles alone.

Only because the obstructions of the five turbidities are heavy and the real Dharma cannot be taught directly must the provisional Dharmas of five alone and three alone be established, together with the provisional Dharmas carrying two and carrying three. The scripture therefore says that three are distinguished and taught within the one buddha vehicle. This “three” includes the three in carrying two and carrying three, as well as the three in five alone and three alone.

III. The Essences and Aspects of the Five Turbidities

The five turbidities are distinguished in four layers: first, announcing their number; second, listing their names; third, explaining their essences and aspects; fourth, explaining and concluding. The scripture itself clearly announces their number and lists their names, so these are not recopied here. The scriptural word “such” refers generally to the essences and aspects of the five turbidities.

First, the essences of the five turbidities.

The turbidity of the eon has no independent essence. An eon is an extended time, while a kṣaṇa is a brief time. The provisional name “turbidity of the eon” is established only because the other four turbidities gather within the same period. This is the meaning of the scripture's words “the disordered time of the turbidity of the eon.”

The turbidity of living beings likewise has no independent essence. It appropriates views and pride and establishes the provisional name “living being” upon retribution. This is the meaning of the scripture's words “living beings heavily defiled.”

The turbidity of afflictions takes the five dull agents as its essence. The turbidity of views takes the five sharp agents as its essence. The turbidity of life takes the continuous sustaining of form and mind as its essence. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

Next, the aspects of the five turbidities.

The aspect of the turbidity of the eon is the intensification and convergence of the other four turbidities during that period. When anger intensifies, there is the disaster of weapons and war. When greed intensifies, there is the disaster of famine. When delusion intensifies, there is the disaster of epidemic disease. When these three disasters occur together, afflictions become still more rampant, various false views still more blazing, and form and mind coarse, harmful, and corrupt. Reputations become defiled and the years and length of life are diminished, as all the turbidities converge.

This is like rushing water becoming muddy, with wind and waves churning and fish and dragons stirring it from within, leaving nowhere on which a person can rely; the conditions of that time make it so. It is also like the beginning of an eon of formation, when beings from the Heaven of Streaming Light fall to the ground and the ground causes them to develop desire; or like the gods of Trāyastriṃśa entering the Coarse and Harsh Garden and developing contentious minds because of that garden. These are called the aspects of the turbidity of the eon.

The aspect of the turbidity of afflictions has five similes. Greed is like the ocean receiving a hundred rivers and never being satisfied. Anger is like a poisonous snake drawing in venom and disturbing the world. Delusion is dark, stubborn, and intractable, blacker than lacquer and ink. Pride looks down from above, domineering and disregarding others without measure. Doubt is like a net: without faith, the real Dharma cannot be told to such a person. These are the aspects of the turbidity of afflictions.

The aspect of the turbidity of views is falsely claiming that a real person exists where there is no real subject, and denying that a true path exists where there actually is one. The sixteen views, sixty-two views, and others are like nets and dense forests in which people are bound and bent, unable to escape. This is the aspect of the turbidity of views.

The aspect of the turbidity of living beings is appropriating form and mind and establishing a controlling subject. It is also like birdlime, to which everything adheres. Living beings drift and wander through the six destinies, taking birth everywhere. In reality they are impoverished and short-lived, yet they are provisionally named long-lived and wealthy. This is the aspect of the turbidity of living beings.

The aspect of the turbidity of life is arising in the morning and dying by night, appearing during the day and vanishing by evening. It turns like waves and coils like smoke, never pausing for an instant. Such is the aspect of the turbidity of life. The aspects of the five turbidities are numerous and cannot all be described.

Next is the sequence in which they arise. The turbidities of afflictions and views are fundamental. From these two, the turbidity of living beings is formed. Once living beings exist, there is life that continuously sustains them. When these four turbidities pass through a period of time, it is called the turbidity of the eon.

IV. First Question: If the Five Turbidities Obstruct the Great, Why Do Some Still Hear It?

The analytical questions now begin.

Question: If the five turbidities obstruct the Great Vehicle, why could some people in the Avataṃsaka assembly hear the great Dharma before removing the five turbidities?

Answer: This should be distinguished through four propositions.

First, sharp Great Vehicle faculties and heavy obstructions. Because the faculties are sharp, even heavy obstructions cannot obstruct. Those who first heard the Great Vehicle in the Avataṃsaka assembly in this land belong to this proposition.

Second, sharp faculties and light obstructions. The body lists only this combination and assigns no separate person to it.

Third, dull faculties and light obstructions. Those who hear the Great Vehicle in pure lands elsewhere belong to this proposition.

Fourth, dull faculties and heavy obstructions. People like Śāriputra in this land must first remove the five turbidities and can hear the Great Vehicle only afterward.

V. Second Question: Do the Five Turbidities Also Obstruct the Lesser Vehicle?

Question: Do the five turbidities obstruct the Lesser Vehicle?

Answer: This too should be distinguished through four propositions concerning the Lesser Vehicle.

First, sharp Lesser Vehicle faculties and light coverings: the coverings cannot become an obstruction. Śāriputra belongs to this class.

Second, sharp faculties and heavy coverings: the coverings still cannot become an obstruction. Aṅgulimāla belongs to this class.

Third, dull faculties and light coverings: these too do not form an obstruction. Panthaka belongs to this class.

Fourth, dull faculties and heavy coverings: only these form an obstruction. Such people cannot hear the Lesser Vehicle and cannot thereby be liberated.

VI. Third Question: Hearing the Great or Lesser outside the Avataṃsaka and Tripiṭaka Teachings

Question: Other people can hear the Great or Lesser Vehicle even though they are neither in the Avataṃsaka assembly nor within the Tripiṭaka Teaching. Why is this?

Answer: This should be explained in terms of the four teachings, with four gateways distinguished within each.

Those with sharp faculties and light coverings hear the gateway of neither emptiness nor existence and enter. Those with sharp faculties and heavy coverings hear the gateway of both emptiness and existence and enter. Those with dull faculties and light coverings hear the gateway of emptiness and enter. Those with dull faculties and heavy coverings hear the gateway of existence and enter.

The four gateways of two teachings are distinguished in relation to the Lesser Vehicle; those of the other two are distinguished in relation to the Great Vehicle. Correlating them one by one requires further careful investigation. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

VII. Fourth Question: Why Is It Said Generally That They Obstruct the Great but Not the Lesser?

Question: Generally speaking, why do the five turbidities obstruct the Great Vehicle but not the Lesser Vehicle?

Answer: Because the turbidity of living beings is heavy, living beings falsely reckon the five aggregates to possess the four virtues of permanence, bliss, self, and purity. If they directly hear permanence and self, they will take the false to be correct. This is like the stubborn ignorance of an old physician who does not know that milk-medicine can be beneficial or harmful, does not know the source from which illness arises, and does not know when medicine should be allowed or prohibited. Because such a person understands nothing, the five turbidities obstruct the Great Vehicle.

The scripture says: “If I praised only the buddha vehicle, living beings would sink into suffering.” This is its meaning.

If living beings first hear impermanence, suffering, and emptiness, they reject birth-and-death, aspire to nirvāṇa, and break false reckonings. The five turbidities therefore do not obstruct the Lesser Vehicle. The scripture says: “While I was reflecting in this way, all the buddhas throughout the ten directions appeared and comforted and instructed me with pure Brahmā voices.” This is its meaning.

The four siddhāntas are further explained through the five turbidities. The turbidities of the eon and life belong to the worldly siddhānta. The turbidities of living beings and views belong to the siddhānta for each person. The turbidity of afflictions belongs to the counteractive siddhānta. The first three siddhāntas initially remove the five turbidities, after which the Great Vehicle siddhānta of ultimate meaning is taught to living beings.

Distinguished in terms of cause and effect, the turbidities of afflictions and views are two causes and the other three turbidities are effects. Distinguished in terms of persons and dharmas, the living being is one person and the other four turbidities are four dharmas. Distinguished in terms of dharmas and time, four turbidities are dharmas and the turbidity of the eon is one time.

Distinguished in terms of the three obstructions, there are two retributive obstructions and two afflictive obstructions, with karmic obstruction between them. Distinguished through the three provisional designations of causal formation, continuity, and relativity, the living being is a causally formed provisional designation, life a continuous provisional designation, and the other three turbidities can be understood by analogy as relative provisional designations. Distinguished through received, Dharma, and name provisional designations, the living being is the received provisional designation, the other four turbidities are Dharma provisional designations, and name provisional designation extends through both.

Distinguished in terms of ordinary and noble persons, the turbidities of afflictions and views belong to ordinary beings, while the other three extend through ordinary and noble persons. Distinguished in terms of long and short, life is short and the eon long, while the other three extend through both long and short. An eon is only a period of time; life is a time discussed together with the dharmas of form and mind.

Distinguished in terms of inner and outer, the turbidity of the eon extends through both, while the turbidity of life occurs only within the sentient body. Distinguished by what is harmed, the three minor disasters harm people but not external things, while the three great disasters harm external things but not people. Distinguished by the realms and destinies through which they extend, a minor eon occurs only in the human realm, a great eon extends through the form realm, and life extends through the five destinies and three realms.

The turbidity of the eon is shared by living beings, while each of the other four is distinct. A minor eon is only an eon of turbidity; a great eon extends through both the presence and absence of turbidity. Human life gradually diminishes from eighty thousand years to ten years, which is called one minor eon. Eighty cycles of increase and decrease are called a great eon.

VIII. Fifth Question: What Are the Five Purities?

Question: If there are five turbidities, what are the five purities?

Answer: They can be explained by analogy with the deviant and correct three poisons. The deviant three poisons are the five turbidities; the correct three poisons are the five purities. Pure lands elsewhere lack the deviant three poisons, so the obstruction of the five turbidities is lighter. The meaning can be understood by analogy. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

The body uses only the deviant and correct three poisons as an analogy and does not list five fixed names for the five purities.

IX. Distinguishing the False and Encouraging the Genuine: Who Is a Genuine Disciple?

Beginning with “If my disciples call themselves,” the text enters the fourth section: distinguishing the false and encouraging the genuine. Buddha-disciples who can believe, receive, and understand are Buddha-disciples. Those unable to believe and understand are neither genuine disciples nor genuine arhats. This passage urges and presses the present assembly to believe, receive, and understand.

According to the scripture, it is divided into two passages: first, distinguishing the genuine and false; second, making exclusions and resolving doubts. Distinguishing the genuine and false has two further layers: first, those who have neither heard nor known are not genuine disciples; second, those who have heard but refuse to believe and receive become persons of overweening pride.

Worldly disciples follow the Dharma taught by their teachers, inherit the Dharma-lineage, and transmit the lamp. If they have neither heard nor known, there is no Dharma for them to follow. How could they be called disciples?

Because of the five turbidities, the Tathāgata formerly opened and taught the three vehicles; you followed the provisional Dharma and attained nirvāṇa. Because you could hear and know, you were called disciples. Now that the five turbidities have been removed and the Buddha teaches the one vehicle for you, why do you instead neither hear nor know?

Not hearing means not having heard the one teaching. Not knowing means not knowing the one practice. Being false means not according with the one principle. Not being disciples means not having accomplished the one class of persons. The four ones of teaching, practice, principle, and persons are fully correlated here.

Next, beginning where the scripture again addresses Śāriputra, is the second layer: disbelief makes one a person of overweening pride. This passage likewise urges them to give rise to faith.

Why? You call this your final body, but you still have immeasurable bodies and this is not the final body. You claim to have reached the ultimate, but in the simile the place of treasure still lies two hundred yojanas away and you have not actually reached the ultimate. If you have not attained but claim attainment, is that not overweening pride?

A genuine arhat, when the five turbidities have been removed and the faculties are clear and sharp, knows that the ultimate has not yet been reached and believes the real Dharma. Such a person knows that this is not the final body and therefore does not give rise to overweening pride. Knowing that the ultimate has not yet been reached yet believing and receiving the true ultimate is belief in the one principle. Being free of overweening pride accomplishes the one practice. The one teaching is what is believed. Being able to become a Buddha-disciple is the one class of persons.

X. Two Exclusions after the Buddha's Extinction

Beginning with “except after the Buddha's extinction,” the text enters the second major passage: first making exclusions, then resolving doubts.

The first exclusion is that after the Buddha's extinction, such a situation need not be judged a case of overweening pride. The second is that after the Buddha's extinction spiritual friends are difficult to encounter and profound scriptures difficult to understand, so this situation likewise need not be judged a case of overweening pride.

If the Buddha is present and teaching this scripture, but listeners still disbelieve and refuse to receive it, they are not genuine arhats and become persons of overweening pride. If someone attains arhatship only after the Buddha's extinction, clings one-sidedly to provisional scriptures, and disbelieves the perfect Dharma, it is provisionally allowed that this person not be judged a person of overweening pride.

Someone further asks: Although the Buddha has entered extinction, this scripture still remains in the world. If that person disbelieves and refuses to receive it, should this not still be overweening pride?

A further exclusion is made here. After the Buddha's extinction, although this scripture remains, people capable of explaining its wording and meaning are difficult to encounter. This prevents those who have attained arhatship from believing and understanding, so it is provisionally allowed that they not be judged persons of overweening pride. This does not mean that all disbelief after the Buddha's extinction becomes correct; the judgment of overweening pride is excluded according to whether a buddha is present and whether a person able to explain the scripture can be encountered.

XI. The Land with Remainder, Other Buddhas, and the Question and Answer from the Treatise

Next, the doubt is resolved.

Question: If people able to explain the scripture are difficult to encounter after the Buddha's extinction, do those who have attained arhatship enter nirvāṇa forever?

Answer: Although such a person gives rise to the thought of having attained extinction, after relinquishing this life that person will still be born in a land with remainder beyond the three realms. There, upon encountering other buddhas and hearing this scripture, the person can understand it decisively.

Fascicle Ninety-Three of the Treatise on the Great Perfection of Wisdom, in its explanation of the Determination chapter, raises this question: “An arhat's body received from a former life must necessarily pass into extinction. Where does the arhat abide in order to complete the buddha path?”

It answers: “The causes and conditions of the contaminants in the three realms have been exhausted for an arhat, who is not born again in the three realms. Beyond the three realms are pure buddha-lands in which even the name affliction does not exist. Before the buddha of such a land, the arhat hears the Lotus Sūtra and can complete the buddha path.”

The Treatise then cites the Lotus Sūtra: “If arhats have not heard the Lotus, they suppose that they have attained extinction. In other lands I will explain this matter for them: all of you will become buddhas.”

Since the Treatise cites the Lotus Sūtra as proof, the present explanation of the Lotus Sūtra likewise uses the Treatise to elucidate it.

XII. Nanyue's Three Explanations, Master Yao, and a Further Alternative Interpretation

Master Nanyue gives three further explanations of “other buddhas.”

First, “other buddhas” means persons of the four reliances. An arhat encounters persons of the four reliances, hears this scripture, and attains decisive understanding.

Second, an arhat cultivates buddha-recollection samādhi and sees the buddhas throughout the ten directions. Those buddhas teach this scripture, and the arhat attains decisive understanding.

Third, when an ordinary practitioner reaches the extremity of suffering and gives rise to repentance, that person sees the buddhas throughout the ten directions teach the Dharma and likewise attains decisive understanding.

Master Yao says that a genuine arhat necessarily knows the Lotus directly and aspires to the Great Vehicle. Those of sharp faculties can know it themselves, while those of middling and dull faculties must know it through hearing; this is why the scripture speaks of hearing and knowing. How could a noble person after the Buddha's extinction be allowed not to have heard the Lotus, or to have heard yet been unable to believe, and then have to encounter another buddha before understanding? Even ordinary beings in the Final Dharma can believe, how much more noble persons. Thus the scripture's words “except after the Buddha's extinction” should refer to ordinary beings.

Someone else presents the opposite explanation. Ordinary beings have not yet realized the characteristics of dharmas; what they see is unclear and their attachments are not firm, so they instead believe easily. Arhats have realized the characteristics of dharmas; what they see is clear and their attachments firm. Upon suddenly hearing a teaching different from what they knew before, they may not immediately believe and receive. This is why the scripture speaks of disbelief; the principle must be so.

This interpretation further cites Śāriputra's doubt: “Could Māra have assumed the Buddha's form to disturb my mind?” According to this explanation, the one who encounters another buddha and attains decisive understanding is an arhat, not an ordinary being. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

The root treatise finally says that this is merely a different interpretation and does not adopt its meaning.

XIII. Why the Buddha's Words Contain No Falsehood

Beginning where the scripture again addresses Śāriputra is the fifth section: explaining that the Buddha's words contain no falsehood in order to stop the assembly's impulse to slander. This section has three layers.

First, living beings are exhorted to believe the reality taught by Śākyamuni Buddha: you should single-mindedly believe and understand, receive and uphold the Buddha's words.

Second, living beings are exhorted to believe all buddhas: what the buddhas teach contains no falsehood. Because the path practiced by all buddhas is the same, it should be believed and received all the more.

Third, the truthfulness of the Buddha's words is concluded: apart from the one buddha vehicle taught, there is no other vehicle; there is only the buddha vehicle.

方便品釋·偈頌(頌四佛章)Skillful Means · Verse: The Four-Buddha Chapter

全文五層 →Full five layers →
白話Vernacular

一、許答偈:揀眾與誡聽

第二大段是偈頌,共有一百二十一行,分成兩部分。最初四行加一句,重頌前面佛陀允許回答;後面一百一十六行加三句,重頌前面的正式回答。長行中的許答原有三層,就是順許、告誡、揀眾;偈中不重頌順許,只重頌揀眾和告誡。

揀眾又分兩段。最初三行半,重頌五千人退席;其次兩句,重頌留下的大眾已經清淨。再下一句重頌誡聽,也就是要舍利弗好好聽聞。

增上慢、我慢、不信這三種過失,出家、在家四眾都可能有。不過,出家男女二眾多修道、得禪,有人錯把禪定當作聖果,所以較容易生起增上慢;在家人憑自己的身分而矜高,較容易生起我慢。本論又沿用古代判語,說女人智慧淺而較多生起邪僻之見。這是本段分說四眾三失的語境。

經中說,他們看不見自己的過失。三種過失遮蔽了心,使人隱藏瑕疵、宣揚自己的德行,不能回頭省察自己,這就是沒有慚愧的人。若能自己看見過失,才是尚有羞恥心的僧人。

所謂戒有缺漏,律儀戒有失,叫作缺;定共戒、道共戒有失,叫作漏。因為沒有道共戒、定共戒,內心生起惡念,就像美玉內含瑕疵;因為沒有律儀戒,身體、言語在外妄動,就像美玉把瑕疵露在外面。遮覆自己的罪過,反而把它護住不肯捨去,所以叫作護惜。

所謂小智,是沒有得到有學、無學聖者的智慧,卻有世間的小聰明,妄把有漏智慧認作無漏智慧;這比本已稱小的智慧更小,所以叫作小中之小。

所謂糟糠,是說他們沒有無漏禪定的滋潤,如同只剩酒糟;又沒有通達義理的智慧,如同只剩穀糠。這五千人即使有世間禪定,也如糟;即使有文字上的理解,也如糠。他們封執文字,失去文字所要表達的義理,就像糠中沒有米。再說,糟糠譬喻他們沒有能夠發起大法的大機,枝葉譬喻他們不是足以承受大法的好器。兩方面都不能任用,所以必須讓他們離席。

經中說舍利弗應當善聽,正是重頌前面告誡而後允許宣說,要他專心聽聞。

二、正答總科與四佛章

從諸佛所得之法以下,共一百一十六行加三句,重頌前面的正式回答,又分成兩大段。最初從諸佛所得之法以下,有七十三行加一句,重頌四佛章;從下一單元『今我也同樣如此』以下,有四十三行半,重頌釋迦佛章。

四佛章再分四門。第一,諸佛門,共三十四行加三句;第二,過去佛門,共二十七行半;第三,未來佛門,共六行半;第四,現在佛門,共四行半。

諸佛門的偈頌與前面長行有三種不同。第一,長行和偈頌彼此各有對方沒有的內容:長行有讚歎佛法稀有,沒有五濁;偈頌有五濁,沒有讚歎佛法。第二,前後次序交錯出現:長行先讚歎佛法,接著說佛語不虛,然後說開權、顯實;偈頌先說開權、顯實,最後才說不虛。第三,開合不同:長行把勸信和不虛合在一起說;偈頌把勸信分出,五濁段落插在勸信與不虛之間。

本論又以私下所見補充第四項:長行以釋迦佛的方便,說明諸佛所施之權;偈頌則以釋迦佛所顯的真實,說明諸佛都是顯示一乘。這一項是另加的讀法,不把前面明列的三種改成四種。

諸佛門本身分成五段。第一,從諸佛所得之法以下五行加三句,重頌諸佛施權。第二,從「我說是方便」以下十三行,重頌諸佛顯實。第三,從信受、歸依佛陀以下四行半,重頌諸佛章的勸信。第四,科標從「若我過眾生」以下九行半,長篇重頌五濁。第五,從佛有方便力以下兩行,重頌前面佛語不虛。

三、諸佛如何施權

第一段施權又分兩層。最初四行加一句,正面重頌施設方便;其次一行半,總結為什麼要施設方便。

諸佛所得之法,是說佛陀修道以後得到種種權巧之法。經中說祂有無量方便力,重頌前面以無數方便、種種因緣演說諸法。經中又說眾生心中所念,重頌佛陀隨眾生所宜而說法;偈中更廣泛列出隨宜的相貌:佛陀照見九法界眾生之機,為他們宣說七種方便。九種機和七種方便不能作固定的一對一判配,所以總說若干。

依眾生當下所喜好的機宜,應用世界悉檀;依他過去習成的性情,應用為人悉檀;依他善惡業中需要對治之處,應用對治悉檀。現在生起的希望叫作念,法門彼此不同叫作種種,過去所習叫作性,現在欣慕樂求叫作欲。也可以說,反覆習染某種欲求,逐漸形成性情;性情形成以後,又生起相應的習慣與欲求〔云云〕。

至於善業、惡業,七種方便彼此輾轉相望,可以分成善、惡〔云云〕。佛陀以權智觀照眾生種種方便、性情、欲求,然後運用各種因緣、譬喻,隨各自所宜而宣說九部經;十二部的名義,如《法華玄義》所說。

經中從根鈍、喜愛小法以下的一行半,是總結施權的用意。眾生前世根鈍,今世便沒有堪聞大法之機,不能聽受深妙之道;前世貪著深重,今世被種種苦惱逼迫,只適合先聽小法,因此佛陀為他宣說涅槃。

四、顯實:理、人、教、行歸一

從「我說是方便」以下十三行,是第二段重頌諸佛顯實,分為四層。

第一層三行,重頌理一。使眾生進入佛慧,是重頌前面佛陀為一大事因緣出世;決定宣說大乘,總括開、示、悟、入佛知見;說九部法以進入大乘為根本,則重頌進入佛知見。方便所引歸的真理只有一個。

第二層從佛子心淨以下四行半,重頌諸佛如來只教化菩薩,說明人一。長行只直接說教化菩薩,偈頌則廣說各種方便身分的人都成為真實佛子。心地清淨的佛子,是別教之人;佛為這類佛子宣說大乘經,他受記以後心生歡喜,便成為圓教真實之人。

經中所說聲聞,也兼攝緣覺;所說菩薩,也兼攝修六度的菩薩、通教菩薩等。所謂都將成佛而沒有疑問,是說七種方便人沒有一個不是佛子,這就是重頌人一。

第三層從十方佛土以下一行加三句,重頌如來只以一佛乘為眾生說法,沒有其他二乘、三乘。十方諸佛只說一法,這就是教一;其餘假立的名稱,只是用來引導眾生的方便教。經文牒舉假名三教,彰顯佛慧一教,文字很分明。

所謂沒有其餘乘,本論解作沒有別教之中圓理進入別教後所餘的差別;所謂無二,是沒有通教之中半字、滿字相對的二;所謂無三,是沒有三藏教中的三乘。這些二、三都只是假立的名稱,用來引導各類眾生;如今所顯,只有圓滿的一佛乘。

第四層從諸佛出世、只有一件真實之事以下三行加三句,重頌諸佛一切所作恆常只為一件大事,這是行一。事就是行。佛陀終究不以小乘濟度眾生,重頌祂恆常只為一大事而作。佛陀自己安住大乘,以自己所得之法度化眾生,重頌祂只以佛知見開示眾生、使眾生悟入。最後一行解釋祂為什麼不以小乘作究竟濟度。

五、勸信:由果、由因

從眾生信受歸依佛陀以下四行半,是第三段重頌勸信;長行已說,大眾應當相信佛陀所說。偈頌再分兩層:最初二行半,舉佛果勸信;從舍利弗當知以下二行,舉佛因勸信。

舉果勸信又分內心和外色。眾生若信受、歸依佛陀,應知如來不會欺誑:佛心清淨,無明、慳吝垢染及一切惡都已斷除,祂從清淨心中說法,所以可信。從佛以莊嚴相好莊嚴身體以下一行,說明外在色相。祂的身相光明顯著、端正莊嚴;內心沒有黑暗迷惑,外在顯發光明,所以口中也沒有欺誑。祂為大眾尊敬,所說又以大乘為印,應當信受。

從佛本來所立誓願以下二行,是舉因勸信,也分兩層。第一,從佛本立誓以下一行,舉昔日誓願;第二,從昔日所願以下一行,說明如今願已滿足。佛昔日所發的誓願,不只誓求自己成就菩提,也誓願眾生共同進入佛慧。如今為酬答這一誓願,所以宣說此法;這也是可信的。

如今佛陀的菩提已經圓滿,眾生也由此得以進入佛慧。舍利弗既親自證知佛慧,也就能驗知佛昔日的誓願不是虛妄。這便總結由佛因勸信。

有人問:佛的本誓既然普遍攝受一切眾生,如今眾生還有這麼多,怎能說誓願已經圓滿?

回答是:佛陀在過去、現在、未來三世利益眾生;此處只是就祂現在這一段教化而說願滿。

六、五濁總說與眾生三義

從經中『如果我遇到眾生』以下九行半,是第四段舉出五濁。長行把五濁放在釋迦佛章之後;偈頌先在總說諸佛門的末尾安置五濁,後面的釋迦佛門又會重說。這表示諸佛同樣出現在五濁惡世,都是先施設三乘,然後顯示一乘。

這一段分成四層。第一,一行總說五濁障礙大法。第二,六行分別說明五濁障三。第三,一行說佛因五濁而方便宣說小法。第四,一行半說佛為了大法而宣說小法,以小法對治五濁,使普度眾生的大願得以興起。

本論先從「眾生」一詞說起。《中阿含》第十二卷說,世界初成時,光音天人下降生到世間,還沒有男女、尊卑之別,大家共同生在世間,所以稱作眾生。這是依最初共同出生來說。若說聚合眾陰而假立一個名稱叫眾生,則是依一期生命所受果報來說。若說在處處反覆受生所以名為眾生,則是依業力在五道中流轉來說。

《正法念處經》說十種眾生,就是長、短、方、圓、三角、青、黃、赤、白、紫。

什麼叫眾生生死長?在地獄時,身體承受不可思議的痛苦,心中又生起無量無邊的惡念;在畜生時,身體彼此吞食,心中彼此逼惱;在餓鬼時,身體像燃燒的山,心如沸騰的鍋,邪見熾盛,抵觸暴戾而愚癡凶惡;在人中時,身、口、意恆常做不利益之事,使自己勞苦,又恆常想著不利益之事,使自己被纏縛;在天上時,沉溺六塵,放縱嬉戲,不聞正法,堵塞福德根源。這叫眾生生死長。

什麼叫眾生生死短?在地獄時,能於一念間寂靜其心而受戒;在畜生時,能於一念間靜心依止三寶;在餓鬼時,能於一念間靜心、安靜諸根;在人中時,能修六度、奉養父母、敬重三寶,以善行莊嚴身、口、意;在天上時,能捨天樂,持戒、樂禪,教化他人、讀誦經典,修梵行而少語。這叫眾生生死短。

什麼叫眾生方生死?如欝單越人,對一切物都沒有我所之心,捨身後必生天上,從一層天又向上一層天,只朝善處上升,所以叫方楞的生死。

什麼叫眾生圓生死?只在三途、四趣中團團旋轉,如旋火、迴煙一般,這就是圓生死。什麼叫三角生死?就是善業、不善業、無記業三類。什麼叫青生死?恆常進入黑暗地獄,心中常懷恐怖。什麼叫黃生死?餓鬼飢餓羸瘦,形色萎黃。什麼叫赤生死?畜生彼此吞食,流血鮮明。什麼叫白生死?就是人中、天中的白業善道;天人臨死時,其他天人對他說,他將生到人道去;人臨死時,親友對他說,他將生到天上去。由此可知,人、天兩處是白生死。本論列出紫色,但此處沒有另作解釋。

同經第五卷又說,心把地獄畫成黑色,把餓鬼畫成鴿色,把畜生畫成黃色,把人畫成紅色,把天畫成白色。有人問,這一組顏色為什麼和上文不同?回答是:上文說五道果報,這裡說眾生造作五道之業,所以不同〔云云〕。

像這樣的眾生若與佛相遇,眾生正被痛苦煎迫,諸佛則以大悲救濟群生;佛悲與眾生苦彼此相對,所以叫作相遇。再者,佛的如與眾生的如,同是一如而沒有兩個如;本性彼此相關,所以也叫相遇。

大悲原本恆常憐愍眾生。若佛只用人天善法教導眾生,便如同自己墮在黑暗迷惑中,只讓眾生免除青、黃、赤、紫、方、圓、楞、角等生死,而沒有教他佛道,這是不可能的。若佛遇到眾生,只教他修小乘,便如同自己墮入慳吝,不肯給與大法;這也不可能,因為那只是使眾生出離二十五有。若佛只教眾生通教、別教,便如同自己墮於偏僻,失去佛知見;這同樣不可能。

如今佛要使一切眾生得到實相妙慧,體達一切都是佛法,沒有一處不是正道。這才是把佛道全部教給眾生,使生死之苦永遠窮盡。佛陀恆常如此宣說,只因眾生根鈍、罪重,不能完全依祂的願望立即成辦。

過去有一尊佛,名叫住無住佛,曾發願使自己國土中的眾生在同一天、同一時成佛,也在同一天入滅。賢劫以前又有平等佛,也發願使自己國土和十方眾生都在同一天成佛,並在同一天入滅。

有人因此追問:到了今日還有佛,也還有眾生,應當怎麼理解?佛陀說,且止、且止,祂先前所說,是指已經得到人身的人。又問:可曾有人發願使五道眾生同一天成佛?佛答:不能以不堪受道的身形直接成就無上道,必須先教化三惡趣眾生,使他們得到人身或天身,然後才能依願成道。三惡趣不是善道,怎能就在那種身形中成佛?譬如有人求取珍寶聚,不能到虛空中求,必須先有可以承載寶物的所在。

七、五濁別釋、權說小法與不虛

從經中『我知道這些眾生』以下六行,分別說五濁,共有五項。

第一,兩行說眾生濁。所謂善本,就是真如實相。眾生不依這一善本種下善根,所以不能感得大法;他們堅固貪著五欲,五欲又是一切惡的根本。從愚癡和有愛,便生起執我的病。

第二,從受胎的微細形體以下一行,說命濁。若依觀心解釋,一念心生起,就為未來造業;業好比胎,胎業無窮,世世相續而不斷,不斷就是增長。受胎時的微細形體,就是五陰;陰又名世。壽命連續維持諸陰,使它們進入世間,從最初薄酪般的胎相一直延續到衰老、死亡,所以稱為世世增長,這就是命濁。

《受陰身經》說,凡夫受身,第一個七日還沒有變異;第二個七日生出形相,像薄酪;第三個七日像厚酪;第四個七日像凝酥;第五個七日像陶坏;第六個七日像肉團;第七個七日,肉團生出五個疱,形成頭、手、腳等;第八個七日又生五疱,就是一個頭、兩個肩膊、兩個手腕;第九個七日繼續生出二十四疱,其中四疱形成眼、耳、鼻、舌,二十疱形成二十指。到第十七個七日,腹部形相顯現,皮、骨等種種不同形相逐漸分開。

又生出七百條筋、七千條脈;身體需要哪一種相,便由相應的風染成。需要白相,就由白風染成,其他顏色也依相應之風而成。由香風,所以身體安穩端正;由臭風,所以身體不安穩,形貌醜陋邪戾。出胎以後食用五穀,身中便生出八萬戶蟲。

第三,從進入邪見稠密之林以下一行,說見濁。五種見彼此交加,如樹林稠密繁茂。執著有,是常見;執著無,是斷見。由這兩種根本見,生出六十二見。

另一種說法是:外道對我有四種計著。第一,色就是我;第二,離開色另有我;第三,色大我小,我住在色中;第四,我大色小,色住在我中。對受、想、行、識四陰也各作四種計著,合為二十;再把二十配到過去、現在、未來三世,成為六十,加上斷、常兩種根本見,就是六十二。也可依《大品般若經》所說來理解。

第四,從深深貪著虛妄法以下一行,重頌煩惱濁,依經文可知。第五,從千萬億劫以下一行,重頌劫濁。長久沒有佛法,就是劫濁;又因前面四濁都聚集在一段時劫之中,所以總名劫濁。經中說這樣的人難以教化,是因五濁形成障礙,使他不能信受一乘,因而難度。

若依觀心解釋,念念生起惡覺,始終沒有正觀能使自己覺悟,就是心中不見佛;心中沒有八正道,就是不聞法。這樣的心很難被度化。

從佛告舍利弗『因此我施設方便』以下一行,是第三層:權巧地為眾生宣說小法,依經文可知。

從『我雖說涅槃,這也不是真實寂滅』以下一行半,是第四層:終究要使眾生進入大法。若以分析方法窮盡三界虛妄,滅除色法而取著空理,本論判這並不是真實寂滅;若能體達無明本來沒有自性、常自寂靜,才是真實寂滅。然而,本無雖然寂靜,如果不修道,仍沒有途徑與它契合。所以經中說,佛子修道完成,來世將得作佛。

從佛有方便力以下兩行,是第五段,重頌前面佛語不虛。長行說,大眾應當相信佛所說的話不虛妄;勸信已在前面重頌完畢,這裡再重頌不虛。最初兩句說釋迦佛先開示三乘,接著兩句說諸佛後來顯示真實,彼此互相呈現;最後一行正說不虛。前面權說、後面實說,都是誠實之言,不應生疑。

八、過去佛:由開三到五乘顯一

從過去無數劫以下,是第二大門,共二十七行半,重頌過去佛章,分為兩部分。最初二行重頌開出三乘,依經文可知;從諸位世尊以下二十五行半,重頌顯示一乘。前面長行所說顯實兼有理、人、教、行四一,這裡的偈頌全都重頌。

顯一又分兩層。第一,一行略頌前三種一:諸佛都說一乘法,是教一;教化無量眾生,是人一;使眾生進入佛道,是理一,同時也兼得行一。

第二,從諸位大聖主以下二十四行半,約五乘廣泛重頌顯一。這一層先總說、後別說。最初一行半,總約五乘顯一:天、人及各類眾生,是舉出各乘之人,說明人一;佛更以不同方便教化,是舉出各種行,顯示行一,也兼得教一;第一義就是理一。

所謂不同方便,須分兩種情形。正因佛性就是第一義理;若用圓妙正觀觀照它,這本身就是實相方便,不稱為異方便。若用七方便的觀法幫助顯出第一義,相對而言,才稱為異方便。

從若有眾生以下二十三行,是分別依五乘顯示真實,又分三段:第一,二行開顯菩薩乘;第二,一行開顯聲聞、緣覺二乘;第三,二十行開顯天、人二乘。

第一,從若有眾生之類以下二行,開顯菩薩乘。如果依五乘來解,只是修六度的三藏菩薩乘;如果依七方便來解,還兼攝通教、別教菩薩乘。為什麼?因為三教大乘都修六度,只是運心不同:依有相心修六度,是三藏菩薩;依無相心修,是通教菩薩;依非相、非無相而有次第地修六度,是別教菩薩。如今經文只列六度,尚不能確定判屬哪一種。

查考上文所說更用異方便,不只指六度菩薩,也包括三教菩薩的方便。過去所聞之法,都已開成教一;過去所修六度,也已開成行一;這些人都已開成人一;他們都已成佛道,也就是理一。

第二,從諸佛滅度以後、若人心地善良柔軟以下一行,開顯聲聞、緣覺都進入一乘。怎麼知道這裡兼攝二乘?《大品般若經》讚歎阿羅漢心地調柔,《淨名經》又說安住調伏心是賢聖行,所以可以知道。過去的善軟心都已開成行一,這些人是人一,成就佛道是理一。

第三,從供養舍利以下二十行,開顯天、人乘。經文沒有直接標明天乘、人乘,只說造像、起塔,有專心、散亂等不同情形,所以本論由此知道是天、人善業。

地師另有一種解釋。他說,童子是童真地,沒有二乘與凡夫偏在兩邊的欲心;聚沙作塔,沙表示無所執著,塔表示眾行積集,其中含藏正覺之心。地師認為,這樣把義理會入無生,是深刻的理解。

本論認為,這一解釋既違背文字,又在豎向位次上過於狹窄。為什麼?登地菩薩本來就應當成佛,好比阿修羅渡海,並不稀奇;經文現在正以幼童遊戲聚沙、散亂心唱歌,指出極微小的善便含顯著的佛因,如凡夫渡海一般不可思議。佛陀分明是廣泛會攝五乘,連毫末之善都不遺漏;地師卻捨棄這一廣收之意,直接只取無生。若照那種解法,恐怕連二乘都不能攝受,何況凡夫?就深義來說,所歸可以一致;若論廣攝,則違背經文。

九、人天小善、三佛性與緣因十目

有人問:人、天的小善,本應停留在相應果報中,為什麼經文都說這些人已經成佛道?

回答是:這裡應當用三佛性義說明。《大般涅槃經》說,有一種佛性,善根人有,一闡提人沒有;本論把它判作人天小善。低頭、舉手,是堆山時放下的第一筐土;合抱的大樹,也從最初微細的嫩芽開始。過去方便尚未開顯時,只說這些善行停留在果報中;如今把方便行開顯出來,便知道它就是緣因佛性,能夠趣向菩提,成就顯實之義。

天人二十行再分兩層:前十九行,約天、人小善成為緣因種子,以此說明顯實;後一行,約了因種子說明顯實。前十九行又分十項。

第一,最初三行半,約造塔說明天乘。造塔之人在因地能專心至誠,傾盡財物、捨出珍寶;果報成熟時,自然得受快樂,所以本論判為天乘。木櫁是長安的一種木材,也可以用來造像。《金光明經》說,把如芥粟大小的佛舍利放在小塔中,便有三十三天的自然果報,正可說明此義。

第二,從童子遊戲以下一行,說童子以沙作塔,是人業。因地只是泛泛、悠然而作善;感果時仍須有意用功求取快樂,所以判為人業。

第三,從有人為佛建立形像以下四行,約一心造像說明天業。《優婆塞戒經》不許用膠,犯者得失意罪;而《法華經》這裡卻說可以用膠。古師解釋,外國用的是樹膠。光宅說,有些地方造像確實必須用牛皮膠,才聽許使用;如果有其他材料,就不應使用。另有人說,可以用大豆汁代替澄清的膠液。三說各自分列。

不過,本論仍說牛皮終究是不淨物,後來會招感不淨果報。不清淨的錢財不適合直接用來造像,但可以換成如法的清淨錢財,再用以造像。《地持經》不准用雌黃等臭物;《戒經》不許造半身佛像,否則得失意罪,善相不能生起,墮落在生死中。

造像各有它所要表現的儀態。若造當堂說法的佛,必須是坐像;若造示現消息的佛,可以是坐像,也可以是臥像;若造正在行動的佛,便應是立像。至於弟子,在塔殿中立佛像之前不得坐,因為那裡確定屬佛所在。若在白衣人家或其他地方,坐佛像前的人不能長久站立,請求坐下,可以允許;立佛像前則不得坐〔云云〕。

第四,從童子遊戲畫像以下一行,說明人業。第五,從這些人以下一行半,總結顯實:這些人都成為人一;逐漸積聚功德,具足大悲心,是行一;成就佛道,是理一。既然成佛,又能以四一教化,只教菩薩,就是教一〔云云〕。

第六,從有人在塔廟中供養以下三行半,約色、聲等各種塵境供養說明天業。銅鈸一詞,長安人把露盤稱作銅鈸;由於譯經是在當地進行,所以經中採用當地名稱。

第七,從有人以散亂心供養以下一行,約散心用一朵花等塵境供養說明人業。第八,從有人禮拜以下一行,約身體禮敬說明天、人之業。五體投地的上等禮拜,是天業;合掌、低頭的中等禮拜,是人業。

第九,從以這些供養以下一行半,再作總結。這不只顯示行者自己由顯實而成就佛道,也能由開顯方便而在化緣如薪已盡時示現涅槃〔云云〕。

第十,從有人以散亂心進入塔廟、一稱南無佛以下一行,約口業說明。依前面各項,本應同時具有天業、人業;這裡只列出人業〔云云〕。

南無二字有許多傳釋。有人解作『度我、度我,可以把救度施給眾生』。但若佛陀回答說『諸佛救度我』,語義就不方便,所以本論不取這一解。

《五戒經》把南無解作驚怖。驚怖這一義,正可以用在佛身上:生死險難確實可怕,以大法立即救度尚不能成功,如今佛同於諸佛,先用小法救濟眾生;把驚怖用在佛身上,義理可以成立。所以經文說,歡喜稱念南無佛;歡喜,是歡喜得到救度眾生的方法。

《五戒經》又說,南無是歸命,把生命全都交付給眾生。調達臨終時稱念南無,還沒來得及說出佛字便墮入地獄;佛陀為他授記,說他從地獄出來以後,將成辟支佛,名叫南無。

外國有一則事奉天像的故事。有人用黃金製作天像的頭,盜賊來偷,原本取不下來,便稱念南無佛,隨即取得像頭。第二天眾人聚集,說天像失去頭,應是沒有天神來依附;若天神真有依附,怎會失頭?天神便降附一人,說盜賊取頭時稱念南無佛,諸天全都驚動,因此盜賊得到便利,天像才失去頭。

眾人因而說,天神難道不如佛嗎?既然不如,為什麼不改事奉佛?盜賊稱念南無佛,尚且能取得天像之頭,何況賢者稱念南無佛?十方受人尊敬的神都不敢承當這一稱名,只應精進,不可懈怠。

《那先經》說,有人臨終稱念南無佛,得以免墮泥梨。為什麼?譬如把一塊石頭放進水中,石頭必定下沉;若把一百塊石子放在船上,便不會沉沒。若人就這樣直接死去,必入泥梨,如石頭直接入水;若臨終稱念南無佛,由佛力使他不入泥梨,就像船力使石頭不沉〔云云〕。

《胎經》《報恩經》又說,華林園第三次大會中的九十二億人,是釋迦佛遺法中只曾一稱南無佛、因而得見彌勒佛的人。

十、了因種子與過去佛證義

從在過去諸佛處以下一行,是第二層,說明了因種子。若比照上面的解法,其中應當都有有相、無相、非有相非無相、至心、散心等五乘種子;如今全都開顯而進入一實〔云云〕。至心聽聞一句,是天業;散心聽聞一句,是人業〔云云〕。

有人問:為什麼偏在過去佛門中廣泛說明五乘?

回答是:過去、未來、現在三世諸佛都有開顯方便的教化;但是未來佛的教化尚未發生,現在佛的教化才剛開始,用來證明此義的力量較弱。過去佛開顯方便已經很久,受教化的人都已成就理、人、教、行四一,又能在十方世界施設方便、顯示真實,事實上的證明較強。憑空構成言說,不如用已成之事來驗證,所以在過去佛門廣說五乘。

十一、未來佛:四一與三因

從未來諸世尊以下,是第三大門,共六行半,重頌未來佛章,分成兩部分。最初一行半,重頌開出三乘;後面五行,重頌顯示一乘。

經中說度脫眾生、使他們進入佛的無漏智慧,這一行重頌人一。說諸佛本來的誓願,並說自己所行的佛道,這一行重頌行一:佛所行的道,也誓願使眾生同得,豈不是行一?從未來世諸佛以下兩行,重頌教一。

所謂知一切法恆常無性,是說實相常住而沒有自性,乃至連『沒有無因之性』也不可執著;無性本身也沒有自性,這才名為無性。

所謂佛種從緣而起,是說中道無性就是佛種。迷惑此理的人,以無明為緣,便有眾生生起;理解此理的人,以教法與修行為緣,便有正覺生起。若要使佛種生起,必須依一乘教,所以這句仍是重頌教一。

又可從三佛性來解:無性就是正因佛性;佛種從緣而起,就是緣因、了因。以緣因資助了因,正因種子便得以生起;其中一因生起,三因一同生起。這樣的正、緣、了三性,名為一乘。

經中說法安住於法位、世間相常住,這一行重頌理一。眾生與正覺同是一如,沒有兩個如,全都不離如理,都以如法為自己的位。

所謂世間相常住,是說出世正覺以如為位,也以如為相,位、相常住;世間眾生同樣以如為位,也以如為相,怎會不是常住?這正是理一。又可把世間解作陰、界、入,把常住解作正因。正因不就是這六法,緣因、了因卻也不離這六法;正因常住,所以緣、了也常住,因而說世間相常住。

經中說佛在道場已經知道此理,是舉佛果說明為何先開權、後顯實。佛在道場成道時,對此理早已明朗通達;只是眾生情執障礙深重,所以祂方便施設三乘〔云云〕。

十二、現在佛:為安隱而先顯後開

從天、人所供養以下,是第四大門,共四行半,重頌現在佛章。前面長行有四段,這裡只重頌三段,不重頌最後總結。

第一段一行半,重頌現在諸佛教化眾生的用意,正是為使眾生得到安穩。

第二段從諸佛知道第一寂滅以下一行,重頌前面的顯實。知道第一寂滅,是重頌理一;經中所說其實是為佛乘,本論保留兩種讀法:可以說是重頌教一,也可以說是重頌行一,不在此選定其中一種。

第三段從諸佛知道眾生各種行為、深心所念以下二行,重頌開權,依經文可知。四佛章到此收束;釋迦佛章從下一單元開始。

I. Verse of Assent: Distinguishing the Assembly and Admonishing Them to Listen

The second major passage is the verse, containing one hundred and twenty-one lines and divided into two parts. The first four lines and one phrase restate the Buddha's assent to answer above; the following one hundred and sixteen lines and three phrases restate the formal answer. The assent in prose originally had three levels: compliant assent, admonition, and distinguishing the assembly. The verse does not restate compliant assent, but only distinguishing the assembly and admonition.

Distinguishing the assembly is further divided in two. The first three and a half lines restate the departure of the five thousand; the next two phrases restate that the assembly remaining was purified. The following phrase restates the admonition to listen, namely that Śāriputra should listen well.

The three faults of overweening pride, self-pride, and disbelief can occur among all four groups, monastic and lay. The two monastic groups, men and women, often cultivate the path and attain meditation; because some mistake meditative concentration for a noble fruit, they more readily generate overweening pride. Laypeople elevate themselves through their social position and more readily generate self-pride. The root treatise further repeats an ancient judgment that women possess shallow wisdom and more frequently generate deviant and one-sided views. This is the context in which the passage separately assigns the three faults to the four groups.

The scripture says that they do not see their own faults. The three faults conceal the mind, causing people to hide their defects and proclaim their virtues, unable to turn back and examine themselves. These are persons without a sense of shame. Only when one can see one's own faults is one still a monastic with a sense of shame.

As for deficiencies and omissions in the precepts, a failure in the discipline precepts is called a deficiency; a failure in the precepts shared with concentration and those shared with the path is called an omission. Because the precepts shared with the path and concentration are absent, unwholesome thoughts arise inwardly, like a flaw concealed within fine jade. Because the discipline precepts are absent, body and speech move falsely outwardly, like fine jade exposing its flaw externally. One covers one's own offenses and instead guards them, unwilling to relinquish them; this is therefore called protective attachment.

“Lesser wisdom” means not having attained the wisdom of noble persons in training or beyond training, yet possessing worldly cleverness and falsely taking contaminated wisdom to be uncontaminated wisdom. This is smaller than wisdom already called lesser, and is therefore called the lesser within the lesser.

“Lees and chaff” means that they lack the moistening of uncontaminated meditative concentration and are like wine lees alone; they also lack wisdom penetrating principle and are like grain chaff alone. Even if these five thousand possess worldly concentration, it is like lees; even if they possess textual understanding, it is like chaff. They seal themselves within wording and lose the principle the wording is meant to express, like chaff without grain. Further, lees and chaff represent their lack of the great capacity capable of giving rise to the great Dharma, while branches and leaves represent their not being good vessels able to receive it. Since they cannot be employed in either respect, they must be allowed to leave.

When the scripture says that Śāriputra should listen well, it restates the preceding admonition before permission to teach and tells him to listen single-mindedly.

II. General Outline of the Formal Answer and the Four-Buddha Chapter

From the Dharma attained by the buddhas onward are one hundred and sixteen lines and three phrases restating the formal answer above, divided into two major passages. The first, beginning with the Dharma attained by the buddhas, has seventy-three lines and one phrase and restates the four-buddha chapter. The next unit, beginning with “I too am now like this,” has forty-three and a half lines and restates the Śākyamuni Buddha chapter.

The four-buddha chapter is further divided into four gateways. First is the gateway of buddhas in general, with thirty-four lines and three phrases. Second is the past-buddha gateway, with twenty-seven and a half lines. Third is the future-buddha gateway, with six and a half lines. Fourth is the present-buddha gateway, with four and a half lines.

The verse of the gateway of buddhas in general differs from the preceding prose in three ways. First, the prose and verse each have content absent from the other: the prose praises the rarity of the Buddha-Dharma but lacks the five turbidities; the verse has the five turbidities but lacks praise of the Dharma. Second, their order is interwoven: the prose first praises the Dharma, next says the Buddha's words are not false, and then explains opening the provisional and revealing the real; the verse first explains opening the provisional and revealing the real and only at the end explains absence of falsehood. Third, their combination and separation differ: the prose combines the exhortation to believe with absence of falsehood; the verse separates the exhortation to believe, inserting the passage on the five turbidities between exhortation and absence of falsehood.

The root treatise adds a fourth point as a private observation: in the prose, Śākyamuni Buddha's skillful means explain the provisional established by the buddhas; in the verse, the real revealed by Śākyamuni Buddha explains that all buddhas reveal the one vehicle. This is an additional reading and does not alter the three expressly listed above into four.

The gateway of buddhas in general itself has five passages. First, the five lines and three phrases beginning with the Dharma attained by the buddhas restate the buddhas' establishment of the provisional. Second, the thirteen lines beginning with “I teach this as skillful means” restate the buddhas' revelation of the real. Third, the four and a half lines beginning with belief, reception, and taking refuge in the Buddha restate the exhortation to believe in the chapter on the buddhas. Fourth, the outline heading marks the nine and a half lines beginning with “If I pass among living beings” as an extended restatement of the five turbidities. Fifth, the two lines beginning with the buddhas' power of skillful means restate the preceding absence of falsehood in the Buddha's words.

III. How the Buddhas Establish the Provisional

The first passage on establishing the provisional is divided into two levels. The first four lines and one phrase positively restate the establishment of skillful means; the next one and a half lines conclude why skillful means must be established.

The Dharma attained by the buddhas refers to the various skillful Dharmas attained after the Buddha cultivated the path. The scripture says that he possesses the power of immeasurable skillful means, restating that he expounds the dharmas through innumerable skillful means and various causes and conditions. It also speaks of the thoughts in living beings' minds, restating that the Buddha teaches the Dharma according to what is appropriate for living beings. The verse gives a broader list of what responsiveness looks like: the Buddha illuminates the capacities of living beings in the nine Dharma realms and teaches them seven kinds of provisional means. The nine kinds of capacities and seven provisional means cannot be assigned in fixed one-to-one pairs and are therefore described collectively as manifold.

According to the capacity of what living beings presently enjoy, the worldly siddhānta is applied. According to the natures habituated in their past, the individual siddhānta is applied. According to what in their wholesome and unwholesome karma requires treatment, the counteractive siddhānta is applied. Hope arising in the present is called thought; the difference among Dharma gateways is called manifold; what was habituated in the past is called nature; and present delight and seeking are called desire. It may also be said that repeatedly habituating a desire gradually forms a nature, and that after a nature is formed it in turn gives rise to corresponding habits and desires. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

As for wholesome and unwholesome karma, the seven provisional means can be divided into wholesome and unwholesome according to their relations to one another. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕 The Buddha illuminates living beings' manifold provisional means, natures, and desires through provisional wisdom, then uses various causes and conditions and similes to teach the nine divisions according to what is appropriate for each. The meanings of the twelve divisions are as explained in the Profound Meaning of the Lotus Sūtra.

The one and a half lines beginning with dull faculties and delight in a Lesser Dharma conclude the intent behind establishing the provisional. Because living beings had dull faculties in past lives, in this life they lack the capacity to hear the great Dharma and cannot hear and receive the profound and wondrous path. Because they were deeply attached in past lives, in this life they are oppressed by various sufferings and are suited only to hear a Lesser Dharma first. The Buddha therefore teaches them nirvāṇa.

IV. Revealing the Real: Principle, Persons, Teaching, and Practice Return to One

The thirteen lines beginning with “I teach this as skillful means” are the second passage, restating the buddhas' revelation of the real, and are divided into four levels.

The first level, three lines, restates one principle. Causing living beings to enter buddha-wisdom restates the preceding statement that the Buddha appears in the world because of the causes and conditions of the one great matter. The determination to teach the Great Vehicle collectively includes opening, showing, awakening to, and entering the Buddha's knowledge and vision. Teaching the nine divisions with entry into the Great Vehicle as their foundation restates entry into the Buddha's knowledge and vision. The truth toward which skillful means lead is only one.

The second level, the four and a half lines beginning with children of the Buddha whose minds are pure, restates that the buddhas and tathāgatas teach only bodhisattvas and explains one class of persons. The prose directly says only that they teach bodhisattvas; the verse broadly explains that persons of every provisional identity become genuine children of the Buddha. Children of the Buddha whose minds are pure are persons of the Separate teaching. When the Buddha teaches the Great Vehicle scripture to such children of the Buddha and they rejoice after receiving predictions, they become genuine persons of the Perfect teaching.

The śrāvakas spoken of in the scripture also include pratyekabuddhas, and its bodhisattvas also include bodhisattvas who cultivate the six perfections, bodhisattvas of the Shared teaching, and others. That all will become buddhas without doubt means that not one of the people of the seven provisional means is not a child of the Buddha. This is the restatement of one class of persons.

The third level, the one line and three phrases beginning with buddha-lands throughout the ten directions, restates that the Tathāgata teaches living beings only through the one buddha vehicle, without other vehicles of two or three. The buddhas throughout the ten directions teach only one Dharma: this is one teaching. The other provisionally established names are only provisional teachings used to guide living beings. The scripture cites the provisional names of the three teachings and manifests the one teaching of buddha-wisdom; the wording is clear.

The root treatise explains “no other vehicle” as the absence of a distinction remaining after the Perfect principle within the Separate teaching enters the Separate teaching. “No two” means the absence of the two opposed half-word and full-word teachings within the Shared teaching. “No three” means the absence of the three vehicles within the Tripiṭaka teaching. These twos and threes are only provisionally established names used to guide various classes of living beings. What is now revealed is only the complete one buddha vehicle.

The fourth level, the three lines and three phrases beginning with the buddhas' appearance in the world and only one real matter, restates that everything the buddhas constantly do is only for the one great matter. This is one practice. “Matter” means practice. That the Buddha ultimately does not liberate living beings through the Lesser Vehicle restates that everything he constantly does is only for the one great matter. That the Buddha himself dwells in the Great Vehicle and liberates living beings through the Dharma he has attained restates that he uses only the Buddha's knowledge and vision to open and show living beings and cause them to awaken and enter. The final line explains why he does not use the Lesser Vehicle as ultimate liberation.

V. Exhorting Belief through Effect and through Cause

The four and a half lines beginning with living beings believing, receiving, and taking refuge in the Buddha are the third passage, restating the exhortation to believe. The prose has already said that the assembly should believe what the Buddha teaches. The verse is further divided into two levels: the first two and a half lines raise the Buddha's effect to exhort belief; the two lines beginning with “Śāriputra, you should know” raise the Buddha's cause to exhort belief.

Exhorting belief through effect is further divided into inner mind and outward form. When living beings believe, receive, and take refuge in the Buddha, they should know that the Tathāgata does not deceive. The Buddha's mind is pure: ignorance, the stain of stinginess, and every evil have been removed. He teaches the Dharma from a pure mind and can therefore be trusted. The one line beginning with the Buddha's adornment of his body with dignified marks explains outward form. His bodily marks are brilliant, upright, and adorned. Inwardly there is no darkness or delusion, while outwardly radiance is manifest; there is therefore no deception in his speech. He is revered by the assembly, and what he teaches bears the seal of the Great Vehicle; it should be believed and received.

The two lines beginning with the vow originally established by the Buddha raise the cause to exhort belief and are also divided into two levels. First, the one line beginning with the Buddha's original establishment of the vow raises the vow made in the past. Second, the one line beginning with the former vow explains that the vow has now been fulfilled. The vow formerly made by the Buddha was not only to seek awakening for himself, but that living beings would together enter buddha-wisdom. He teaches this Dharma now to fulfill that vow, and it too is therefore credible.

The Buddha's awakening has now been perfected, and through it living beings can enter buddha-wisdom. Since Śāriputra personally realizes and knows buddha-wisdom, he can verify that the Buddha's former vow was not false. This concludes the exhortation to believe through the Buddha's cause.

Someone asks: Since the Buddha's original vow universally embraces all living beings and living beings are still so numerous, how can it be said that the vow has been perfected?

The answer is that the Buddha benefits living beings throughout the past, present, and future. Here the fulfillment of the vow is discussed only in relation to his present work of transformation.

VI. General Explanation of the Five Turbidities and Three Meanings of “Living Beings”

The nine and a half lines beginning with the scripture's “If I encounter living beings” are the fourth passage, presenting the five turbidities. The prose places the five turbidities after the Śākyamuni Buddha chapter; the verse first places them at the end of the general gateway of the buddhas, and the later Śākyamuni Buddha gateway will teach them again. This shows that the buddhas likewise appear in evil worlds of the five turbidities, first establish the three vehicles, and afterward reveal the one vehicle.

This passage is divided into four levels. First, one line generally explains that the five turbidities obstruct the great Dharma. Second, six lines separately explain that the five turbidities obstruct the three. Third, one line says that because of the five turbidities the Buddha teaches a Lesser Dharma as skillful means. Fourth, one and a half lines say that the Buddha teaches a Lesser Dharma for the sake of the great Dharma, treating the five turbidities through the Lesser Dharma so that his great vow to liberate living beings can arise.

The root treatise begins with the term zhongsheng (“living beings”). Fascicle Twelve of the Madhyama Āgama says that when the world first formed, beings from the Heaven of Streaming Light descended and were born in the world. Before there were distinctions of male and female or noble and base, all were born together in the world and were therefore called living beings. This explanation concerns their first common birth. When one says that the aggregates are gathered and the provisional name living being established, the term concerns the retribution received during one lifetime. When one says that they are called living beings because they repeatedly take birth everywhere, it concerns transmigration through the five destinies by the power of karma.

The Sūtra of the Right-Dharma Recollection gives ten kinds of living beings: long, short, square, round, triangular, blue, yellow, red, white, and purple.

What is the long birth-and-death of living beings? In hell, the body undergoes inconceivable suffering and the mind generates immeasurable and boundless unwholesome thoughts. Among animals, bodies devour one another and minds oppress one another. Among hungry ghosts, bodies are like burning mountains and minds like boiling pots; deviant views blaze, and beings are defiant, violent, deluded, and cruel. Among humans, body, speech, and mind constantly perform harmful acts that exhaust oneself, while one constantly thinks harmful thoughts that bind oneself. Among gods, beings are immersed in the six sense objects and indulge in play, do not hear the true Dharma, and obstruct the source of merit. This is called the long birth-and-death of living beings.

What is the short birth-and-death of living beings? In hell, one can quiet the mind for a single thought-moment and receive precepts. Among animals, one can quiet the mind for a single thought-moment and rely upon the Three Jewels. Among hungry ghosts, one can quiet the mind for a single thought-moment and still the faculties. Among humans, one can cultivate the six perfections, support one's parents, honor the Three Jewels, and adorn body, speech, and mind with wholesome practice. Among gods, one can relinquish heavenly pleasures, observe precepts, delight in meditation, teach others, read and recite scriptures, cultivate brahmā-conduct, and speak little. This is called the short birth-and-death of living beings.

What is the square birth-and-death of living beings? Like the people of Uttarakuru, they have no thought of possession concerning anything. After relinquishing the body they are certainly born in heaven and proceed upward from one heaven to the next, rising only toward wholesome destinations. It is therefore called angular birth-and-death.

What is the round birth-and-death of living beings? It is turning in circles only among the three evil destinies and four lower destinies, like a whirling firebrand and curling smoke. This is round birth-and-death. What is triangular birth-and-death? The three kinds of wholesome, unwholesome, and indeterminate karma. What is blue birth-and-death? Constantly entering dark hells with fear continually present in the mind. What is yellow birth-and-death? Hungry ghosts are starved and emaciated, their color withered and yellow. What is red birth-and-death? Animals devour one another and bright blood flows. What is white birth-and-death? The white karma and wholesome paths among humans and gods. When gods approach death, other gods tell them that they will be born in the human destiny; when humans approach death, relatives and friends tell them that they will be born in heaven. From this one can know that the human and heavenly realms are white birth-and-death. The root treatise lists purple but gives no separate explanation here.

Fascicle Five of the same scripture further says that mind paints hell black, hungry ghosts dove-colored, animals yellow, humans red, and gods white. Someone asks why this set of colors differs from the preceding passage. The answer is that the preceding passage concerns the retribution of the five destinies, while this passage concerns the karma through which living beings produce the five destinies; this is why they differ. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

When living beings such as these encounter the Buddha, they are tormented by suffering while the buddhas rescue beings through great compassion. The Buddha's compassion and living beings' suffering face one another, and this is therefore called encounter. Further, the thusness of the Buddha and the thusness of living beings are the same thusness, without two thusnesses. Their natures are mutually connected, and this too is called encounter.

Great compassion constantly feels tenderness for living beings. If the Buddha taught them only human and heavenly wholesome Dharmas, it would be as though he himself fell into dark delusion, merely freeing living beings from blue, yellow, red, purple, square, round, angular, and triangular birth-and-death without teaching them the buddha path. This is impossible. If the Buddha encountered living beings and taught them only to cultivate the Lesser Vehicle, it would be as though he himself fell into stinginess and refused to give the great Dharma. This too is impossible, because it would merely free living beings from the twenty-five modes of existence. If the Buddha taught only the Shared and Separate teachings, it would be as though he himself fell into partiality and lost the Buddha's knowledge and vision. This is likewise impossible.

The Buddha now intends to cause all living beings to attain the wondrous wisdom of the true mark and realize that everything is the Buddha-Dharma and nowhere is outside the correct path. Only this is teaching the entire buddha path to living beings and forever exhausting the suffering of birth-and-death. The Buddha constantly teaches in this way; only because living beings' faculties are dull and offenses heavy can the work not immediately be accomplished fully according to his wish.

In the past there was a buddha named Abiding in Nonabiding, who vowed that the living beings in his land would become buddhas on the same day and at the same time and would enter extinction on the same day. Before the Worthy Eon there was also a buddha named Equality, who vowed that the living beings in his own land and throughout the ten directions would all become buddhas on the same day and enter extinction on the same day.

Someone therefore asks: Since there are still buddhas and living beings today, how should this be understood? The Buddha says, “Stop, stop.” His preceding statement referred to those who had attained human bodies. Another asks whether anyone ever vowed that beings in the five destinies would become buddhas on the same day. The Buddha replies that one cannot attain the unsurpassed path directly in a bodily form incapable of receiving it. Living beings in the three evil destinies must first be transformed so that they attain human or heavenly bodies, and only then can they accomplish the path according to the vow. The three evil destinies are not wholesome paths; how could beings become buddhas in those very forms? It is like someone seeking a heap of jewels: one cannot seek it in empty space but must first have a place capable of bearing the jewels.

VII. Separate Explanation of the Five Turbidities, Provisional Teaching of a Lesser Dharma, and Absence of Falsehood

The six lines beginning with the scripture's “I know these living beings” separately explain the five turbidities in five items.

First, two lines explain the turbidity of living beings. The wholesome foundation is the true mark of thusness. Because living beings do not plant roots of goodness in accord with this wholesome foundation, they cannot elicit the great Dharma. They cling firmly to the five desires, which are also the root of every evil. From delusion and craving for existence arises the illness of attachment to self.

Second, the one line beginning with the minute form received in the womb explains the turbidity of life. Interpreted through contemplating the mind, when a single thought-moment arises it creates karma for the future. Karma is like a womb. Womb-karma has no end, continuing from life to life without interruption; noninterruption is growth. The minute form received in the womb consists of the five aggregates, which are also called world. Life continuously sustains the aggregates, causing them to enter the world, continuing from the first embryonic form like thin curds through decline, old age, and death. It is therefore called growth from life to life, and this is the turbidity of life.

The Sūtra on Receiving the Aggregate-Body says that when an ordinary being receives a body, there is no change in the first seven days. In the second seven days a form arises like thin curds. In the third it is like thick curds; in the fourth like clarified cream; in the fifth like unbaked pottery; in the sixth like a lump of flesh. In the seventh, five protrusions arise from the lump of flesh and form the head, hands, feet, and other parts. In the eighth seven days five more protrusions arise: one head, two shoulders, and two wrists. In the ninth, twenty-four more protrusions arise; four form the eyes, ears, nose, and tongue, and twenty form the twenty digits. By the seventeenth seven days, the shape of the abdomen becomes visible, and the various forms of skin, bones, and other parts gradually separate.

Seven hundred sinews and seven thousand channels further arise. Whatever characteristic the body requires is colored by a corresponding wind. If a white characteristic is needed, it is colored by a white wind; the other colors are likewise formed by corresponding winds. Because of fragrant winds, the body is stable and upright; because of foul winds, the body is unstable, ugly, and distorted. After leaving the womb and eating the five grains, eighty thousand households of worms arise within the body.

Third, the one line beginning with entry into a dense forest of deviant views explains the turbidity of views. The five views intersect like a dense and flourishing forest. Attachment to existence is the view of permanence; attachment to nonexistence is the view of annihilation. From these two fundamental views arise the sixty-two views.

Another explanation says that non-Buddhists have four attachments concerning the self. First, form itself is self. Second, there is a separate self apart from form. Third, form is large and self small, with self dwelling in form. Fourth, self is large and form small, with form dwelling in self. They make the same four attachments concerning each of the four aggregates of feeling, perception, formations, and consciousness, making twenty. Correlating the twenty with past, present, and future makes sixty; adding the two fundamental views of annihilation and permanence makes sixty-two. They may also be understood according to the Large Perfection of Wisdom Sūtra.

Fourth, the one line beginning with deep attachment to false dharmas restates the turbidity of afflictions and can be understood from the scripture. Fifth, the one line beginning with thousands of myriads of koṭis of eons restates the turbidity of the eon. A long time without the Buddha-Dharma is the turbidity of the eon. It is also so called because the preceding four turbidities all gather within a period of time. The scripture says such people are difficult to transform because the five turbidities form obstructions that prevent them from believing and receiving the one vehicle, making them difficult to liberate.

Interpreted through contemplating the mind, unwholesome perceptions arise thought after thought, and from beginning to end there is no correct contemplation capable of awakening oneself; this is not seeing a buddha within the mind. The absence of the noble eightfold path within the mind is not hearing the Dharma. Such a mind is difficult to transform.

The one line beginning with the Buddha telling Śāriputra, “Therefore I establish skillful means,” is the third level: skillfully teaching a Lesser Dharma to living beings, as can be understood from the scripture.

The one and a half lines beginning with “Although I teach nirvāṇa, this is not true extinction” are the fourth level: ultimately causing living beings to enter the great Dharma. If one exhaustively analyzes the falsity of the three realms, extinguishes form, and clings to the principle of emptiness, the root treatise judges this not to be true extinction. If one can realize that ignorance is originally without intrinsic nature and constantly quiescent, only then is it true extinction. Yet even though original nonexistence is quiescent, without cultivating the path there remains no way to accord with it. The scripture therefore says that when children of the Buddha have completed cultivating the path, they will become buddhas in a future age.

The two lines beginning with the buddhas' power of skillful means are the fifth passage, restating the preceding absence of falsehood in the Buddha's words. The prose says that the assembly should believe that the Buddha's words are not false. The exhortation to believe has already been restated above; absence of falsehood is restated here. The first two phrases say that Śākyamuni Buddha first opens and shows the three vehicles; the next two phrases say that the buddhas later reveal the real, with each showing the other. The final line positively states absence of falsehood. The provisional teaching before and real teaching afterward are both truthful words and should not give rise to doubt.

VIII. Past Buddhas: From Opening Three to Revealing the One through the Five Vehicles

Beginning with immeasurable eons in the past is the second major gateway, with twenty-seven and a half lines restating the past-buddha chapter and divided into two parts. The first two lines restate the opening of three vehicles, as can be understood from the scripture. The twenty-five and a half lines beginning with the several World-Honored Ones restate the revelation of the one vehicle. The revelation of the real in the preceding prose contains the four ones of principle, persons, teaching, and practice; all are restated in this verse.

Revealing the one is further divided into two levels. First, one line briefly restates the first three ones: the buddhas all teaching the one-vehicle Dharma is one teaching; transforming immeasurable living beings is one class of persons; and causing living beings to enter the buddha path is one principle, while also including one practice.

Second, the twenty-four and a half lines beginning with the several great noble lords broadly restate revealing the one in terms of the five vehicles. This level first explains generally and then separately. The first one and a half lines generally reveal the one in terms of the five vehicles: gods, humans, and the various living beings raise the persons of each vehicle and explain one class of persons. The Buddha further transforms them through different skillful means, raising the various practices and revealing one practice, while also including one teaching. Ultimate meaning is one principle.

Different skillful means must be distinguished in two cases. Buddha-nature as direct cause is itself the principle of ultimate meaning. When one contemplates it through perfect and wondrous correct contemplation, that is itself a skillful means of the true mark and is not called a different skillful means. Only when the contemplations of the seven provisional means help disclose ultimate meaning are they called different skillful means in relative terms.

The twenty-three lines beginning with “If there are living beings...” separately reveal the real through the five vehicles and are further divided into three passages. First, two lines open and reveal the bodhisattva vehicle. Second, one line opens and reveals the two vehicles of śrāvakas and pratyekabuddhas. Third, twenty lines open and reveal the two vehicles of gods and humans.

First, the two lines beginning with the classes of living beings open and reveal the bodhisattva vehicle. Explained through the five vehicles, this is only the Tripiṭaka bodhisattva vehicle that cultivates the six perfections. Explained through the seven provisional means, it also includes the bodhisattva vehicles of the Shared and Separate teachings. Why? Because the Great Vehicles of all three teachings cultivate the six perfections; only their orientation of mind differs. Cultivating the six perfections through a mind with marks belongs to Tripiṭaka bodhisattvas. Cultivating them through a markless mind belongs to Shared-teaching bodhisattvas. Cultivating them sequentially through what is neither marked nor markless belongs to Separate-teaching bodhisattvas. The scripture here lists only the six perfections and cannot yet be definitively assigned to any one of these.

Examining the preceding statement that they further use different skillful means shows that it does not refer only to bodhisattvas of the six perfections, but also includes the skillful means of bodhisattvas in all three teachings. Dharmas heard in the past have all been opened into one teaching. The six perfections cultivated in the past have all been opened into one practice. These persons have all been opened into one class of persons. Their all having accomplished the buddha path is one principle.

Second, the one line beginning with those of wholesome and pliant minds after the extinction of the buddhas opens and reveals that śrāvakas and pratyekabuddhas all enter the one vehicle. How does one know that the two vehicles are both included? The Large Perfection of Wisdom Sūtra praises the pliant minds of arhats, while the Vimalakīrti Sūtra says that abiding in a disciplined mind is the practice of worthies and noble persons; this makes it knowable. Wholesome and pliant minds in the past have all been opened into one practice, these people are one class of persons, and accomplishing the buddha path is one principle.

Third, the twenty lines beginning with making offerings to relics open and reveal the vehicles of gods and humans. The scripture does not directly label heavenly and human vehicles but speaks of making images and raising stūpas with concentrated or distracted minds. From this the root treatise knows that these are wholesome karmas of gods and humans.

The Masters of the Grounds give another interpretation. They say that the child is at the stage of childlike truth and lacks the desirous mind of the two vehicles and ordinary beings that inclines toward either extreme. Gathering sand to make a stūpa means that sand represents nonattachment and the stūpa the accumulation of many practices, containing within it the mind of perfect awakening. The Masters of the Grounds regard this integration into nonarising as a profound understanding.

The root treatise considers this interpretation contrary to the wording and too narrow in its vertical stages. Why? It is only proper that a bodhisattva who has entered the grounds become a buddha, like an asura crossing the sea; nothing about it is unusual. The scripture is now precisely speaking of children at play gathering sand and singing with distracted minds, showing that the slightest goodness contains a conspicuous cause of buddhahood, which is as inconceivable as an ordinary being crossing the sea. The Buddha clearly gathers the five vehicles broadly, omitting not even a hair's breadth of goodness. The Masters of the Grounds abandon this broad inclusion and directly take only nonarising. On that reading, it might fail to include even the two vehicles, much less ordinary beings. In terms of profound meaning, the destination may be the same; in terms of broad inclusion, it contradicts the scripture.

IX. Slight Human and Heavenly Goodness, the Three Buddha-Natures, and Ten Categories of Conditioning Causes

Someone asks: Slight goodness among humans and gods should remain within its corresponding recompense. Why does the scripture say that all these people have accomplished the buddha path?

The answer is that this should be explained through the three buddha-natures. The Mahāparinirvāṇa Sūtra says that there is one kind of buddha-nature possessed by persons with roots of goodness and absent in icchantikas. The root treatise assigns this to slight human and heavenly goodness. Bowing one's head or raising one's hand is the first basket of earth laid down when building a mountain. A tree that two arms can encircle also begins with the first minute tender shoot. Before provisional means were opened and revealed, these wholesome acts were said only to remain within retribution. Now that provisional practices are opened and revealed, one knows that they are precisely buddha-nature as conditioning cause, capable of proceeding toward awakening and accomplishing the meaning of revealing the real.

The twenty lines on gods and humans are further divided into two levels. The first nineteen lines explain revealing the real through slight human and heavenly goodness becoming seeds of conditioning cause; the last line explains revealing the real through seeds of revealing cause. The first nineteen lines are further divided into ten categories.

First, the first three and a half lines explain the heavenly vehicle through building stūpas. In the causal ground, builders of stūpas can be single-minded and sincere, exhausting their wealth and relinquishing jewels. When retribution matures, they naturally receive pleasure, and the root treatise therefore assigns this to the heavenly vehicle. Mi is a kind of timber in Chang'an and can also be used to make images. The Golden Light Sūtra says that placing buddha-relics the size of a mustard seed in a small stūpa naturally yields retribution in the Heaven of the Thirty-Three, directly illustrating this meaning.

Second, the one line beginning with children at play says that children making stūpas from sand is human karma. In the causal ground the goodness is performed casually and at ease; when its fruit is experienced, intentional effort is still required to seek pleasure, and it is therefore assigned to human karma.

Third, the four lines beginning with someone establishing an image for the Buddha explain heavenly karma through making an image with a single-minded resolve. The Sūtra on the Precepts for Lay Bodhisattvas does not permit glue, and a violator incurs an offense of faulty intention, while the Lotus Sūtra here says that glue may be used. An ancient master explains that foreign lands use tree resin. Guangzhai says that in some places making an image truly requires oxhide glue and its use is then permitted; if another material is available, it should not be used. Someone else says that soybean liquid can replace clear glue. The three positions are listed separately.

The root treatise nevertheless says that oxhide is ultimately an impure substance and will later elicit impure retribution. Impure wealth is not suitable for direct use in making an image, but can be exchanged for lawful and pure wealth, which can then be used. The Treatise on the Bodhisattva Grounds does not permit orpiment and other foul-smelling materials. A precept scripture does not permit making a half-body buddha-image; otherwise one incurs an offense of faulty intention, wholesome marks cannot arise, and one falls within birth-and-death.

Each image has a posture it is meant to represent. If making a buddha teaching the Dharma in a hall, it must be a seated image. If making a buddha displaying final repose, it can be seated or reclining. If making a buddha in motion, it should be a standing image. As for disciples, one may not sit before a standing buddha-image within a stūpa or hall, because that is definitively a place occupied by the Buddha. In the home of a layperson or elsewhere, if someone before a seated buddha-image cannot remain standing long and asks to sit, permission can be given; one may not sit before a standing buddha-image. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

Fourth, the one line beginning with children at play drawing images explains human karma. Fifth, the one and a half lines beginning with these people conclude revealing the real: these people all become one class of persons. Gradually accumulating merit and perfecting a mind of great compassion is one practice. Accomplishing the buddha path is one principle. Once they become buddhas, they can transform through the four ones and teach only bodhisattvas; this is one teaching. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

Sixth, the three and a half lines beginning with making offerings in stūpas and temples explain heavenly karma through offerings of form, sound, and other sense objects. In Chang'an, a dew-catching basin is called a copper cymbal. Since the scripture was translated there, it uses the local term.

Seventh, the one line beginning with someone making offerings with a distracted mind explains human karma through a distracted offering of one flower or another sense object. Eighth, the one line beginning with someone bowing explains heavenly and human karma through bodily reverence. The superior bow of prostrating with the five limbs is heavenly karma; the middling bow of joining palms and bowing the head is human karma.

Ninth, the one and a half lines beginning with these offerings give another conclusion. This does not only reveal practitioners' own accomplishment of the buddha path through revealing the real. Through opening and revealing skillful means, they can also display nirvāṇa when their transformative conditions, like fuel, have been exhausted. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

Tenth, the one line beginning with someone entering a stūpa or temple with a distracted mind and uttering “Namo Buddha” once explains verbal karma. According to the preceding categories, both heavenly and human karma should be present here; only human karma is stated. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

The two syllables namo have many transmitted explanations. Someone explains them as “liberate me, liberate me; liberation can be bestowed upon living beings.” But if the Buddha replied, “The buddhas liberate me,” the meaning would be unsuitable, and the root treatise therefore does not adopt this explanation.

The Sūtra of the Five Precepts explains namo as fear. Fear can properly be applied to the Buddha here: the dangers of birth-and-death truly are fearful. Immediate liberation through the great Dharma cannot yet succeed, and now the Buddha, in accord with the other buddhas, first rescues living beings through a Lesser Dharma. Applying fear to the Buddha can therefore accord with principle. The scripture consequently speaks of joyfully uttering “Namo Buddha”; the joy is delight at having found a way to liberate living beings.

The Sūtra of the Five Precepts further says that namo means entrusting one's life, giving one's whole life to living beings. At death Devadatta uttered namo but fell into hell before he could pronounce “Buddha.” The Buddha predicted that after emerging from hell he would become a pratyekabuddha named Namo.

In a foreign land there is a story concerning service to an image of a god. Someone made the head of the divine image from gold. When a thief came to steal it, at first it could not be removed. He then uttered “Namo Buddha” and immediately obtained the image's head. The next day people gathered and said that since the divine image had lost its head, no god must be dwelling in it; if a god truly dwelled there, how could the head be lost? A god then possessed a person and said that when the thief took the head he uttered “Namo Buddha,” all the gods were startled, and the thief therefore gained his opportunity and the image lost its head.

The people then said: Is the god not equal to the Buddha? Since it is not, why not turn to serve the Buddha? If a thief uttering “Namo Buddha” could obtain the head of the divine image, how much more a worthy person who utters “Namo Buddha”? None of the gods revered by people throughout the ten directions dares accept this utterance of the name. One should only be diligent and never lax.

The Nāgasena Sūtra says that someone who utters “Namo Buddha” at death is spared rebirth in niraya. Why? If one stone is placed in water, it necessarily sinks. If one hundred stones are placed on a boat, they do not sink. If a person simply dies, that person necessarily enters niraya, like a stone placed directly in water. If one utters “Namo Buddha” at death, the Buddha's power prevents entry into niraya, as a boat's power keeps stones from sinking. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

The Embryo Sūtra and Sūtra of Requiting Kindness further say that the nine billion two hundred million people at the third great assembly in the Flower Grove were those who had uttered “Namo Buddha” only once during Śākyamuni Buddha's residual teaching and thereby came to see Maitreya Buddha.

X. Seeds of the Revealing Cause and Evidentiary Force of the Past Buddhas

The one line beginning with being before buddhas in the past is the second level and explains seeds of revealing cause. Following the explanation above, it should contain seeds of the five vehicles in the forms of marked, markless, neither marked nor markless, wholehearted, and distracted practice. All are now opened and revealed and enter the single reality. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕 Hearing one phrase wholeheartedly is heavenly karma; hearing one phrase with a distracted mind is human karma. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

Someone asks: Why is the five-vehicle explanation given extensively specifically in the past-buddha gateway?

The answer is that the buddhas of the past, future, and present all have transformative teachings that open and reveal provisional means. The future buddhas' transformation has not yet occurred, however, while that of the present buddhas has only just begun, so their power to prove this meaning is weaker. The past buddhas opened and revealed provisional means long ago. The persons transformed have all accomplished the four ones of principle, persons, teaching, and practice and can in turn establish skillful means and reveal the real throughout the worlds of the ten directions. The factual proof is therefore stronger. Constructing a claim in the abstract is inferior to verifying it through accomplished events, and the five vehicles are therefore explained extensively in the past-buddha gateway.

XI. Future Buddhas: The Four Ones and Three Causes

Beginning with the future World-Honored Ones is the third major gateway, with six and a half lines restating the future-buddha chapter and divided into two parts. The first one and a half lines restate the opening of three vehicles; the following five lines restate the revelation of the one vehicle.

The line concerning liberating living beings and causing them to enter the Buddha's uncontaminated wisdom restates one class of persons. The line concerning the buddhas' original vows and the buddha path they themselves practice restates one practice: the buddhas vow that living beings will also attain the path they practice; how could this not be one practice? The two lines beginning with the buddhas in future ages restate one teaching.

Knowing that all dharmas constantly lack intrinsic nature means that the true mark constantly abides without intrinsic nature, and that even the “absence of a causeless nature” cannot be grasped. Absence of nature itself also lacks intrinsic nature; only this is called absence of nature.

The buddha-seed arising from conditions means that the middle path's absence of nature is precisely the buddha-seed. Those deluded about this principle take ignorance as condition, and living beings then arise. Those who understand this principle take teaching and practice as conditions, and right awakening then arises. For the buddha-seed to arise, one must rely on the one-vehicle teaching, and this sentence therefore still restates one teaching.

It can also be explained through the three buddha-natures: absence of nature is buddha-nature as direct cause, while the buddha-seed's arising from conditions is conditioning and revealing cause. The conditioning cause supports the revealing cause, and the seed of direct cause can then arise. When one cause arises, all three arise together. These three natures—direct, conditioning, and revealing—are called the one vehicle.

The scriptural statement that dharmas abide in their Dharma-positions and that the marks of the world constantly abide restates one principle. Living beings and right awakening are the same thusness, without two thusnesses. None departs from the principle of thusness, and all take the Dharma of thusness as their position.

The marks of the world constantly abiding means that transcendent right awakening takes thusness as both position and mark, and that position and mark constantly abide. Worldly living beings likewise take thusness as position and mark; how could these not constantly abide? This is precisely one principle. “World” can also be understood as aggregates, elements, and sense-fields, while “constantly abiding” is understood as direct cause. The direct cause is not simply these six dharmas, yet conditioning and revealing causes do not depart from them. Because the direct cause constantly abides, the conditioning and revealing causes also constantly abide; hence the marks of the world constantly abide.

The scripture says that the Buddha already knew this principle at the place of awakening, raising the fruit of buddhahood to explain why he first opened the provisional and later revealed the real. When the Buddha attained the path at the place of awakening, he had long clearly comprehended this principle; it was only because living beings' attachments and obstructions were severe that he established three vehicles as skillful means. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

XII. Present Buddhas: Revealing First and Opening Afterward to Bring Peace

Beginning with those worshiped by gods and humans is the fourth major gateway, with four and a half lines restating the present-buddha chapter. The preceding prose has four passages; only three are restated here, and the final conclusion is not restated.

The first passage, one and a half lines, restates the intent of present buddhas in transforming living beings: precisely to cause living beings to attain peace.

The second passage, the one line beginning with the buddhas' knowing the foremost quiescence, restates the preceding revelation of the real. Knowing the foremost quiescence restates one principle. Concerning the scripture's statement that this is actually for the buddha vehicle, the root treatise preserves two readings: it may be said to restate one teaching, or it may be said to restate one practice. Neither is selected here.

The third passage, the two lines beginning with the buddhas' knowing living beings' various practices and the thoughts deep in their minds, restates opening the provisional, as can be understood from the scripture. The four-buddha chapter concludes here; the Śākyamuni Buddha chapter begins in the next unit.

方便品 · 偈頌(頌釋迦章)Skillful Means · Verse: The Śākyamuni Chapter

全文五層 →Full five layers →
白話Vernacular

一、先定譬本

從『如今我也是這樣』以下,共有四十三行半偈頌,是重頌釋迦佛說法的一章。前面的長行沒有讚歎佛法希有,偈頌中卻把六義全都說到了。舊來解釋這一章時,先在此處指出後文譬喻所依的法義,再到譬喻正文中指回這裡;法與譬上下交錯,讀疏的人容易眼花,聽講的人也容易心亂,根性遲鈍者更會因此迷惑。所以私記者先把相關內容整理在前,到後文再把它貼出,作為自己前後照見的憑藉。

釋迦章的偈頌有兩重作用:一是重頌上文,二是為下文立本。上根人已經領悟,中根人還沒有明白,所以仍須用譬喻,使人藉譬再明白前面的法說。譬喻不會孤立出現,它必有承接上文的來由;這個來由便叫作『譬本』。

舊說把它分成五譬:第一是長者譬,第二是思量救濟譬,第三是以權巧誘導譬,第四是平等賜與譬,第五是不虛妄譬。但第一項其實是總譬,不只是長者一義;第二項只說到救子不得,還少了見火一義,所以本論不用這一分法。

瑤師把〈方便品〉長行分成四章:從諸佛隨宜說法直到長行末,是正面顯示一乘真實。其四章為:第一,開出往昔所說的四與三,成就如今所顯的四一;第二,說明因五濁之故,當初不能直說一乘;第三,從弟子自稱已得之處起,說明哪些人不能得到;第四,從勸人一心信解之處起,說明佛語不虛妄。首尾用語雖異,從意義看都是真實。後面的火宅譬只譬其中三章:從譬如某長者直到諸子願父及時賜與,是譬五濁章;從平等賜給諸子一輛大車直到諸子得未曾有,是譬真實章;從長者平等賜車直到問他是否虛妄,是譬不虛妄章。

玄暢師分成六譬:第一,宅內眾多災患的情形;第二,覺者只有佛,因而生起說一乘之念;第三,眾生不能接受,所以先說可怖畏之事;第四,說三乘之樂;第五,回過來說一乘教;第六,結明佛語不虛妄。

龍師也分成六譬:第一,舍宅中的父子,譬佛在三界中教化眾生;第二,長者看見火起,譬佛以佛眼看見六道眾生;第三,長者設法救火,譬佛在三七日間想度眾生,卻不能使用大乘;第四,長者方便地用三車誘引,譬佛施設三乘教;第五,長者賜給一輛大車,譬佛說《妙法蓮華經》;第六,是不虛妄譬。

另有火宅十譬之說。第一,從『如今我也是這樣』起的兩行,總頌上文權實,作下文總譬之本。第二,從告訴舍利弗應當知道起的四行,頌上文五濁,作下文見火譬之本。第三,從佛初坐道場起的六行半,說大乘教化不能奏效,作下文救子不得譬之本。第四,從追念過去諸佛起的十一行,說三乘教化能夠奏效,作下文救子得出譬之本。第五,從佛看見佛子等起的一行,說大乘機緣發動,作下文看見諸子脫離災難譬之本。第六,從眾人都以恭敬心起的一行,說三乘人索求果位,作下文諸子索車譬之本。第七,從佛隨即生起此念起的兩行一句,說如來歡喜,作下文長者歡喜譬之本。第八,從佛在諸菩薩面前起的三句,說佛為眾人開示大乘,作下文平等賜給大車譬之本。第九,從菩薩聽聞此法起的一行,說眾生歡喜,作下文諸子得到車後歡喜譬之本。第十,從勸眾人不要疑惑起的一行半,說佛沒有虛妄,作下文長者不虛妄譬之本。

有人批評十譬之說:若按句子判分,應有十九句;若按義判分,只有六義,即總說、見火、一乘教化不得、三乘教化得成、再說一乘,以及不虛妄,其餘內容都可收入這六義。再者,十譬之說使法說與譬說的次序錯落:法說先有索車,後有父喜;譬說卻先有父喜,後有索車。即使勉強會通,終究迂迴。大小兩邊也互相違背:法說因看見大乘機緣發動而歡喜,譬說因看見小乘機緣免難而歡喜;法說說的是大乘之因,譬說敘述的是小乘之果;法說說大乘障礙將要消除,譬說說小乘災難已經離開,兩邊的義勢各不相合。又有一項有無之異:法說敘述上根人容易悟入,所以沒有索車;譬說敘述中根人仍然疑惑,所以有索車。若把恭敬而來解成索車,就完全沒有體會經文的本意。本論採用的分法沒有這四種過失。

若比較長行與偈頌的有無,長行有五項:開三、顯一、五濁、真偽、不虛。偈頌也有五項;只是長行有真偽而偈頌沒有,偈頌有歎法而長行沒有,兩者互相顯現。若比較次序,長行先開三而後顯一,偈頌先顯一而後開三。若比較開合,開三與顯一合成總譬之本,兩項在兩偈中合說而不分開;五濁一段則分開作四個別譬之本,是開而不合;不虛妄作不虛譬之本,既不另開,也不與別項合併。若說取捨,四段經文都作六譬之本,所以全取而不捨;歎法一章不是六譬,所以捨而不取。若論總別,最初的開三顯一總敘釋迦佛一代教化,從五濁以後都屬別譬。若論本迹,總敘佛教之處總含本與迹;從五濁以後別明本與迹。五濁一章正說佛安住法身之本,看見眾生受苦而生大悲;從一乘教化不得以後,便說垂迹教化。〔云云:其餘從略。〕

本論的判斷是:這一部分的中心正是開三顯一。前面的法說直陳此義,上根人當下悟解;中、下根人沒有悟解,佛就進一步作譬,用譬喻說明三與一,使他們明白。前面法說既有略說、廣說的開三顯一,後面譬說也應有略說、廣說的許三賜一,因緣說中也應顯示引三入一。若分成三譬、六譬或十譬,便不能與三周說法的全文相合,也會與四大弟子的信解不相應,所以本論都不採用。

二、略頌與廣頌

本論把頌釋迦章大分為二。第一,從『如今我也是這樣』起的兩行偈,是略頌上文的權與實,作下文總譬之本。第二,從『我以佛眼觀見』起的四十一行半偈,是廣頌上文六義,作下文各別譬喻之本。

總頌雖短,其中已含六義,因此能作總譬六義之本。『如今我也是這樣』中的『我』就是釋迦佛,是一代教化之主,作下文大長者譬之本。所謂『安隱』,是大涅槃常樂的住處;那裡寂靜,沒有五濁障礙,所以叫安隱。安隱與不安隱相對;三界生死是佛施行教化之處,其中有五濁障礙,所以是不安隱,作下文火宅譬之本。眾生是五道中接受教化之人,作下文五百人譬之本。安隱也可指安隱之法,它與五濁的不安隱法相對,作下文火起譬之本。種種法門與不種種相對,作下文唯有一門譬之本。佛知道眾生的性情與欲樂,是知道五道眾生的根性有三乘差別,作下文三十子譬之本。向上看,這兩行是略頌;向下看,它們是總譬之本。本與末前後相承,文義完整,到解釋譬喻時還會再引前文證成後文。〔云云:其餘從略。〕

廣頌六義又分四段,分別作下文別譬之本。第一,從佛以佛眼觀見起的四行,廣頌五濁,作見火譬之本。第二,從佛初坐道場起的十七行半,廣頌在一乘中開出三乘,作暫停大乘、施設小乘譬之本。第三,從佛看見佛子等起的六行,廣頌顯實,作平等賜給大車譬之本。第四,從三世諸佛起的五行半,廣頌歎法希有;接著兩行半正頌不虛;再接六行頌勸人信受。這三義合起來作不虛譬之本,其中正取兩行半的不虛之頌。

再細分第一段,頌五濁共有三意:先用半行一字說佛眼觀見,作長者能見之本;再用兩行三句四字說佛所見的五濁,作長者所見之火之本;最後用半行說佛生起大悲,作長者驚而進入火宅之本。第二段從佛初坐道場起,若按開三來說,又分二意:先用六行半說想以大乘教化而不能奏效,作長者有身手之力卻暫不使用的大乘寢息譬之本;再從追念過去諸佛起,用十一行說效法諸佛,以三乘教化,作施設三車、施行小乘方便譬之本。第三段頌顯實又分四意:先用兩行說大乘機緣發動,作索車譬之本;第二用兩行一句說佛歡喜,作長者見子免難而歡喜譬之本;第三用三句正顯真實,作平等賜給一輛大車譬之本;第四用一行說受持、修行、悟入,作諸子得到一輛大車而歡喜譬之本。不虛之頌直接作不虛譬之本,不再分開。

若作一次較大的開分,可成三譬:最初兩行合說而不分,作總譬之本;從佛眼觀見起的部分分開而不合,作別譬之本;不虛譬既不分也不合,直接作不虛譬之本。若循著承接上文、建立下文的略頌與廣頌來看,三周說法以及〈信解品〉中的文義都不欠缺。若再把廣頌開為四意,重頌上文四義,作下文四譬之本,也能使三周與〈信解品〉文義不缺。若繼續細分,頌五濁開為三,頌方便開為二,頌顯實開為四,不虛只立一項,合成十意,可作下文十譬之本;可是這十意只在法說、譬說兩周有相應文字,在信解與因緣說中便有欠缺。因此,本論依三個層次開章,是為了承上本下,並非漫無旨趣地任意分段。

略頌的第一行頌顯實,第二行頌開權。文字雖窄,卻具足理一、人一、行一、教一。佛說自己也與諸佛一樣,是說祂同樣以一實教化眾生,總頌顯實。安隱處是涅槃祕藏;佛自己安住其中,也把眾生安置於祕藏之中,所以安隱處頌理一。眾生頌人一。由種種法門進入佛道頌行一。佛的宣示頌教一。智慧力是權智之力;知道眾生性欲,是照見小乘機緣;方便說諸法,是正式施行權教;使眾生都得到歡喜,是教法隨宜而合乎根機。這兩偈雖略,卻收盡佛一代教化中開權顯實的始末,從起初到終結都沒有遺漏,所以稱為略頌,並作下文總譬之本。

廣頌共有四十一行半,廣頌上文六義。舊說把最後七行看作法說流通分,本論不採用,而把它看成重頌歎法與勸信。六段依次是:最初四行頌五濁開三;第二段十七行半頌施設方便教化;第三段六行頌顯實;第四段五行半頌歎法希有,釋迦章長行雖沒有這一項,卻可指回諸佛章;第五段兩行半頌不虛;第六段六行頌敦促信受。最初四行所頌的五濁,在長行中有唱數、列名、出體、結釋四項,偈頌只重頌數目、名稱與體性三項。長行說因五濁而說三乘,偈頌說因五濁而出現世間。佛出世本應說大乘,只因障礙而不得已先說小乘。

三、佛眼所見與大悲所赴

最初四行又分三段。第一段十一字,說佛有能見之眼。第二段從六道眾生起,用兩行三句四字說佛所見的五濁。第三段從佛為這些眾生起,用半行說祂生起大悲而應機赴救。

佛以佛眼觀見,與後文長者站在門外相照。由此可以知道,佛安住法身之地,以常寂的佛眼圓滿照察一切根機。若眾生根利而濁障輕,佛便現盧舍那身相,說一乘法;若眾生根鈍而濁障重,佛便脫下瓔珞,現老比丘相,驚入火宅,方便開三。這裡只是說佛當時鑒察眾生根機,所以稱佛眼觀見。

若觀色法,本來應說天眼;若分別根機,本來應說法眼,為何此處卻說佛眼?因為佛眼圓融通達,舉最高勝者便兼攝較低者;而且其餘四眼都融入佛眼,所以都可稱為佛眼。〔云云:其餘從略。〕

佛所見的五濁分別落在偈中的五處。眾生貧窮而沒有福德、智慧,頌眾生濁。眾生進入生死險道,苦相連續而不間斷,頌命濁。眾生深深貪著五欲,頌煩惱濁。眾生不求具有大勢力的佛,也不求斷苦之法,頌劫濁。眾生深陷種種邪見,企圖以苦行之因求得捨苦,頌見濁。

對『以苦欲捨苦』又有兩說。一說是用五種熱火炙身,希望藉此捨苦,結果反而得到苦報。另一說是,各種邪見即屬於受,受本身就是苦;行這種苦因而期望捨苦,怎麼可能辦到?

《普曜經》說明五道的由來:持五戒得生人道,修十善得生天道,慳貪墮餓鬼道,觝觸抵拒墮畜生道,造十惡墮地獄道。若沒有五趣、五陰、六衰,就是泥洹;不處於生死,也不住於泥洹,便會領受菩提的授決。

毘曇《毘婆沙》第七說,地獄眾生初生時會想:自己從前曾聽沙門說,貪欲是墮入地獄的過惡,是極可畏之處;自己從前沒有斷除貪欲,如今才受到這樣劇烈的苦惱。這是舉貪欲為地獄之因。

論中又說,五道各有本趣特有之法:地獄眾生的身色斷壞後還會續起;畜生能飛行虛空;餓鬼在人布施摶食時能來到人間;人趣有勇健、念力、梵行。所謂勇健,是尚未看見果報,卻能廣修其因;所謂念力,是很久以前所作之事仍能記憶;所謂梵行,是能得到通向解脫的部分,進而得到正決定。天趣則有自然隨意之能,所需之物隨即得到。〔云云:其餘從略。〕

地獄眾生也成就他化自在天相應的煩惱、業與善法,只是不在當下現行;他化自在天的眾生也成就地獄相應的煩惱、業與不善法,只是不在當下現行。舉最高與最低兩端,中間諸趣便可類推。

地獄是此方名稱。胡語泥犁,譯作『無有』,因為那裡沒有喜樂、沒有氣味、沒有歡悅、沒有利益,所以叫無有。又有一說把它解作卑下;一說解作墮落,因中陰身倒懸,諸根都受到毀壞;又一說,所謂無,是再沒有赦免之處。

獄卒有兩類。罪人受苦時所見的獄卒,是由業變化而現,不屬於眾生之數;最初把罪人綁到閻王之處的獄卒,則屬於眾生之數。按這一解釋,罪人初到時尚能說正常語言,一旦遭受苦痛,所發之聲就再也不能分辨。

畜生之名,一說因其身形橫傍、行走也橫傍。又一說,此趣遍在五道之中,所以叫遍有;四天王天與三十三天都有畜生,但上天所乘的象、馬等,是福業所化,不屬於眾生之數。又一說畜生名為盲冥,因為無明深重。劫初時,牠們都能理解聖語;後來飲食不同,又懷諂曲之心,語言才逐漸改變,有些更不能再說話。

鬼的胡語是闍梨多,此方譯為祖父。最初生到此道的眾生叫祖父,後來生到此道的也沿用此名。又因慳貪而墮入此趣,此趣眾生多受飢渴,所以叫餓鬼;又因受諸天驅使,並常懷求取飲食的希望,所以叫餓鬼。

人的胡語是摩㝹奢,此方譯作『意』。往昔頂生王初教化人民時,教人做任何事都應善加思惟、善加籌量、善加憶念。人民依王所教,做事先思量、憶念,所以人被稱為意。又因人能止息妄意、能修道而得到通達之分,所以稱人。另有一說,人名為慢,因五道之中人趣多有我慢。

阿修羅一名有三解。第一,修羅是天,阿是否定之辭,因其非天,所以叫阿修羅。第二,修羅是端正,彼趣形貌不端正,所以叫阿修羅。第三,修羅是酒,阿是無,彼趣沒有酒,所以叫阿修羅。

天名為勝,因為其天然自然、快樂殊勝、身相殊勝,一切事情都勝過其他諸趣,又常以自身光明照耀,所以叫天。另也直以天然自然解釋天。

《阿含經》說,眾生只是假名,界才是法。五趣眾生與不同法界和合:眾生起不善心時,便與不善界同在;起善心時,便與善界同在;起殊勝心時,便與勝界同在;起鄙劣心時,便與鄙界同在。因此,比丘應當學習種種善界。前面一大段是以因緣解釋六趣,這後一段則近似從觀心解釋六趣。

佛為這些眾生而生起大悲:前面先舉能見的佛眼,接著說佛眼所見的眾生,現在再說大悲熏發佛心,使祂應入三界,施設方便,引導眾生趣向佛慧。

四、大乘之化暫不能用

從佛初坐道場以下,是第二段,共十七行半,重頌佛施設方便教化。這一段分二:最初六行半,說佛想用大乘衡量眾生根機,卻不能相應;從追念過去諸佛起的第二部分有十一行,說佛想起諸佛都用三乘教化,這才與眾生所宜相稱而能奏效。

最初想用大乘教化又分三段:先用一行半,說以大乘衡量眾生是否相宜;第二,從眾生諸根鈍起,用三行說眾生沒有相應根機;第三,從佛自己思惟起,用兩行說祂決定暫停大乘教化。

所謂初坐道場,究竟真理本來沒有時間,只是為教化眾生而假立時分;這是教化的開端,所以叫初。若從事相解釋,佛最初在此處修治而得道,所以叫道場;祂坐在此樹下證得三菩提,所以叫道樹;祂觀察道樹,是感念樹蔭之恩;經行,是思念大地承載之德。在成道酬報恩澤之時,佛想以大法衡量眾生是否相宜。

若從觀心解釋,道樹就是十二因緣的大樹。深觀緣起而自成菩提之後,佛想以無漏法林的樹蔭利益眾生,所以說觀樹。所謂經行,大乘三十七品是行道之法;佛自己以道品履行一切地而成佛道,也想以此法教化、度脫眾生,所以起而經行。

樹與地本來沒有分別心,為何還須報恩?《未曾有經》說,只要以神通教化、傳布佛法,就叫作報恩。

《過去因果經》說,佛成道後的第一個七日,思惟自己所得之法微妙,無人能夠領受;第二個七日,思惟眾生有上、中、下三種根性;第三個七日,思惟誰應最先聞法。隨後祂前往波羅柰,為五人說四諦。陳如得到法眼清淨,頞髀拔提、十力迦葉、摩訶男、拘利尚未得道;佛再次宣說四諦,另外四人也得到法眼清淨。佛又說五陰無常、苦、空、非我,五人都成為阿羅漢。佛是佛寶,四諦是法寶,五人加上佛,合為六位阿羅漢,即是僧寶。

小雲疏說,最初三七日內已經是在說《法華經》。後文宿王華智佛在七寶菩提樹下說《法華經》,由此可知,今佛也在菩提樹下說《法華經》;只是鈍根眾生不能承受,所以佛隨順諸佛,開出三乘教化,後來才在王城說一乘。

若推求智者的本意,便是佛先在菩提樹下說佛慧,後來又在別處說佛慧;譬如今佛先說《華嚴經》,後說《法華經》。經文說,最初見到佛身、聽聞佛所說者,便進入如來智慧;其中只除先前修習小乘的人,而如今這些人也被引入如來智慧,正與此義相同。

五比丘又有一段宿緣。從前諸女聽仙人說法,惡生王發怒,割去仙人兩臂、耳、鼻等,流出的血變成乳。那位惡生王就是後來的拘鄰,那位仙人就是後來的佛。佛曾誓願使他得到甘露,所以成道後先使他聽聞法音。

有人問:為何最初要為五個人轉法輪?本論回答:因為人最先見諦;人能在現前之身親見;人能作證;佛所行事業與人相同;諸天要從人間得到善利;人間又具足出家、在家四眾。因此最初在人中為五人轉法輪。

轉輪王出世的聲音傳到他化自在天;憍陳如得道的聲音傳到梵天;佛得道的聲音傳到首陀會天。為何高下不同?因為善業、名譽業、稱讚父母師長之業各有上、中、下差別。若有頂天具有耳識,佛聲也會傳到那裡。轉輪王修十善,十善使人得生欲界天,所以欲界天歡喜自己的眷屬增加;陳如已離欲,所以聲音徹達梵天;佛最為殊勝,所以聲音達到尼吒天。〔云云:其餘從略。〕若依大乘,佛得道之聲遍至百億個尼吒天,又遍至十方無量無邊世界的尼吒天。〔云云:其餘從略。〕

初轉法輪之處、菩提樹之處、佛最初從忉利天下降之處、示現大神變之處,這四處是一切諸佛共同決定之處,其餘地點不定。又一說,若除去轉法輪一處,其餘三處決定。

對三七日,舊說是思惟理與教等,又一說是思惟勸與誡等。瑤師說,事理極深,即使至聖也須思量後才行動:第一個七日思惟佛智微妙,第二個七日思惟眾生根性不同,第三個七日思惟法藥有萬種,並以偈意證明:佛所得智慧微妙第一,而眾生諸根遲鈍,應當如何度化?

本論則說,佛安住法身之地,寂而常照,恆以佛眼洞察一切,毫無遺漏,怎會到道場後還停留三七日,才開始思量這件事?三七之說是有所表顯。它表示佛起初想依三周說法,所以假說三個七日:第一個七日思量法說,第二個七日思量譬說,第三個七日思量因緣說;三次都因沒有相應根機而不能施行,所以暫停大乘,先施設小乘。這是偏就圓教大乘作解釋。

若通就大乘解釋,第一個七日思惟要說圓教大乘,第二個七日思惟要說別教,第三個七日思惟要說通教大乘;三者都因沒有相應根機而不能施行,所以暫停大乘,先說三藏三乘,作方便教化。若從觀心解釋,最初想觀中道,中道微妙,難以觀成;其次想觀即假,即假觀的分別智難以生起;最後想觀即空,即空的善巧度脫也不能成,才改觀以析法為方便的小觀。

從眾生諸根遲鈍起的三行,說眾生沒有相應根機,又分三段:先用半行說障礙深重;第二,從像這樣的人起,用半行說他們不能承受聽聞大法;第三,從梵王請法起,用兩行說諸梵天王雖然請說大法,佛知道眾生沒有根機,所以不說。

從佛自己思惟起的兩行,說祂想暫停教化,又分二段:先用一行半說,眾生沒有根機,若勉強宣說,聽者反而受到損害;最後半行才正式說明暫停大乘教化。

五、三乘方便得以救濟

從追念過去諸佛起的十一行,重頌在一佛乘中方便說三。全段分二:最初十行正說教化能夠奏效;最後一行解除疑惑。前十行又分四段:第一,一行,說以三乘衡量眾生根機;第二,從生起這樣的思惟起,用六行半說眾生有相應根機;第三,從思惟此事起,用一行半說正式施行教化;第四,從這就叫作起,用一行說眾生受持、修行。

所謂追念,是佛想到這些眾生雖然沒有大乘根機,卻不能永遠棄捨,仍須用方便誘導救濟。這並不是佛原來完全不知道開三,而是要顯示自己與諸佛同道,所以說追念。

從生起此念以下的六行半,說眾生具有小乘根機,又分二段:最初四行半說諸佛讚歎,後兩行說釋迦佛酬答而隨順。先前想用大乘教化時,眾生沒有根機,所以諸佛沒有讚歎;如今想說小乘,曲折地會合根緣,終究能使眾生得度,所以諸佛才讚歎。

諸佛讚歎又分五項。第一,用三句敘述諸佛現身。因為釋迦佛念及諸佛方便之力,所以諸佛出現;這個出現又具備擬定教法與會合根機兩義。第二,從讚歎善哉起,用一行一句正面讚歎釋迦佛能隱藏真實、施設權巧,所以稱善哉。祂為一乘而施設三乘,把眾生引入佛慧,所以是第一導師。所得無上之法,是所得實智微妙第一;運用方便之力,是隨順一切諸佛,隱實而用權。第三,用一行說諸佛也都隱實用權。第四,用一行雙重解釋隱實與施權:眾生智慧少,不能聽聞大乘,所以隱實;眾生又喜愛小法,所以施權。第五,用半行雙重總結:雖然說三乘,最終仍是為了顯示真實。

後兩行說釋迦佛酬順。祂聽到諸佛讚歎後回答南無。南無在此譯作敬從,包含兩層:第一行是發言表示敬從,第二行是心念隨順眾生根機。

從思惟此事起的一行半,是正式施教。諸法寂滅之相本不可用言語宣說,這就是前面所說中道無性、作為佛種的道理。此理不屬可數之法,也不可言說,如今卻以方便把它說成三乘。此理本來非生非滅,卻以方便說成生滅。偏真之理本來也不是可以指示言說的,卻以方便開作四門宣說。最初為五人說無常,就是有門。

從這就叫作轉法輪起的一行,說眾生受持、修行而悟入。把佛心中用來教化他人的法轉入他人心中,就叫轉法輪。陳如最初見諦,斷除見惑,分證滅諦,也就是分得有餘涅槃;涅槃這一聲教從此生起。他後來成為無學,所以有阿羅漢之名。能說三乘法者叫佛,所說三乘叫法,見諦的阿羅漢等叫僧,佛、法、僧三寶由此出現於世間。

六、久遠調熟,而今顯實

從久遠劫以來起的一行,是解除兩種疑惑。第一種疑佛:難道佛起初不能照見根機,直到追念諸佛才知道眾生的根性?回答是,佛並非原來不知道使用方便,只是要顯示自己與諸佛同道,所以念及諸佛;不是從這一念才開始知道。祂從久遠劫以來,早已看見眾生喜愛小法,也早已為他們讚歎、開示,使他們滅盡眾苦。因此,他們如今一聽小乘便能解脫。

第二種疑弟子:眾生怎能只在一世短暫聽聞,就證得阿羅漢?回答是,佛從久遠劫以來已經為他們讚歎、開示,如今所說恰好符合他們往昔熏習,所以能迅速得道。

舊說認為這一偈預先暗指〈如來壽量品〉之義,若只論祕密之意,或許可以如此;若說是明顯宣露之意,就不對。因為將要開說壽量時,彌勒尚且不知道此義,怎麼會在這裡用一偈預先指出?本論因此只用它解除上述兩疑。

從佛看見佛子等起的六行,重頌顯實,文中具足四一。從看見佛子起的兩行頌人一,因為三乘行人都是佛子,前文也兼含此意。從佛隨即生起此念起的一行頌理一,因為為眾生說佛慧,就是前文所說一切種智與佛知見。從告訴舍利弗應知起的兩行頌教一,因為只說無上道就是教一。從菩薩聽聞此法起的一行頌行一,因為眾人都將作佛,所以是行一。

這六行又可分成四意:最初兩行說大乘機緣發動,也叫索求果位;其次兩行一句說佛歡喜,因為眾生將得到大乘利益;再次三句正面顯實;最後一行說眾生受持、修行而悟入。

眾生因大乘機緣發動,所以叫索果;索果正由機緣發動而來。障礙去除與大機發動,可成四種情形。第一,障礙已除而大機未發,如諸阿羅漢在三藏教時,因為喜愛小法,濁障雖已去除,大根仍然遲鈍,微妙機緣尚未發動。第二,大機已發而障礙未除,如《法華經》中的凡夫,雖未斷除煩惱結使,卻因大根銳利而機緣發動。第三,障礙去除與大機發動同時發生,如說《無量義經》時證得二乘果,當座大機也隨即發動。第四,障礙未除,大機也未發,就是退席的五千人等。

所謂志求佛道,是索求大乘,不是求小果。索求又有三義。第一,大乘機緣本有感得果位之義,這是從根機說索求。第二,心中暗自求問自己究竟能得還是不能得,這是從情意說索求。第三,發言索求,就是殷勤三請。往昔教法中已有根機與情意兩種索求,只是尚未發言;到今日才三種索求全都具足。

有人問:過去出火宅後索求三車,若那是根機與情意的索求,經文又說如父先前所許,明明是在求三車,與求一有何關係?回答是:諸子出了宅卻沒有看見三車,必然知道另有去路;他們拿過去所許的三車來求問那個不同的真意,所以也可說是在索求一乘。

對眾人都以恭敬心來到佛所,一說是他們以小乘為恥而仰慕大乘,大乘機緣感佛,所以稱來到佛所。本論說,不只根機到達佛所,他們的身體也實際到場;如《無量義經》中四眾圍繞佛,合掌恭敬,一心想聽具足之道。

他們曾從諸佛聽聞方便所說之法,意思是早先已從最初一味的調伏開始,受持、修行三藏、六度,以及通、別等三教方便。經過這些方便調熟,障礙才得以去除,大乘機緣才得以發動,因而索求大法。

從佛隨即生起此念起的兩行一句,說眾生障礙已除,所以佛歡喜。佛本為佛慧而出世;從前眾生障礙深重而沒有根機,不能立即說佛慧;中間時期障礙雖漸去除,仍然不能宣說;如今根機發動,正是說法之時。過去眾生根鈍、智慧狹小,佛怕他們誹謗正法而墮入惡道,所以不是說法之時;如今根利、志向廣大,聽聞後必能信解,所以佛歡喜。所謂無畏,是不再擔心他們執著小乘、誹謗大乘,由此造罪墮惡。

從佛在菩薩眾中起的三句,是正面顯實。五乘是曲折而非直道,通、別兩教偏在一邊而非正道;如今都捨去那些偏曲,只說正直的一道。

從菩薩聽聞此法起的一行,說受持、修行而悟入。六度教與通教中的兩類菩薩,最初聽到略說時,舊有執著受到震動,新疑又生;如今都已消除。這並不只說菩薩,二乘人也是如此。經文一處說聲聞都將作佛,是因過去教法不說二乘作佛,如今才為他們授記;但授記怎會只限二乘?消除疑惑又怎會只限菩薩?經文互相保留一邊,兩義便都具足。

有人問:菩薩有什麼疑惑?回答是:三藏教說菩薩經三僧祇仍未斷惑,一旦斷惑便入真諦;通教說菩薩斷正使而保留習氣,習氣盡時便成佛。如今最初聽到略說,卻說這些全是方便,那麼往昔所證的真、往昔所成的佛,究竟安在?又三乘共同修學一道,為何結果還有差別?如今聽聞《法華經》,這些疑惑全被掃除,不留一點芥子般的殘餘。

七、難遇、難聞、難信

從三世諸佛起的五行半,重頌歎法希有,並非正作下文不虛譬之本。這部分分二。第一行頌上文所說的妙法;妙法就是權與實。引三世諸佛同樣使用權教,是說權教為引導眾生的方式。引三世諸佛同樣顯示真實,是說真實處言語道斷,哪裡還有一定的方式?而且權與實本來沒有分別,只因鈍根、小智的人加以分別;如今悟入一與三不二,便知道佛所說的三與一本無分別。諸佛全都如此,並非只有釋迦佛如此。

其後四行半重頌要到適當時候才說。經文列出四難。諸佛出現世間,經過極久遠時才有一佛出世,這是人難。即使佛已出世,正法仍然難說,如今佛出世四十餘年才顯示真實。〔云云:其餘從略。〕這是法難。經過無量無數劫才能聽聞此法,是聞法難;如退席的五千人,梵音充滿耳中,卻仍越席離去,可見真正聽聞並不容易。能聽受此法的人也難,因為當時大眾之中只有舍利弗先行通達,中、下根人雖然在聽,仍未能明了,這是信受難。優曇花的譬喻通譬以上四難,文字只明說聞法難,其餘三難可以依例理解。

八、不虛與舊說的最後七行

從勸眾人不要疑惑起的兩行半,重頌上文不虛,又分二:最初一行半,勸人不要對可信之人生疑;後一行,勸人不要對可信之法生疑。世間人王說話尚且不二,佛是法王,怎會虛妄宣說?方便雖是暫時權設,所顯真實怎會是妄語?所以聽法王說法,不應生疑。

舊說把從再告舍利弗起的七行看作不再重頌敦信,只是釋迦章中勸人信受、弘傳此經之意。七行分二:最初五行半,命人弘經,使他修習成佛之因;最後一行半,略為授記。

前五行半又可細分。第一行命人仰慕佛果、修習佛因,而修因必須弘經。佛四十餘年把此法含藏心中,其他人都不知道,所以叫祕;一乘直道總攝萬條道路,所以叫要。從五濁惡世起的一行解釋祕要:障礙深重的人終究不能理解,所以如來祕藏此法,不隨便宣說。從未來世起的兩行說明弘經所對之人:最初一行說不善人不可為他宣說,後一行說善人應當為他宣說。從再告舍利弗起的一行半雙結兩義:最初一行結祕要,說此法本來如此,先用萬億方便,後來才開示真實;後半行結弘經所對之人,說不學習者不能明白,正是結成不善人不可為說;反過來說,學習者能夠明白,便是可以為他宣說。

最後一行半是略為授記。最初三句說此人已經有理解,中間一句說此人已經沒有疑惑,最後半偈說此人得到授記。既有理解又沒有疑惑,理當歡喜自己將會作佛。這裡的授記,作後文舍利弗等得到授記之本;這裡的弘經,作後文命舍利弗流通此經之本。以上是舊說。

九、本論所判:揀眾而後敦信

本論認為,從五濁以後的六行,是重頌上文揀別聽眾、敦促信受。上文既明明有這一段近在眼前,怎能反而說它不是重頌?

六行分二:最初三行頌揀眾,後三行頌敦信。最初說五濁的一行,頌上文揀除非真佛弟子之人。若人貪著種種欲樂,就是在行魔業,所以必須揀除。上文貪著涅槃者尚且不是真佛弟子,這裡貪著生死者又怎會是真佛弟子?兩處只是互相從一邊揀除。

說這些人終究不求佛道的一行,頌上文揀除增上慢人。增上慢者尚未得到上法,卻自以為已經得到上法,所以不再求佛道。

說未來惡人的一行,頌上文如來滅後真正理解經義的人很難遇到。說有慚愧、身心清淨的一行,頌上文若能遇到其他佛,便會得到決了。

最後三行重頌敦信;若有人不信此法,是沒有道理的。最初一行半敦促眾人信受權巧,後一行半敦促眾人信受真實。對權與實都不再疑惑,便會自己知道將來必定作佛。〔云云:其餘從略。〕

I. First Establishing the Foundation of the Parable

Beginning with “I too am now like this” are forty-three and a half lines of verse restating the chapter on Śākyamuni Buddha's teaching. The preceding prose does not praise the rarity of the Buddha-Dharma, but the verse includes all six meanings. In the old explanation of this chapter, the doctrinal meaning on which the later parable depends was first identified here and then pointed back to when the parable itself was reached. Dharma and parable interweave above and below, easily dazzling readers of the commentary, confusing those who hear it taught, and further bewildering those of dull faculties. The private recorder therefore first arranged the relevant material here and attached it again in the later passage, so that he could use it to illuminate what precedes and follows.

The verse of the Śākyamuni chapter has two functions: first, it restates what precedes; second, it establishes the foundation for what follows. Those of sharp faculties have already understood, while those of middling faculties have not, and so a parable is still required to enable people to understand the preceding Dharma-teaching through simile. A parable does not arise in isolation; it must have grounds that continue from the preceding text. These grounds are called the “foundation of the parable.”

An old explanation divides the passage into five parables: first, the elder; second, deliberating how to rescue; third, inducing through the provisional; fourth, bestowing equally; and fifth, absence of falsehood. The first item, however, is actually a general parable and not merely the single meaning of the elder. The second reaches only the inability to rescue the children and lacks the meaning of seeing the fire. The root treatise therefore does not use this division.

Master Yao divides the prose of the Skillful Means chapter into four chapters. From the buddhas' teaching according to what is appropriate through the end of the prose, it positively reveals the reality of the one vehicle. The four chapters are: first, opening the four and three taught in the past to accomplish the four ones revealed now; second, explaining that because of the five turbidities the one vehicle could not initially be taught directly; third, beginning with the disciples' claim that they had attained, explaining which persons could not attain; and fourth, beginning with the exhortation to single-minded belief and understanding, explaining that the Buddha's words are not false. Though their opening and closing expressions differ, in meaning all concern the real. The following parable of the burning house illustrates only three of the chapters. From “Suppose there were an elder” through the children's wish that their father give the carts promptly illustrates the chapter on the five turbidities. From the equal gift to each child of one great cart through the children's attainment of the unprecedented illustrates the chapter on the real. From the elder's equal gift of carts through the question whether he spoke falsely illustrates the chapter on absence of falsehood.

Master Xuanchang divides it into six parables. First is the condition of the many disasters within the house. Second, because only the Buddha is awakened, the thought of teaching the one vehicle arises. Third, living beings cannot receive it, and so frightening matters are first described. Fourth, the pleasures of the three vehicles are taught. Fifth, the one-vehicle teaching is taught in return. Sixth, the Buddha's words are concluded to be free of falsehood.

Master Long also divides it into six parables. First, the father and children in the house illustrate the Buddha transforming living beings within the three realms. Second, the elder sees the fire arise, illustrating the Buddha seeing living beings in the six destinies through the buddha-eye. Third, the elder devises a way to rescue them from the fire, illustrating the Buddha's wish to liberate living beings during three seven-day periods while being unable to use the Great Vehicle. Fourth, the elder skillfully induces them through three carts, illustrating the Buddha's establishment of the three-vehicle teaching. Fifth, the elder gives one great cart, illustrating the Buddha's teaching of the Sūtra of the Lotus Blossom of the Wondrous Dharma. Sixth is the parable of absence of falsehood.

Another explanation has ten parables of the burning house. First, the two lines beginning with “I too am now like this” generally restate the provisional and real above and establish the foundation of the general parable below. Second, the four lines beginning with Śāriputra being told that he should know restate the five turbidities above and establish the foundation of the parable of seeing the fire below. Third, the six and a half lines beginning with the Buddha first sitting at the place of awakening explain that transformation through the Great Vehicle could not succeed and establish the foundation of the parable of the inability to rescue the children below. Fourth, the eleven lines beginning with recollecting the buddhas of the past explain that transformation through the three vehicles could succeed and establish the foundation of the parable of the children's successful rescue below. Fifth, the one line beginning with the Buddha seeing children of the Buddha explains the arousal of the Great Vehicle capacity and establishes the foundation of the parable of seeing the children escape disaster below. Sixth, the one line beginning with everyone coming with reverent minds explains practitioners of the three vehicles seeking their fruits and establishes the foundation of the parable of the children's seeking the carts below. Seventh, the two lines and one phrase beginning with the Buddha immediately forming this thought explain the Tathāgata's rejoicing and establish the foundation of the parable of the elder's rejoicing below. Eighth, the three phrases beginning with the Buddha among the bodhisattvas explain his revelation of the Great Vehicle to the assembly and establish the foundation of the parable of the equal gift of the great cart below. Ninth, the one line beginning with the bodhisattvas hearing this Dharma explains living beings' rejoicing and establishes the foundation of the parable of the children's rejoicing after obtaining the cart below. Tenth, the one and a half lines beginning with the exhortation not to doubt explain the Buddha's absence of falsehood and establish the foundation of the parable of the elder's absence of falsehood below.

Someone criticizes the ten-parable explanation: divided by sentences, there should be nineteen; divided by meaning, there are only six—general explanation, seeing the fire, unsuccessful transformation through the one vehicle, successful transformation through the three vehicles, renewed teaching of the one vehicle, and absence of falsehood—while all remaining material can be included within these six. Further, the ten-parable explanation disrupts the order of Dharma-teaching and parable. The Dharma-teaching has seeking the carts before the father's rejoicing, whereas the parable has the father's rejoicing before seeking the carts. Even if forcibly reconciled, the result remains circuitous. The Great and Lesser sides also contradict each other. In the Dharma-teaching, the Buddha rejoices upon seeing the Great Vehicle capacity aroused; in the parable, the father rejoices upon seeing the Lesser Vehicle capacity escape disaster. The Dharma-teaching concerns a Great Vehicle cause, while the parable narrates a Lesser Vehicle effect. The Dharma-teaching says that Great Vehicle obstructions are about to be removed, while the parable says that Lesser Vehicle disaster has already been escaped. The movement of meaning on the two sides does not agree. There is also a difference of presence and absence. The Dharma-teaching describes those of sharp faculties awakening easily and therefore has no seeking of the carts; the parable describes those of middling faculties still in doubt and therefore has the seeking. To interpret their reverent arrival as seeking the carts entirely misses the scripture's original intent. The division adopted by the root treatise has none of these four faults.

Comparing presence and absence in prose and verse, the prose has five items: opening three, revealing one, the five turbidities, true and false, and absence of falsehood. The verse likewise has five. The prose has true and false but no praise of the Dharma, while the verse has praise of the Dharma but no true and false; each manifests what is absent from the other. Comparing their order, the prose first opens three and later reveals one, while the verse first reveals one and later opens three. Comparing combination and separation, opening three and revealing one combine as the foundation of the general parable, taught together within two lines rather than separated. The passage on the five turbidities is separated into the foundations of four specific parables: opened and not combined. Absence of falsehood establishes the foundation of the parable of absence of falsehood and is neither separately opened nor combined with another item. In terms of inclusion and exclusion, all four passages establish the foundations of six parables and are therefore entirely included; the chapter praising the Dharma is not among those six and is therefore excluded. In terms of general and specific, the initial opening of the three to reveal the one generally narrates Śākyamuni Buddha's entire work of transformation, while everything after the five turbidities belongs to the specific parables. In terms of origin and trace, the general narration of the Buddha's teaching collectively contains both origin and trace, while the passage after the five turbidities separately explains them. The chapter on the five turbidities properly explains the origin in which the Buddha dwells in the Dharma-body and generates great compassion upon seeing living beings suffer. From the unsuccessful one-vehicle transformation onward, it explains the trace manifested in teaching and transformation. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

The root treatise's judgment is that the center of this passage is precisely opening the three to reveal the one. The preceding Dharma-teaching states this meaning directly, and those of sharp faculties awaken and understand immediately. Those of middling and dull faculties do not, and the Buddha therefore proceeds to give a parable, explaining three and one through simile so that they understand. Just as the preceding Dharma-teaching has a brief and an extensive opening of the three to reveal the one, the following parable should have a brief and an extensive promising of three carts and bestowing of one; the teaching through causes and conditions should likewise reveal the guiding of three into one. Divisions into three, six, or ten parables cannot accord with the complete text of the three rounds of teaching and also conflict with the understanding of the four great disciples. The root treatise therefore adopts none of them.

II. Brief and Extensive Verse

The root treatise broadly divides the verse of the Śākyamuni chapter in two. First, the two lines beginning with “I too am now like this” briefly restate the provisional and real above and establish the foundation of the general parable below. Second, the forty-one and a half lines beginning with “I observe through the buddha-eye” extensively restate the six meanings above and establish the foundations of the individual parables below.

Though the general verse is short, it already contains the six meanings and can therefore establish the foundations of the six meanings in the general parable. The “I” in “I too am now like this” is Śākyamuni Buddha, the agent of an entire lifetime's teaching and transformation, and establishes the foundation of the great elder below. “Peace” is the dwelling place of great nirvāṇa's permanence and bliss. It is quiescent and free of the obstructions of the five turbidities and is therefore called peaceful. Peace is opposed to lack of peace. Birth-and-death in the three realms is where the Buddha carries out teaching and transformation, and the obstructions of the five turbidities make it unpeaceful; this establishes the foundation of the burning house below. Living beings are the persons throughout the five destinies who receive transformation, establishing the foundation of the five hundred people below. Peace can also mean the peaceful Dharma, opposed to the unpeaceful Dharma of the five turbidities and establishing the foundation of the fire's arising below. Manifold Dharma gateways are opposed to what is not manifold and establish the foundation of the single gateway below. The Buddha's knowledge of living beings' natures and desires means that he knows the faculties and natures of beings in the five destinies to have the differences of three vehicles, establishing the foundation of the thirty children below. Viewed upward, these two lines are a brief verse; viewed downward, they are the foundation of the general parable. Foundation and branch follow each other before and after, making the textual meaning complete. When the parable is explained, the preceding passage will again be cited to prove what follows. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

The extensive verse of the six meanings is further divided into four passages, each establishing the foundation of a specific parable below. First, the four lines beginning with the Buddha's observation through the buddha-eye extensively restate the five turbidities and establish the foundation of the parable of seeing the fire. Second, the seventeen and a half lines beginning with the Buddha's first sitting at the place of awakening extensively restate the opening of three within the one vehicle and establish the foundation of the parable of suspending the Great and establishing the Lesser. Third, the six lines beginning with the Buddha's seeing children of the Buddha extensively restate revealing the real and establish the foundation of the parable of equally bestowing the great cart. Fourth, the five and a half lines beginning with the buddhas of the three times extensively restate praise of the Dharma's rarity; the following two and a half lines directly restate absence of falsehood; and the next six lines restate exhortation to believe. These three meanings together establish the foundation of the parable of absence of falsehood, within which the two and a half lines directly restating absence of falsehood are principally taken.

Dividing the first passage more finely, the verse on the five turbidities has three meanings. The first half-line and one character concern observation through the buddha-eye and establish the foundation of the elder's ability to see. The next two lines, three phrases, and four characters concern the five turbidities seen by the Buddha and establish the foundation of the fire seen by the elder. The final half-line concerns the Buddha's generation of great compassion and establishes the foundation of the elder's alarmed entry into the burning house. The second passage, beginning with the Buddha's first sitting at the place of awakening, can again be divided in two according to opening three. The first six and a half lines explain the wish to transform through the Great Vehicle and its failure, establishing the foundation of the parable in which the elder has bodily and manual strength yet temporarily suspends the Great Vehicle. The eleven lines beginning with recollecting the buddhas of the past explain following the other buddhas in transforming through three vehicles and establish the foundation of the parable in which three carts are established and Lesser Vehicle skillful means employed. The third passage, restating the revelation of the real, has four meanings. First, two lines explain the arousal of Great Vehicle capacity and establish the foundation of the parable of seeking the carts. Second, two lines and one phrase explain the Buddha's rejoicing and establish the foundation of the elder's rejoicing upon seeing the children escape disaster. Third, three phrases directly reveal the real and establish the foundation of the parable of equally bestowing one great cart. Fourth, one line explains reception, practice, awakening, and entry and establishes the foundation of the parable of the children's rejoicing upon receiving one great cart. The verse on absence of falsehood directly establishes the foundation of the parable of absence of falsehood and is not further divided.

Under one broader division there can be three parables. The first two lines are combined and not divided, establishing the foundation of the general parable. The passage beginning with observation through the buddha-eye is divided and not combined, establishing the foundations of the specific parables. The parable of absence of falsehood is neither divided nor combined and directly establishes that foundation. Following the brief and extensive verse that continues from above and establishes the text below, the three rounds of teaching and the meaning of the Faith and Understanding chapter remain complete. If the extensive verse is further opened into four meanings, restating the four meanings above and establishing the foundations of four parables below, the three rounds and Faith and Understanding likewise remain complete. If divided still more finely, the verse on the five turbidities opens into three, the verse on skillful means into two, the verse on revealing the real into four, and absence of falsehood stands as one, making ten meanings that can establish the foundations of ten parables below. Yet these ten meanings have corresponding text only in the rounds of Dharma-teaching and parable, while Faith and Understanding and the teaching through causes and conditions become incomplete. The root treatise therefore divides the chapter at three levels to continue from above and establish the text below, not to segment it arbitrarily without purpose.

The first line of the brief verse restates revealing the real; the second restates opening the provisional. Though the wording is narrow, it fully contains one principle, one class of persons, one practice, and one teaching. The Buddha's statement that he is like the other buddhas means that he likewise transforms living beings through the single reality and generally restates revealing the real. The peaceful place is the secret treasury of nirvāṇa. The Buddha himself dwells there and also places living beings within the secret treasury; the peaceful place therefore restates one principle. Living beings restates one class of persons. Entering the buddha path through manifold Dharma gateways restates one practice. The Buddha's proclamation restates one teaching. The power of wisdom is the power of provisional wisdom. Knowing living beings' natures and desires illuminates Lesser Vehicle capacities. Skillfully teaching the various dharmas is the actual establishment of provisional teaching. Causing living beings all to rejoice means that the teaching accords with what is appropriate and fits their capacities. Though brief, these two verses gather the entire beginning and end of opening the provisional to reveal the real throughout the Buddha's lifetime of teaching, omitting nothing from beginning to completion. They are therefore called the brief verse and establish the foundation of the general parable below.

The extensive verse has forty-one and a half lines and extensively restates the six meanings above. An old explanation takes the final seven lines as the transmission section of the Dharma-teaching, but the root treatise does not adopt this and instead takes them as restating praise of the Dharma and exhortation to believe. The six passages are, in order: the first four lines restate opening three because of the five turbidities; the second passage's seventeen and a half lines restate establishing skillful means in teaching and transformation; the third passage's six lines restate revealing the real; the fourth passage's five and a half lines restate praise of the Dharma's rarity, an item absent from the prose of the Śākyamuni chapter but referable to the gateway of the buddhas in general; the fifth passage's two and a half lines restate absence of falsehood; and the sixth passage's six lines restate the exhortation to believe. In the first four lines on the five turbidities, the prose has four items—announcing the number, listing the names, giving their substance, and concluding the explanation—while the verse restates only the number, names, and substance. The prose says that the three vehicles are taught because of the five turbidities, whereas the verse says that the Buddha appears in the world because of them. The Buddha should have taught the Great Vehicle upon appearing, but because of obstructions he first teaches the Lesser as a last resort.

III. What the Buddha-Eye Sees and Where Great Compassion Responds

The first four lines are further divided into three passages. The first eleven characters say that the Buddha possesses the eye capable of seeing. The second, beginning with living beings in the six destinies, uses two lines, three phrases, and four characters to explain the five turbidities seen by the Buddha. The third, beginning with the Buddha's acting for these living beings, uses half a line to explain that he generates great compassion and responds by going to their aid.

The Buddha's observation through the buddha-eye corresponds to the later elder standing outside the gate. From this one knows that the Buddha dwells on the ground of the Dharma-body and completely illuminates all capacities through the constantly quiescent buddha-eye. If living beings have sharp faculties and light turbid obstructions, he manifests the body of Vairocana and teaches the one-vehicle Dharma. If they have dull faculties and heavy turbid obstructions, he removes his jeweled necklaces, manifests as an old monk, enters the burning house in alarm, and skillfully opens three. Here the passage only says that the Buddha then examined living beings' capacities and therefore calls it observation through the buddha-eye.

If observing forms, one should properly speak of the divine eye. If distinguishing faculties, one should properly speak of the Dharma-eye. Why does the passage instead speak of the buddha-eye? Because the buddha-eye perfectly interpenetrates and comprehends; raising what is highest and supreme includes what is lower. Moreover, the other four eyes merge into the buddha-eye and may all be called the buddha-eye. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

The five turbidities seen by the Buddha occur at five places in the verse. Living beings' poverty and lack of merit and wisdom restate the turbidity of living beings. Their entry into the dangerous road of birth-and-death, with suffering continuing without interruption, restates the turbidity of life. Their deep attachment to the five desires restates the turbidity of afflictions. Their failure to seek the Buddha of great power or the Dharma that ends suffering restates the turbidity of the eon. Their deep entry into manifold deviant views and attempt to seek the abandonment of suffering through causes of suffering restates the turbidity of views.

There are two explanations of “seeking to abandon suffering through suffering.” One says that people burn their bodies with five kinds of heat and hope thereby to abandon suffering, but instead obtain painful retribution. Another says that the various deviant views belong to feeling and feeling itself is suffering; how could practicing such a cause of suffering in the hope of abandoning suffering possibly succeed?

The Sūtra of Universal Radiance explains the origins of the five destinies: observing the five precepts brings birth in the human destiny, cultivating the ten wholesome acts brings birth among gods, stinginess and greed lead to the hungry-ghost destiny, defiance and resistance lead to the animal destiny, and committing the ten unwholesome acts leads to hell. Without the five destinies, five aggregates, and six deteriorations there is nirvāṇa. Neither dwelling in birth-and-death nor abiding in nirvāṇa, one receives the prediction of awakening.

Fascicle Seven of the Abhidharma Vibhāṣā says that when beings are first born in hell they think: “Formerly I heard renunciants say that greed and desire are the fault leading to hell, a place greatly to be feared. I formerly failed to sever greed and desire, and now I undergo such intense torment.” This presents greed and desire as a cause of hell.

The treatise further says that each of the five destinies possesses phenomena natural to that destiny. The bodily form of hell beings arises again after being destroyed. Animals can fly through empty space. Hungry ghosts can come into the human realm when people give morsels of food. The human destiny possesses vigor, power of recollection, and brahmā-conduct. Vigor means broadly cultivating a cause before seeing its fruit. Power of recollection means being able to remember things done long ago. Brahmā-conduct means obtaining the shares conducive to liberation and proceeding to correct certainty. The heavenly destiny has the natural ability for things to accord with one's wishes: whatever is needed is immediately obtained. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

Hell beings also possess the afflictions, karma, and wholesome dharmas corresponding to the Heaven of Mastery over Others' Creations, but these are not presently active. Beings in that heaven likewise possess the afflictions, karma, and unwholesome dharmas corresponding to hell, but these are not presently active. By raising the highest and lowest extremes, the intervening destinies can be understood by analogy.

“Hell” is the name in this land. The foreign term niraya is translated “absence,” because there is no joy, fragrance, delight, or benefit there. Another explanation takes it to mean lowly. One takes it to mean fallen, because the intermediate-existence body hangs upside down and all its faculties are damaged. Another says that absence means there is no further place of pardon.

There are two classes of jailers. The jailers seen when offenders suffer are transformations produced by karma and are not counted among living beings. The jailers who first bind offenders and bring them before King Yama are counted among living beings. According to this explanation, offenders can still speak normal language when they first arrive; once they undergo suffering, the sounds they emit can no longer be distinguished.

One explanation says that animals receive their name because their bodily forms are horizontal and they also move horizontally. Another says that this destiny exists throughout all five destinies and is therefore called universally present. Animals are found in the heavens of the Four Great Kings and the Thirty-Three, but elephants, horses, and other mounts in the higher heavens are transformations of meritorious karma and are not counted among living beings. Another says that animals are called blind and dark because their ignorance is severe. At the beginning of the eon they could all understand noble speech. Later, as food differed and crooked minds arose, their language gradually changed and some could no longer speak.

The foreign term for a ghost is Sheliduo, translated here as “grandfather.” Beings first born in this destiny were called grandfathers, and those born there later continued to use the name. Because stinginess and greed cause descent into this destiny and its beings mostly suffer hunger and thirst, they are called hungry ghosts. Because they are driven by the gods and constantly hope to obtain food, they are likewise called hungry ghosts.

The foreign term for a human is Monushe, translated here as “intention.” When King Summit-Born first transformed his people in the past, he taught them to reflect well, deliberate well, and recollect well before doing anything. Following the king's teaching, people first deliberated and recollected before acting and were therefore called intention. Humans are also so called because they can quiet false intentions, cultivate the path, and attain shares conducive to penetration. Another explanation says that the name human means pride, because among the five destinies the human destiny has much self-pride.

The name asura has three explanations. First, sura means god and a is a negative, so because they are not gods they are called asuras. Second, sura means upright and beautiful; because beings in that destiny are not upright or beautiful, they are called asuras. Third, sura means wine and a means absence; because that destiny has no wine, they are called asuras.

God means supreme: they are natural and spontaneous, their pleasures and bodily forms are supreme, everything about them surpasses the other destinies, and they constantly illuminate through their own radiance. They are therefore called gods. Another explanation directly takes the term to mean natural and spontaneous.

An Āgama says that living being is only a provisional name, while realm is the Dharma. Living beings in the five destinies combine with differing Dharma realms. When living beings generate unwholesome minds, they accompany an unwholesome realm. When they generate wholesome minds, they accompany a wholesome realm. When they generate superior minds, they accompany a superior realm. When they generate inferior minds, they accompany an inferior realm. Monks should therefore train in the various wholesome realms. The long preceding passage explains the six destinies through causes and conditions, while this latter passage approximates an explanation through contemplating the mind.

The Buddha generates great compassion for these living beings. The passage first raised the buddha-eye capable of seeing, next explained the living beings seen by that eye, and now says that great compassion perfumes and arouses the Buddha's mind, causing him to respond by entering the three realms, establishing skillful means, and guiding living beings toward buddha-wisdom.

IV. Transformation through the Great Vehicle Temporarily Cannot Be Used

Beginning with the Buddha's first sitting at the place of awakening is the second passage, with seventeen and a half lines restating his establishment of skillful means in teaching and transformation. It is divided in two. The first six and a half lines explain that the Buddha considers living beings' capacities through the Great Vehicle but cannot accord with them. The second part, beginning with recollecting the buddhas of the past, has eleven lines and explains that he recollects how the buddhas all transform through three vehicles; only then does the teaching accord with what is suitable for living beings and succeed.

The initial wish to transform through the Great Vehicle is further divided into three passages. First, one and a half lines consider whether the Great Vehicle is suitable for living beings. Second, the three lines beginning with living beings' dull faculties explain that they lack the corresponding capacity. Third, the two lines beginning with the Buddha's own reflection explain his decision to suspend Great Vehicle transformation temporarily.

Regarding the Buddha's first sitting at the place of awakening, ultimate principle originally has no time, but divisions of time are provisionally established to transform living beings. Since this is the beginning of transformation, it is called first. Explained in terms of events, the Buddha initially cultivated at this place and attained the path, and it is therefore called the place of awakening. He sat beneath this tree and realized complete awakening, and it is therefore called the tree of awakening. He contemplates the tree to recollect the kindness of its shade, and walks in meditation to recollect the virtue of the great earth that bears him. While requiting kindness upon attaining the path, the Buddha considers through the great Dharma whether living beings are suitable.

Explained through contemplating the mind, the tree of awakening is the great tree of the twelve links of dependent arising. After deeply contemplating dependent arising and himself accomplishing awakening, the Buddha wishes to benefit living beings with the shade of the forest of uncontaminated Dharma, and so the text speaks of contemplating the tree. As for walking in meditation, the thirty-seven factors of the Great Vehicle are dharmas for practicing the path. The Buddha himself treads every ground through the factors of the path and accomplishes buddhahood, and he also wishes to teach and liberate living beings through this Dharma; he therefore rises and walks in meditation.

Trees and earth originally have no discriminating minds, so why must their kindness be repaid? The Sūtra of the Unprecedented says that simply transforming through supernormal powers and transmitting the Buddha-Dharma is called requiting kindness.

The Sūtra of Past Causes and Effects says that during the first seven days after attaining the path, the Buddha considered that the Dharma he had attained was wondrous and no one could receive it. During the second seven days, he considered that living beings had superior, middling, and inferior faculties. During the third seven days, he considered who should hear the Dharma first. He then went to Vārāṇasī and taught the four truths to five people. Chenru attained purity of the Dharma-eye, while Ebi Bati, Shili Jiaye, Mohenan, and Juli had not yet attained the path. The Buddha taught the four truths again, and the other four also attained purity of the Dharma-eye. The Buddha then taught that the five aggregates are impermanent, suffering, empty, and not-self, and all five became arhats. The Buddha is the Buddha Jewel, the four truths the Dharma Jewel, and the five men together with the Buddha make six arhats and constitute the Saṅgha Jewel.

The Xiaoyun commentary says that during the first three seven-day periods the Buddha was already teaching the Lotus Sūtra. Since the later text says that the Buddha King of Constellations and Flower Wisdom taught the Lotus Sūtra beneath a seven-jeweled bodhi tree, one can know that the present Buddha likewise taught the Lotus Sūtra beneath the bodhi tree. Living beings of dull faculties could not bear it, however, and so the Buddha followed the other buddhas in opening three vehicles for transformation and only later taught the one vehicle in the royal city.

If Zhiyi's intent is sought, it is that the Buddha first taught buddha-wisdom beneath the bodhi tree and later taught buddha-wisdom elsewhere, just as the present Buddha first taught the Flower Garland Sūtra and later the Lotus Sūtra. The scripture says that those who first saw the Buddha's body and heard his teaching entered the Tathāgata's wisdom, except only those who had previously cultivated a Lesser Vehicle; these people too are now guided into the Tathāgata's wisdom, precisely agreeing with this meaning.

The five monks also had a past connection. Once, after a group of women heard an immortal teach the Dharma, King Evil-Born became angry and cut off the immortal's arms, ears, nose, and other parts; the blood that flowed turned into milk. That King Evil-Born later became Julin, and that immortal later became the Buddha. The Buddha had vowed to cause him to attain the deathless nectar and therefore caused him to hear the sound of Dharma first after attaining the path.

Someone asks: Why did the Buddha first turn the Dharma wheel for five people? The root treatise answers: because humans first see truth; humans can see directly in their present bodies; humans can realize; the activities performed by the Buddha resemble those of humans; the gods obtain wholesome benefit from the human realm; and the complete fourfold assembly of monastic and lay people exists among humans. The Dharma wheel was therefore first turned among humans for five people.

The sound of a wheel-turning king's appearance reaches the Heaven of Mastery over Others' Creations; the sound of Kauṇḍinya's attainment of the path reaches the Brahmā heavens; and the sound of the Buddha's attainment reaches the Pure Abodes. Why do they differ in height? Because wholesome karma, karma of renown, and karma of praising parents, teachers, and elders have superior, middling, and inferior levels. If the Summit of Existence has auditory consciousness, the Buddha's sound also reaches there. A wheel-turning king cultivates the ten wholesome acts, which cause birth in the desire-realm heavens, and so those heavens rejoice that their retinue has increased. Kauṇḍinya has left desire, and his sound therefore reaches the Brahmā heavens. The Buddha is supreme, and his sound therefore reaches the Akaniṣṭha Heaven. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕 According to the Great Vehicle, the sound of the Buddha's attainment reaches a billion Akaniṣṭha heavens and then the Akaniṣṭha heavens throughout immeasurable and boundless worlds in the ten directions. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

The place of the first turning of the Dharma wheel, the place of the bodhi tree, the place where the Buddha first descended from the Heaven of the Thirty-Three, and the place where he manifested great supernormal transformation are four fixed places shared by all buddhas; other locations are not fixed. Another explanation says that if the place of turning the Dharma wheel is excluded, the remaining three are fixed.

One old explanation says that the three seven-day periods concern contemplating principle, teaching, and related matters; another says they concern exhortation, admonition, and related matters. Master Yao says that event and principle are so profound that even the utmost sage must reflect before acting. During the first seven days, the Buddha considered the subtlety of buddha-wisdom. During the second, he considered the differences in living beings' faculties. During the third, he considered the ten thousand kinds of Dharma medicine. The meaning of the verse proves this: the wisdom attained by the Buddha is wondrous and foremost, while living beings' faculties are dull—how should they be liberated?

The root treatise instead says that the Buddha dwells on the ground of the Dharma-body, quiescent yet constantly illuminating, forever seeing all through the buddha-eye without the slightest omission. How could he only begin to consider this matter after remaining at the place of awakening for three seven-day periods? The three periods are expressive. They indicate that the Buddha initially intended to teach in three rounds and therefore provisionally speak of three seven-day periods: during the first, he considered teaching through Dharma; during the second, teaching through parable; and during the third, teaching through causes and conditions from former lives. None could be carried out because the corresponding capacity was absent, so he suspended the Great Vehicle and first established the Lesser. This is explained particularly in terms of the Great Vehicle of the Perfect teaching.

Explained generally in terms of the Great Vehicle, during the first seven days the Buddha considered teaching the Great Vehicle of the Perfect teaching; during the second, the Separate teaching; during the third, the Great Vehicle of the Shared teaching. None could be carried out because the corresponding capacity was absent, so he suspended the Great Vehicle and first taught the three vehicles of the Tripiṭaka teaching as skillful transformation. Explained through contemplating the mind, he first wished to contemplate the middle path, but the middle is wondrous and difficult to contemplate. Next he wished to contemplate the immediately provisional, but discriminating wisdom in that contemplation was difficult to generate. Finally he wished to contemplate the immediately empty, but its skillful liberation could not be accomplished. He therefore changed to the Lesser contemplation that analyzes dharmas as a skillful means.

The three lines beginning with living beings' dull faculties say that they lack the corresponding capacity and are further divided into three passages. The first half-line says that their obstructions are severe. The second half-line, beginning with people such as these, says that they cannot bear hearing the great Dharma. The final two lines, beginning with the Brahmā kings' request for the Dharma, say that although the Brahmā kings request the great Dharma, the Buddha knows that living beings lack the capacity and therefore does not teach it.

The two lines beginning with the Buddha's own reflection explain his wish to suspend transformation and are divided in two. The first one and a half lines say that because living beings lack the capacity, if the teaching is forced upon them the listeners will instead be harmed. The final half-line formally explains suspending Great Vehicle transformation.

V. Skillful Means of the Three Vehicles Can Rescue

The eleven lines beginning with recollecting the buddhas of the past restate the skillful teaching of three within the one buddha vehicle. The passage is divided in two. The first ten lines positively explain successful transformation; the last line resolves doubt. The first ten are further divided into four passages. First, one line considers living beings' capacities through the three vehicles. Second, the six and a half lines beginning with the formation of this thought say that living beings possess the corresponding capacity. Third, the one and a half lines beginning with having considered this matter explain the actual implementation of transformation. Fourth, the one line beginning with “This is called” explains living beings' reception and practice.

Recollection means that the Buddha considers that although these living beings lack Great Vehicle capacities, they can never be abandoned forever and still must be guided and rescued through skillful means. It does not mean that the Buddha previously knew nothing of opening three, but displays that he follows the same path as the other buddhas and therefore speaks of recollection.

The six and a half lines beginning with forming this thought say that living beings possess Lesser Vehicle capacities and are divided in two. The first four and a half lines concern the buddhas' praise; the latter two concern Śākyamuni Buddha's response and compliance. When he previously wished to transform through the Great Vehicle, living beings lacked the capacity and the buddhas therefore did not praise him. Now that he intends to teach the Lesser Vehicle, indirectly meeting the conditions of their faculties and ultimately enabling liberation, the buddhas praise him.

The buddhas' praise is further divided into five items. First, three phrases narrate their manifestation. Because Śākyamuni Buddha recollects the buddhas' power of skillful means, they appear; this manifestation possesses both the meanings of considering the teaching and meeting the capacity. Second, the one line and one phrase beginning with the praise “Excellent!” directly praise Śākyamuni Buddha's ability to conceal the real and establish the provisional, and so they say excellent. He establishes three for the sake of the one vehicle and guides living beings into buddha-wisdom, and is therefore the foremost guide. The unsurpassed Dharma attained is the subtle and foremost real wisdom attained; using the power of skillful means is following all buddhas in concealing the real and employing the provisional. Third, one line says that the buddhas all likewise conceal the real and employ the provisional. Fourth, one line gives a double explanation of concealing the real and establishing the provisional. Because living beings possess little wisdom and cannot hear the Great Vehicle, the real is concealed; because they delight in a Lesser Dharma, the provisional is established. Fifth, half a line gives a double conclusion: although three vehicles are taught, the final purpose remains revealing the real.

The latter two lines explain Śākyamuni Buddha's response and compliance. After hearing the buddhas' praise, he responds “Namo.” Here namo is translated reverent compliance and contains two levels: the first line verbally expresses reverent compliance, while the second expresses the mental thought of complying with living beings' capacities.

The one and a half lines beginning with having considered this matter concern the actual implementation of teaching. The marks of all dharmas are quiescent and originally cannot be proclaimed in words. This is the preceding principle of the middle path's absence of nature as the buddha-seed. This principle is not an enumerable dharma and cannot be spoken, yet it is now provisionally taught as three vehicles. This principle originally neither arises nor ceases, yet arising and ceasing are taught as skillful means. The principle of partial truth originally cannot be indicated or proclaimed either, yet it is opened provisionally and taught through four gateways. The initial teaching of impermanence to the five men is the gateway of existence.

The one line beginning with “This is called turning the Dharma wheel” explains living beings' reception, practice, awakening, and entry. Turning the Dharma within the Buddha's mind that transforms others into the minds of others is called turning the Dharma wheel. Chenru initially sees truth, severs the delusion of views, and partially realizes the truth of extinction, thereby partially attaining nirvāṇa with remainder; the vocal teaching of nirvāṇa begins from this point. He later becomes one beyond training and therefore receives the name arhat. One capable of teaching the three-vehicle Dharma is called Buddha, the three vehicles taught are called Dharma, and arhats who see truth and others are called Saṅgha. The Three Jewels of Buddha, Dharma, and Saṅgha thereby appear in the world.

VI. Ripened from the Distant Past, the Real Is Revealed Now

The one line beginning with distant eons in the past resolves two doubts. The first concerns the Buddha: Was the Buddha initially unable to illuminate living beings' capacities and only learned their natures after recollecting the other buddhas? The answer is that the Buddha did not previously fail to know how to use skillful means. He recollects the buddhas only to display that he follows the same path, not because he began to know through this thought. Throughout distant eons he has long seen that living beings delight in a Lesser Dharma and has long praised and shown it to them, enabling them to extinguish all suffering. They can therefore attain liberation as soon as they hear the Lesser Vehicle now.

The second doubt concerns the disciples: How can living beings realize arhatship after hearing only briefly in one lifetime? The answer is that throughout distant eons the Buddha has already praised and shown the teaching to them. What is taught now accords precisely with their past habituation, and they can therefore attain the path swiftly.

An old explanation takes this verse as a concealed advance indication of the meaning of the Life Span of the Tathāgata chapter. In terms only of a secret meaning this may be possible; as an explicitly disclosed meaning it is incorrect. When the Life Span is about to be taught, even Maitreya still does not know this meaning. How could one verse have disclosed it in advance here? The root treatise therefore uses the verse only to resolve the two doubts above.

The six lines beginning with the Buddha's seeing children of the Buddha restate revealing the real and fully contain the four ones. The two lines beginning with seeing children of the Buddha restate one class of persons because practitioners of the three vehicles are all children of the Buddha, a meaning also included in the preceding passage. The one line beginning with the Buddha immediately forming this thought restates one principle because teaching buddha-wisdom to living beings is the comprehensive wisdom and Buddha's knowledge and vision spoken of above. The two lines beginning with Śāriputra being told that he should know restate one teaching because teaching only the unsurpassed path is one teaching. The one line beginning with the bodhisattvas hearing this Dharma restates one practice because all in the assembly will become buddhas.

These six lines can also be divided into four meanings. The first two lines explain arousal of the Great Vehicle capacity, also called seeking the fruit. The next two lines and one phrase explain the Buddha's rejoicing because living beings will obtain Great Vehicle benefit. The next three phrases directly reveal the real. The final line explains living beings' reception, practice, awakening, and entry.

Because living beings' Great Vehicle capacity is aroused, it is called seeking the fruit; seeking the fruit follows directly from the capacity's arousal. The removal of obstructions and arousal of the great capacity form four cases. First, obstructions have been removed but the great capacity has not arisen, as with arhats during the Tripiṭaka teaching: because they delight in the Lesser Dharma, although their turbid obstructions have been removed, their great faculties remain dull and the subtle capacity has not arisen. Second, the great capacity has arisen but obstructions have not been removed, as with ordinary beings in the Lotus Sūtra: although they have not severed the bonds of affliction, their great faculties are sharp and the capacity arises. Third, removal of obstructions and arousal of the great capacity occur together, as when people realize the fruits of the two vehicles during the teaching of the Sūtra of Immeasurable Meanings and the great capacity immediately arises in that very assembly. Fourth, obstructions have not been removed and the great capacity has not arisen, as with the five thousand who left the assembly.

Aspiring to the buddha path means seeking the Great Vehicle, not seeking a Lesser fruit. Seeking has three meanings. First, the Great Vehicle capacity inherently possesses the meaning of eliciting a fruit; this is seeking in terms of capacity. Second, silently asking in one's mind whether one can attain it is seeking in terms of feeling. Third, seeking through speech is the three earnest requests. Former teachings already contained seeking through capacity and feeling, but it had not yet been voiced. Only today are all three kinds of seeking complete.

Someone asks: After leaving the burning house in the past, the children sought three carts. If that was seeking through capacity and feeling, and the scripture says “as the father previously promised,” they were clearly seeking three carts. What relation does that have to seeking one? The answer is that when the children left the house and did not see the three carts, they necessarily knew that there was another way forward. They used the three carts promised in the past to inquire into that different true intent, and this too can be called seeking the one vehicle.

Concerning everyone's coming to the Buddha with a reverent mind, one explanation says that they were ashamed of the Lesser Vehicle and aspired to the Great, and their Great Vehicle capacity elicited the Buddha; this is therefore called coming to the Buddha. The root treatise says that not only did their capacities reach the Buddha, but their bodies actually came to the assembly, as in the Sūtra of Immeasurable Meanings, where the fourfold assembly surrounds the Buddha, joins palms reverently, and single-mindedly wishes to hear the complete path.

That they had formerly heard the dharmas taught as skillful means from the buddhas means that, beginning with the initial single flavor of discipline, they had received and practiced the Tripiṭaka teaching, the six perfections, and such skillful means as the Shared and Separate teachings. Through ripening by these skillful means, their obstructions could be removed, the Great Vehicle capacity could arise, and they could seek the great Dharma.

The two lines and one phrase beginning with the Buddha immediately forming this thought explain that living beings' obstructions have been removed and the Buddha therefore rejoices. The Buddha originally appears in the world for buddha-wisdom. In the past, living beings' obstructions were severe and they lacked the capacity, so buddha-wisdom could not be taught immediately. During the intervening period their obstructions were gradually removed, but it still could not be proclaimed. Now the capacity is aroused, and this is precisely the time to teach. In the past, living beings had dull faculties and narrow wisdom, and the Buddha feared that they would slander the true Dharma and fall into evil destinies; it was therefore not the time to teach. Now their faculties are sharp and aspirations vast, and after hearing they will certainly believe and understand, so the Buddha rejoices. Fearlessness means no longer fearing that through attachment to the Lesser Vehicle they will slander the Great Vehicle, create offenses, and fall into evil destinies.

The three phrases beginning with the Buddha among the bodhisattva assembly directly reveal the real. The five vehicles are crooked and not a direct path, while the Shared and Separate teachings incline to one side and are not the correct path. All those partial and crooked paths are now relinquished, and only the one straightforward path is taught.

The one line beginning with the bodhisattvas hearing this Dharma explains reception, practice, awakening, and entry. The two kinds of bodhisattva in the teaching of the six perfections and the Shared teaching had their old attachments stirred and new doubts generated upon first hearing the brief explanation; now all have been removed. This does not concern only bodhisattvas: people of the two vehicles are likewise. One passage of the scripture says that all śrāvakas will become buddhas because earlier teachings did not say that the two vehicles become buddhas and only now are predictions bestowed on them. But how could predictions be limited to the two vehicles? How could the removal of doubt be limited to bodhisattvas? The scripture preserves one side in each place, and both meanings are thereby complete.

Someone asks: What doubt do bodhisattvas possess? The answer is that the Tripiṭaka teaching says bodhisattvas do not sever delusion even after three incalculable eons and that once they sever it they enter truth. The Shared teaching says bodhisattvas sever the primary afflictions while retaining habituation and become buddhas when the habituation is exhausted. Yet the brief explanation now says that all these are skillful means. Where, then, are the truth realized in the past and buddhahood accomplished in the past? Further, if all three vehicles cultivate one path together, why do their results still differ? Hearing the Lotus Sūtra now sweeps away all these doubts without leaving even a mustard seed's trace.

VII. Difficult to Encounter, Hear, and Believe

The five and a half lines beginning with the buddhas of the three times restate praise of the Dharma's rarity and do not directly establish the foundation of the later parable of absence of falsehood. This section is divided in two. The first line restates the wondrous Dharma above, namely the provisional and real. Citing the buddhas of the three times all using provisional teachings says that provisional teachings are means for guiding living beings. Citing the buddhas of the three times all revealing the real says that at the real the road of words is cut off—how could there be a fixed method? Moreover, provisional and real are originally without distinction and are distinguished only by people of dull faculties and lesser wisdom. Now, awakening to the nonduality of one and three, one knows that the three and one taught by the Buddha were originally without distinction. All buddhas are so, not only Śākyamuni Buddha.

The following four and a half lines restate that the teaching occurs only when the time is appropriate. The scripture lists four difficulties. A buddha appears in the world only after an extremely distant time; this is the difficulty of the person. Even when a buddha has appeared, the true Dharma remains difficult to teach: the present Buddha reveals the real only after more than forty years in the world. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕 This is the difficulty of the Dharma. Hearing this Dharma requires immeasurable and incalculable eons; this is the difficulty of hearing the Dharma. The five thousand who left the assembly had the Brahmā voice filling their ears, yet still rose and departed, showing that genuine hearing is not easy. Those able to hear and receive this Dharma are also difficult to find. At that time only Śāriputra within the assembly understood first; those of middling and dull faculties listened but still did not understand. This is the difficulty of belief and reception. The udumbara-flower simile generally illustrates all four difficulties. The wording explicitly states only the difficulty of hearing the Dharma; the other three can be understood by analogy.

VIII. Absence of Falsehood and the Old Explanation of the Final Seven Lines

The two and a half lines beginning with the exhortation not to doubt restate the preceding absence of falsehood and are divided in two. The first one and a half lines exhort people not to doubt the trustworthy person; the last line exhorts them not to doubt the trustworthy Dharma. Even the words of worldly kings are not double; how could the Buddha, the Dharma King, teach falsely? Although skillful means are temporary provisional establishments, how could the real they reveal be false speech? One therefore should not doubt when hearing the Dharma King teach.

An old explanation takes the seven lines beginning with Śāriputra being addressed again not as a further restatement of the exhortation to believe, but simply as the Śākyamuni chapter's intent to exhort belief in and transmission of this scripture. The seven lines are divided in two. The first five and a half instruct people to transmit the scripture and thereby cultivate the cause of buddhahood. The final one and a half briefly bestow a prediction.

The first five and a half lines can be divided more finely. The first instructs people to aspire to the buddha-fruit and cultivate its cause, and cultivating the cause requires transmitting the scripture. The Buddha held this Dharma concealed in his mind for more than forty years, unknown to others, and it is therefore called secret. The direct path of the one vehicle collectively encompasses the myriad roads and is therefore called essential. The one line beginning with the evil world of the five turbidities explains secret and essential. People with severe obstructions ultimately cannot understand, so the Tathāgata secretly stores this Dharma and does not teach it casually. The two lines beginning with future ages explain the people for whom the scripture is transmitted. The first says it should not be taught to unwholesome people; the latter says it should be taught to good people. The one and a half lines beginning with Śāriputra being addressed again give a double conclusion. The first line concludes secret and essential, saying that this Dharma is originally so: innumerable skillful means are first used and only later is the real opened and shown. The latter half-line concludes the people for whom the scripture is transmitted, saying that those who do not train and study cannot understand; this concludes that it should not be taught to unwholesome people. Conversely, those who train and study can understand and are people to whom it may be taught.

The final one and a half lines briefly bestow a prediction. The first three phrases say that this person already possesses understanding, the middle phrase that this person is already free of doubt, and the final half-verse that this person receives a prediction. Possessing understanding and being free of doubt, one should naturally rejoice in one's future buddhahood. The prediction here establishes the foundation for the later predictions bestowed on Śāriputra and others. The transmission of the scripture here establishes the foundation for the later instruction that Śāriputra circulate it. This is the old explanation.

IX. The Root Treatise's Judgment: Distinguishing the Assembly and Then Exhorting Belief

The root treatise considers the six lines beginning after the five turbidities to restate distinguishing the listening assembly and exhorting belief. Since the preceding prose clearly has this passage immediately before one's eyes, how could one instead say that it is not restated?

The six lines are divided in two: the first three restate distinguishing the assembly, and the latter three restate exhorting belief. The initial one line on the five turbidities restates the preceding distinction and exclusion of those who are not genuine disciples of the Buddha. People attached to various sensual pleasures perform Māra's work and must therefore be distinguished and excluded. The preceding passage says that even those attached to nirvāṇa are not genuine disciples of the Buddha; how could those attached to birth-and-death here be genuine disciples? The two passages each distinguish and exclude from one side.

The one line saying that these people ultimately do not seek the buddha path restates the preceding distinction and exclusion of people of overweening pride. Those of overweening pride have not attained the superior Dharma yet think they have and therefore no longer seek the buddha path.

The one line on evil people in future ages restates the preceding point that people who genuinely understand the scripture after the Tathāgata's extinction are difficult to encounter. The one line on those with a sense of shame and purified body and mind restates the preceding point that if they can encounter other buddhas, they will attain decisive understanding.

The final three lines restate exhortation to believe: there is no reason for anyone not to believe this Dharma. The first one and a half lines exhort the assembly to believe the provisional; the latter one and a half exhort them to believe the real. Free of doubt about both provisional and real, they will themselves know that they will certainly become buddhas in the future. 〔The remainder is abbreviated.〕

Translator · 釋慧鏡 Shi Huijing — with AI-assisted consistency checking

License · CC BY-NC-SA 4.0